FCC ID: EOTBDD4T85-1 Paragon/PD

 

ParagonPD Data Base Station Technical Manual Version 2.00 Preliminary, internal use The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2000 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. October 2000 Part no.: 120 20170-200 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................................................1 Features:..................................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .......................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 Factory Repair.........................................................................................................................................2 1.5.2 Model Designation...................................................................................................................................3 1.6 RADIO SERIES I OR II.........................................................................................................................................4 1.7 PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................4 2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................4 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................................4 2.2 LOCATION .........................................................................................................................................................4 2.3 ELECTRICAL ......................................................................................................................................................4 Radio Assembly Power ............................................................................................................................7 BDLCPD assembly Power.........................................................................................................................8 2.4 ANTENNA ..........................................................................................................................................................8 2.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................8 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection ..........................................................................................................................8 2.5 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ....................................................................................................8 2.6 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION................................................................................................................9 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................9 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.1.5.1 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2 3.1.1.3 3.1.1.4 3.1.1.5 3.1 RADIO ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................................................................9 Front panels.............................................................................................................................................9 Receiver module ............................................................................................................................................. 9 Exciter module.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Power Amp module ...................................................................................................................................... 10 Speaker panel................................................................................................................................................ 10 Dual Power Supply module .......................................................................................................................... 11 Rear Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 11 Radio Assembly, rear panel ...................................................................................................................11 Backplane PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 11 3.2 BDLCPD ..........................................................................................................................................................12 BDLCPD Front panel..............................................................................................................................12 Front Switches .............................................................................................................................................. 12 Reset......................................................................................................................................................... 12 PF 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 12 LEDs and Indications....................................................................................................................................................... 14 Radio Network Indicators ........................................................................................................................ 14 3.2.1.2.1 RS-232 Port Indicators............................................................................................................................. 14 3.2.1.2.2 3.2.1.2.3 Check and Power ..................................................................................................................................... 15 3.2.1.2.4 Alarm Indicators....................................................................................................................................... 15 BDLCPD Rear panel ...............................................................................................................................16 Signal Levels................................................................................................................................................. 16 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.1.1.1 3.2.1.1.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.1.1 3.2.2 3.2.1 4. RIS PROGRAM................................................................................................................................................17 4.1 OPERATION .....................................................................................................................................................18 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START RIS..........................................................................................................................18 4.3 SCREEN ...........................................................................................................................................................19 120 20170-200 ii ParagonPD Technical Manual 4.4.3 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.2 4.4.1.3 4.4 FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................................................19 4.4.1 Configuration to a file ...........................................................................................................................19 Connect Button ............................................................................................................................................. 20 Get button.................................................................................................................................................. 20 Get As button............................................................................................................................................. 20 4.4.2 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................21 Put From button......................................................................................................................................... 21 Station Reset button .................................................................................................................................. 21 Special Functions...................................................................................................................................21 Banner Field and i button .......................................................................................................................... 21 Comments ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 22 Test Functions........................................................................................................................................22 Channel Selection ......................................................................................................................................... 22 TXON Tests.................................................................................................................................................. 22 4.4.4.2.1 Unmodulated Carrier................................................................................................................................ 22 4.4.4.2.2 Modulated Carrier .................................................................................................................................... 22 Ping Button ................................................................................................................................................... 23 Ping addresses............................................................................................................................................... 23 Flatness test button........................................................................................................................................ 23 Random data test........................................................................................................................................... 23 4.4.4.3 4.4.4.4 4.4.4.5 4.4.4.6 4.4.3.1 4.4.3.2 4.4.3.3 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4 5. TESTING AND TROUBLE-SHOOTING ......................................................................................................24 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED....................................................................................................................................24 5.2 RECOMMENDED CHECKS.................................................................................................................................24 6. RADIO PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................28 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.1 SERIES I 800MHZ RADIO PROGRAMMING.......................................................................................................28 6.1.1 Recommended Items ..............................................................................................................................28 6.1.2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................28 6.1.3 File Creation..........................................................................................................................................29 6.1.4 Programming the EPROM.....................................................................................................................30 6.1.5 EPROM Installation ..............................................................................................................................31 6.1.6 Channel Selection via DIP Switches......................................................................................................31 6.2 SERIES I 800MHZ RADIO TUNING...................................................................................................................32 Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................................32 Receiver Module (T885) ........................................................................................................................33 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 33 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 33 Front-End Alignment .................................................................................................................................... 33 SINAD and Linearity Check ......................................................................................................................... 34 RSSI Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... 34 Exciter Module (T881)...........................................................................................................................35 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 35 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 35 TX Frequency Error Adjustment................................................................................................................... 35 Low Frequency Balance Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 36 Exciter Power Output.................................................................................................................................... 36 Power Amplifier Module (T889)............................................................................................................37 Power Amplifier Power Out.......................................................................................................................... 37 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 37 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 37 6.3 SERIES II RADIO PROGRAMMING.....................................................................................................................40 6.3.1 Recommended Items ..............................................................................................................................40 6.3.2 Module Programming............................................................................................................................41 6.3.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches......................................................................................................44 6.4 SERIES II RADIO TUNING.................................................................................................................................45 Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................................45 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.3.3 6.2.3.4 6.2.3.5 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.4.1 120 20170-200 iii ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2 Receiver module (T855 & T835)............................................................................................................45 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 45 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 46 Front-End Alignment .................................................................................................................................... 46 SINAD and Linearity Check ......................................................................................................................... 46 RSSI Adjustment (UHF: T855) .................................................................................................................... 47 RSSI Adjustment (VHF: T835) .................................................................................................................... 48 Exciter Module (T857 or T837) .............................................................................................................49 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 49 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 49 TX Frequency Error Adjustment................................................................................................................... 49 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 50 Exciter Power Output.................................................................................................................................... 51 Power Amplifier Module (T859 or T839) ..............................................................................................51 Power Amplifier Power Output .................................................................................................................... 51 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 51 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 51 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure .............................................................................................. 52 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency ........................................................................................................... 52 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.2.6 6.4.3.1 6.4.3.2 6.4.3.3 6.4.3.4 6.4.3.5 6.4.4.1 6.4.4.2 6.4.4.3 6.4.4.4 6.4.4.5 6.4.3 6.4.4 7. SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................................................58 APPENDIX 1 - PARAGON PD DEVIATION ADJUST.........................................................................................................57 FIGURE 1 TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLIES, FRONT VIEW...................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BDLCPD, FRONT VIEW..................................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLIES ASSEMBLY, REAR VIEW ....................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - BDLCPD, REAR VIEW....................................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 5 - BDLCPDS REAR CONNECTION, SWITCH AND FUSE .......................................................................................8 FIGURE 6 - RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL.................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 7 - EXCITER MODULE, FRONT PANEL................................................................................................................10 FIGURE 8 - POWER AMP MODULE, FRONT PANEL..........................................................................................................10 FIGURE 9 - SPEAKER PANEL..........................................................................................................................................11 FIGURE 10 - DUAL POWER SUPPLY REAR CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................11 FIGURE 11 - BDLCPD MEMBRANE SWITCHES ...............................................................................................................12 FIGURE 12 - RF INDICATORS ........................................................................................................................................14 FIGURE 13 - RS-232 PORT LED INDICATORS ...............................................................................................................14 FIGURE 14 - ALARMS LED INDICATORS ....................................................................................................................15 FIGURE 15 - BDLCPD Y CABLE AND PINOUT ................................................................................................................17 FIGURE 16 - RIS MAIN SCREEN.....................................................................................................................................19 FIGURE 17 - CONNECT USING DIALOG WINDOW ........................................................................................................20 FIGURE 18 - SERIES I RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ..............................................................................................29 FIGURE 19 - SERIES I CHANNEL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................30 FIGURE 20 - CHANNEL SELECTION VIA DIP SWITCHES .................................................................................................32 FIGURE 21 - T885 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROL LOCATION ..........................................................................................38 FIGURE 22 - T881 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION...........................................................................................39 FIGURE 23 - RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ............................................................................................................42 FIGURE 24 - RECEIVER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN.............................................................................................42 FIGURE 25 - EXCITER SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN .................................................................................................43 FIGURE 26 - EXCITER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN...............................................................................................43 FIGURE 27 - BACKPLANE DIP SWITCHES EXAMPLE - CHANNEL 5 SELECTED................................................................44 FIGURE 28 - T855 AND T885, RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM.........................................................................................47 FIGURE 29 - T835, RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM .........................................................................................................48 FIGURE 30 T800-50-0001 BACKPLANE AND TEST PINS LOCATION.............................................................................48 FIGURE 31 - T859 TUNING SETTINGS ...........................................................................................................................52 120 20170-200 iv ParagonPD Technical Manual FIGURE 32 - T855 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .......................................................................................53 FIGURE 33 - T857 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATIONS .......................................................................................54 FIGURE 34 - T835 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .......................................................................................55 FIGURE 35 - T837 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .........................................................................................56 TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY LEDS INDICATIONS ..............................................................................................................7 TABLE 2- TX MODE SELECTION LEDS INDICATIONS ....................................................................................................13 TABLE 3 - TEST TRANSMISSIONS..................................................................................................................................13 TABLE 4 - RS-232 LED FUNCTION SELECTION SEQUENCE..........................................................................................14 TABLE 5 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS...............................................................................................................................16 TABLE 6 - DTE PORT 9-PIN FUNTIONS .........................................................................................................................16 TABLE 7 - DTE PORT 25-PIN FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................................................16 TABLE 8 - TYPICAL CARRIER MODULATION.................................................................................................................23 TABLE 9 - CHECKLIST A (AFTER INSTALLATION)..........................................................................................................25 TABLE 10 - CHECKLIST B (GENERAL) ..........................................................................................................................26 120 20170-200 v ParagonPD Technical Manual WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0 History Preliminary Version 2.0: October 2000 Further revision changes made to:

- Table 8 Carrier Modulation

- Section 6 Specifications. Preliminary - Version 2.0: September 2000 Further revision changes made to:

- Table 8 Carrier Modulation

- Table 10 Checklist B, (General)

- Section 6 Specifications. Preliminary - Version 2.0: August 2000 First release of SRRC4FSK modulated model, with speeds of up to 25.6 Kbps. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Section 1.5.2 Model Designation

- Table 3 Test transmissions Version 1.0: May 2000 First released version, DGFSK modulated model, and speeds up to 19200 b/s. 120 20170-200 vi ParagonPD Technical Manual Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Asynchronous AVL BDLCPD DBA DCE DTE GeminiPD Network Speed ParagonPD Parallel Decode Refarming Information that can be sent at random times, and not synchronized to a clock. Transmission characters begin with a start bit and end with a stop bit. Automatic Vehicle Location. Optional feature that involves using GPS (Global Positioning System) signals from the mobile unit by the Host PC. Base Station Data Link Controller (PD = Parallel decode). An async radiomo-

dem designed to control the base station in mobile systems. A component of ParagonPD. Dataradios Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation protocol designed for short-

inquiry/long response applications such as dispatch systems. Latest enhance-

ments include support for occasional long messages inbound, and for Out-of-

Band data for AVL reports with no extra overhead. Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. High specs mobile radiomodem. (PD = Parallel Decode) This is the bit rate on the RF link between units. Could be different from COM port baud rate. Factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station using Parallel Decode tech-

nology. Used in VIS mobile networks. Technology featuring dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments (Patent Pending). FCCs strategy for using the radio spectrum more efficiently to meet future communications requirements. Radio Assembly Radio modules used in ParagonPD and available in two distinct series depending RIS RS-232 VIS on radios frequency band. Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configura-

tion. Industrystandard interface for serial data transfer. Vehicular Information Solutions. Dataradios name for a series of products spe-

cially designed for mobile data. 120 20170-200 vii ParagonPD Technical Manual 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the setting up, operation, testing and trouble-

shooting of the DATARADIO ParagonPD radio-modem base station. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is intended for engineering, in-

stallation, and maintenance personnel. is a 1.2 General Description ParagonPD product factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station used in mobile networks and is designed specifically to fit the needs of vehicular applications. It features dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environ-

ments. When used with Dataradios state-of-the-art GeminiPD mobile data solution, the system delivers unequaled high-speed data performance and unmatched effective throughput. All ParagonPD models are supplied in a rack-

mount configuration that includes:

A ParagonPD Radio assembly A contemporary, high-speed Dataradio Base Station Data Link Controller

(BDLCPD). ParagonPD units do not include the optional wire line modem(s). Duplexer and backup power units are custom furnished items. The laptop PC and its application software are user-supplied items. 1.2.1 Features:

Dual receivers Parallel Decode technology

(Patent Pending) SRRC4FSK modulation capable of 25600 and 19200 b/s in 25 kHz channel spacing Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance and fewer retries Available in VHF, UHF (Series II) and 800 MHz (Series I) radio bands Power output of 20W to 70W for ParagonPDs 800 MHz and of 20W to 100W for VHF and UHF Supports high-efficiency Dataradio DBA over-the-air protocol Over-the-air compatible with SRRC4FSK modulated GeminiPD mobile products*

Modular design in a rugged die-cast alumi-

num chassis Full-duplex operation ParagonPD units are factory-configured based on each customers network system requirements

* Networks must use common bit and baud rates 120 20170-200 1 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

departments DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by con-

tacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is usually not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of individual radio modules. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair logic, modem boards and ra-

dio modules. Contact Technical Support for service informa-

tion before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authoriza-

tion) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should a question arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be re-

paired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the war-

ranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Support. 120 20170-200 2 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.5.2 Model Designation To correctly identify your ParagonPD unit, check its catalog number label located on the rear of the BDLCPD adjacent to the power connector. The first four digits designate the model:

- BDDD = ParagonPD (DGFSK)

- BDD4 = ParagonPD (SRRC4FSK) The next three digits designate the Band used:

83X = VHF, 100W 85X = UHF, 100W 88X = 800 MHz, 70W 1 = 136 156 MHz 2 = 148 174 MHz The next digit designates the RF band of opera-

tion:

For the 83X band:

For the 85X band:

For the 88X band:

1 = 400 440 MHz 2 = 440 480 MHz 3 = 480 520 MHz 1 = 800 880 MHz (RX 850 870 MHz (TX) 2 = 870 960 MHz (RX)

(TX, 5W only) The next digit designates the RF Bandwidth used:

For the 83X band:

0 = 25 kHz full channel, 2.5 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 2.5 ppm*

6 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 2.0 ppm* (U.S. model only) 0 = 25 kHz full channel, 1 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 1 ppm*

For the 85X band:

For the 88X band:

0 = 25 kHz full channel, 1.5 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 1.5 ppm*

* denotes Frequency Stability The next digit designates the transmitter power:

005 = 5 watt transmitter 070 = 70 watt transmitter (850-870 MHz only) 100 = 100 watt transmitter

The next and last digit designates the Power Source:

0 = Power supply deleted on order 2 = heavy-duty 120 VAC dual supplies 120 20170-200 3 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.6 Radio Series I or II System-engineered installations use one of two complements of ParagonPD radio modules. They are assembled on a common chassis:

Series I models:

- Frequency programming 800 MHz frequency range radios is done via EPROM. (This model does not use the pro-

gramming port of Series II models). Series II models:

- VHF and UHF frequency range radios (800 MHz models will be available as Series II at a later date)

- Frequency programming is done using soft-

ware via a programming port located on the speaker front panel. 1.7 Packaging Each ParagonPD product normally leaves the factory packaged as follows:

A Series I or II Dataradio base station Ra-

dio assembly A dual power supply assembly A Dataradio BDLCPD model A Radio Interface Cable to link the Radio assembly to the BDLCPD:

18-inch long Y cable; DB-25 female to dual DB-25 female (p/n 730 03374-

102) for connection between backplane PCBs and BDLCPD. One standard seven-foot 120VAC power cord Two DC power cables to connect the radio assembly to the dual power supply assem-

bly. Courtesy small parts kit Frequently, ParagonPD product components are field-assembled prior to customer delivery. The cabinetry may then be supplied in one of several custom rack-mount configurations that may also include fan, backhaul modems, duplexer/filters/combiners, and ancillary equipment. If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immedi-

ately. 2. Installation 2.1 Overview The cabinet and rack-mount housing the Para-

gonPDs Radio assembly and the BDLCPD is generally installed in a sheltered facility. Occa-

sionally located adjacent to the nerve center of the users network, it is often located near tower sites or at remote locations where it operates unattended. Furnishings needed include power, cabling and installation of antenna, landline or microwave modem and host PC or portable computer. De-

tails of these are outside the scope of this man-

ual. This manual covers the radio assembly and the BDLCPD that includes the modem. 2.2 Location Be sure to place the ParagonPD in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in trouble-

shooting) Access to the antenna connector and to the back connectors is possible without remov-

ing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling. 2.3 Electrical Standard 120 VAC electrical power is required. It should be capable of providing at least 10A. 120 20170-200 4 ParagonPD Technical Manual Air Flow Receiv er E xc ellence in R adio C ommunic at ions Receiv er Exciter Pow er Amp lifi er S peaker Panel Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Line Le vel Supply Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute Supply L ow Forw ard P ower Hi gh Re ver se Power Pow er Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Car ri er O n Line Le vel Supply Supply Line Sensitivi ty Microphone Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 OFF p rogra mmin g po rt Dual Power Supply Module OL Stby On Power OL Stby On Power Figure 1 Typical radio and power supply assemblies, front view T800 II Slimline CM FR FT RD TD 1 3 2 RS-232 CK LM LF RM UF ALARMS PF1 RES ET S-3 CS T X RX RF Figure 2 - BDLCPD, front view 120 20170-200 5 ParagonPD Technical Manual Air Flow FAN _ +

2 N C SK5 REAR VIEW PL1 PL1 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 2 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 1 GND DC INPUT 2 E S U F F U S E FUSE E S U F F U S E FUSE FUSE 2 FUSE 1 DC INPUT 1 13.8 VDC 2 AMPS MAX.

T808-10-00CA GND T807-10-00CA GND Figure 3 Typical radio and power supplies assembly, rear view Use only with a 250 V fu se Emp loyer uniquement av ec un fu sible de 250 V D EV. 3 R S-232 D EV. 2 R S-232 D EV. 1 R S-232 D EV. 6 DIG. I/O EX T. R AD IO/TE ST DEV. 5 RS-232 DEV. 4 RS-232 Figure 4 - BDLCPD, rear view 120 20170-200 6 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.3.1 Radio Assembly Power Referring to Figure 3, the Radio assembly unit receives two separate 13.8 VDC power inputs from a T800 Slimline dual power supply typi-

cally rack-mounted right below the main assem-

bly radio chassis. The T800 is made up of two separate power supply units joined in a single chassis:

A T807 using convection cooling is rated up to 15A. It supplies all the radio modules other than the Power Amplifier. A T808 using convection and fan cooling is rated up to 25A. It supplies only the Power Amplifier module. Normally used at room ambient temperatures, they can operate within specifications over a range of 10 to +60 C. Note: Internal over-temperature protection shuts down the main transformer above 105 degrees Celsius. Both power supply modules are internally con-

nected to ground via their individual, rear-

connected, seven-foot standard 120 VAC power cords. Nevertheless, each requires a separate secure electrical ground connection. Individual grounding tabs are provided next to the power connectors. Similarly, the Radio Assembly chassis requires a secure ground connection. A threaded grounding binding post fitted with a knurled binding-nut is provided on the chassis next to DC input 2. Separate grounding leads with appropriate con-

nectors are supplied (either in the courtesy small-parts kit or with one end fastened to the equipment. A- For each of the power supply modules:

1. Fit one end of the grounding leads push-on connector onto the grounding tab. B- For the Radio Assembly chassis:

1. Install the grounding leads lug over the binding post and firmly hand-

tighten the binding-nut. For both A and B 2. Fit the slotted connector (on the other end of each of the grounding connector) under a conveniently located screw on the rack frame or other support surface. Scrape away paint if needed to ensure clean contact. 3. Apply anti-corrosion compound where paint scraping was done. 4. Ensure by testing continuity that a se-

cure electrical and mechanical connec-

tion is achieved. If a DC rail (0V) is installed as part of the sys-

tem, the grounding leads may alternatively be fitted to the rail terminal. Caution:

Improper grounding between power supply case and rack frame may result in harmful voltage potentials and/or miscellaneous power supply switching noise problems in both receivers and transmitter. Press both red power buttons located on the front of the module to have complete power distribution to the Radio assembly. The power supply front panel LEDs indications are:

Table 1 - Power Supply LEDs Indications LED On Stby OL Color Green Red Steady Red Indication Power enabled *

Power disabled *

Current Overload Flashing green and red respectively On & OL

* To remove voltage from the power supply PCB, discon-

nect the main power cords. Over voltage For LEDs descriptions, see section 3.2.1.2 The Radio assembly is fused at the rear of the chassis:

Fuse 1 is a 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 10A Fuse 2 is a 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 30A 120 20170-200 7 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.3.2 BDLCPD assembly Power The BDLCPD assembly uses a standard 120 VAC power cord. Plug this cord to the rear power outlet shown in Figure 6. To check or install a fuse:

1. Open the slide-out fuse drawer located be-

low the power connector. 2. Use a fine bladed screwdriver or a knife blade and gently pry open. 3. Hold the fuse support in one hand and with the other, lift the center plastic retainer until it releases the fuse sliding base. 4. Replace or install a 250V, 2A fuse. 5. To complete the procedure, push the sliding fuse base until it snaps under the retainer. 6. Re-insert the fuse drawer in its housing and push until it is fully seated and closed. When ready to apply power, use the ON-OFF toggle power switch adjacent to the power con-

nector. ON-OFF Switch 120VAC Connector Fuse Slide-out Drawer Use only with a 250 V fuse Employer uniquement av ec un fusible de 250 V Figure 5 - BDLCPDs rear connection, switch and fuse 2.4 Antenna 2.4.1 Overview ParagonPD commonly uses three antennas (one transmit and two receive) unless a duplexer is used with one of the receive antennas; then only two antennas would be needed. They should be mounted according to any guidelines supplied with the antennas. For antennas placement and spacing, consult System Engineering. 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection 1- Route good quality 50-ohm double-shielded coaxial cable(s) (e.g. RG-214 or Heliax) from the selected antenna position(s) to the ParagonPD Radio assembly. 2- Terminate the RX-1 and RX-2 cable ends at the Receiver modules rear position with an N-type connector. 3- Similarly, terminate the TX cable end at the Power Amps module rear position with an N-type connector. Caution:

When terminating RF cables use brand-name crimping tools

(such as AMP, Jensen, Crimp-

Master, etc) of the correct size for the cable and type of connector used. Common pliers are NOT ac-

ceptable. 2.5 Completing the physical Installation. ParagonPD products are factory-configured to users requirements and are shipped ready to run. After new installations:

Re-check that all connections are secure on radio and BDLCPD assemblies (antennas, PC, power cords etc.) Check that fuses are inserted. Turn both BDLCPD and radio power ON. You are now ready to check for normal opera-

tion and to run the Radio Installation Software

(RIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. Any change(s) to the settings must be done via files saved on diskette and loaded into the unit using the RIS program. 120 20170-200 8 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.6 Checking out Normal Operation 1- Check that power is applied. 2- Check Radio assembly lights for proper op-

eration as per section 3.1.1 3- Check for proper operation of the BDLCPDs LEDs as per section 3.2.1.2. 4- Using the RIS program (described in section 4), and an in-line wattmeter, check forward

& reflected power to confirm antenna in-

stallations. 5- Using the RIS, check the RF link with a mobile station that can be heard, by using the RIS Ping feature. See section 4.4.4.3 If user application and a mobile station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 3. Operating Description 3.1 Radio Assembly The Radio assembly component of each Paragon product is made up of high performance synthe-

sized radio base station designed for single op-

eration. Referring to Figure 1 on page 5, the Ra-

dio Assemblys modules are commonly installed in a standard, 19-inch wide rack frame. 3.1.1 Front panels The complement of modules is identical for:

Series I, (800 MHz model) and Series II, (VHF and UHF models)*

* 800 MHz models will be available as Series II at a future date) 2 Receivers Exciter Power Amplifier Speaker panel Dual Power Supply Receiver module 3.1.1.1 The RX1 and RX2 receivers use identical front panel controls and indicators. These are:

Receiver Gating Sensitivity Gate Line Level Supply Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute Gating Sensitivity Gate LED Line Level Monitor Volume Monitor Mute On - Off Figure 6 - Receiver module front panel Gating Sensitivity - sets the RF signal level required to open the mute gate and allow audio to pass to the speaker. Gate LED - indicates the status of the mute circuit. It is lit when a signal above the mute threshold is received. Note:

Gating Sensitivity and Gate LED are not functionally used except to allow lis-

tening to incoming receptions as a trouble-

shooting aid. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

linked with plied. Fast Flashes when PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Line Level - Not used Monitor Volume - The audio output delivers up to one watt to the speaker. Always set volume knob to minimum when not in use to reduce current consumption. 120 20170-200 9 ParagonPD Technical Manual Monitor Mute switch - opens the mute, al-

lowing continuous monitoring of the audio signal. On = audio muted Exciter module 3.1.1.2 The Exciters front panel controls and indicators are:

Exciter Carrier On Supply Line Sensitivity Microphone Carrier Switch On LED Supply LED Line Sensitivity Microphone Socket Figure 7 - Exciter module, front panel Carrier Switch - momentarily keys the transmitter ON while pressed (used for test purposes only). On LED - is lit when transmitting Line Sensitivity not used. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Microphone Socket not used. 3.1.1.3 The Power Amp front panel and indicators are:

Power Amp module P o w e r A m plifier Supply LED S up ply Low Forward Power High Rev erse Power Po w e r Low Forward Power LED High Reverse Power LED Power Adjustment Figure 8 - Power Amp module, front panel Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Low Forward Power LED - is lit when for-

ward power is below the level set, normally 80% of nominal forward power. High Reverse Power LED - is lit when high reverse power is detected (e.g. VSWR=

3:1). Power - sets the PA output power:

- VHF & UHF: 20 100 Watts

800: 20-70 Watts Speaker panel 3.1.1.4 Referring to Figure 9, the speaker panel is fitted with a 4 speaker. Both series of radio assemblies share the same front panel fitted with an RJ11 connector. This connector is used to allow programming the ra-

dio from the front of the unit via a programming lead. This feature is exclusive to the Series II modules. 120 20170-200 10 ParagonPD Technical Manual If the speaker panel needs to be removed, a mir-

ror programming port connector is provided on both backplanes. Programming for Series I 800 MHz units is done via EPROM and is detailed in section 6.1. The RJ11 front port is covered (not used). S peaker Panel SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 O FF programm ing p ort Not Used with 800 MHz Series I model Figure 9 - Speaker panel 3.1.1.5 Dual Power Supply module The Dual Power Supply module is made up of two separate power supply units coupled in a single chassis. Refer to Table 1 on page 7 for tabular listing of power supply LEDs indicators. Refer to Figure 1 for the front panel LED lay-

out. This module has:

Two Power red-colored pushbutton switches - Push in for ON and release out for OFF. Control complete power distribu-

tion to the Radio assembly Two ON LEDs - light green when push button is ON; DC power is distributed to ra-

dio modules. Flash green in conjunction with the OL LED when an over voltage condition is present. Two Stby- Standby voltage LED, lights red when push button is off; AC power is applied but DC is not distributed to radio modules. To remove presence of voltage, disconnect both power cords. Two OL LEDs - Monitor current over-

load, light red when supply exceeds current limit set; nominally 25Amps (T808 model). Flashes red in conjunction with the ON LED when an over current condition is pre-

sent. Rear Connections 3.1.1.5.1 Referring to Figure 10, (convection-cooled model shown; fan-cooled model not illustrated), the rear connections for each of the power sup-

ply are:

Fail Alarm Off: Power supply OK; approx. +Vout

(via 1k resistor - typ. 13.8V). ON: Power supply failure; approx. -

Vout (via 11k resistors - typ. 0V)

+ Remote Not used for Paragon

- Sense Not used for Paragon

-VE main ground (0V)

+13.8V Mains DC output supply 1 5 A M a x

. 1 3 6 V O u p u t R e m o t e S e n s e F a i l l A a r m

Figure 10 - Dual Power Supply rear connections Note: more power supply installation details are covered in section 2.3.1 3.1.2 Radio Assembly, rear panel Backplane PCB 3.1.2.1 Referring to Figure 3, two main backplanes are used. Their main components are:

RJ11 connector Mirrors the one on the front of the Speaker panel (series connected 120 20170-200 11 ParagonPD Technical Manual to both backplanes). Used for programming the Radio Assembly whenever the speaker panel has been removed. This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Series I models programming is done externally via EPROMs. DB-25M plug at PL1 (one side of the Y cable on each PCB) used to supply the re-

ceive signal to the BDLCPDs single EXT.RADIO/TEST DB-25F plug. Two channel-select DIP switches (SW1 and SW2) This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Cooling fan driver CN2 located on back-

plane connects to the horizontally-mounted fan on top of the Radio assembly and acti-

vated by BDLCs PTT signal. Coaxial relay driver not used. 3.2 BDLCPD The rack-mounted BDLCPD is housed in a steel case. It has no user serviceable parts. Units configuration flash memory

(EEPROM). is stored in 3.2.1 BDLCPD Front panel Referring to Figure 2, the front panel of the BDLCPD has two cutouts across its length. A- The left cutout groups the units type label and ten LED indicators:

The S3 label designates the BDLCPD as a three Serial-port model

(Ports 4 and 5 are reserved for future use) The RF group of 3 LEDs The RS-232 group of 5 LEDs A single CK LED The ALARMS group of 4 LEDs B- The right cutout groups two tactile (mem-

brane) switches (PF1 and RESET). Front Switches 3.2.1.1 Referring to Figure 11, the BDLCPD uses two membrane-type switches labeled:

RESET PF 1 These switches indicate contact by emitting a short BEEP tone when pressed. PF1 RESET Figure 11 - BDLCPD membrane switches Reset 3.2.1.1.1 Pressing Reset produces the same result as pow-

ering OFF and ON again. It restarts the micro-

processor, the peripherals and invokes the on-

board diagnostics. BDLCPDs radio modules internal flash-memories are read and their val-

ues are loaded in system SRAM CPU flash-

memory. Normally, pressing Reset results in one short BEEP tone followed by all LEDs coming ON for about four seconds. Then, the LEDs flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds indi-

cating diagnostics are in progress. At the end of this period, all LEDs should be OFF except CK that should flash about six to eight times per second. Expect an additional two seconds delay for CK to start flashing and the UF indicator to come ON if the radio assembly is not connected or not powered (see section 3.2.1.2.4 for Alarm de-

tails). PF 1 3.2.1.1.2 PF 1 is a multi-function switch:

It clears LED error indications It initiates test transmissions It sets the function of the RS-232 LEDs 120 20170-200 12 ParagonPD Technical Manual Clearing Errors 3.2.1.1.2.1 Major and minor error LED indications remain lit on the front panel until:

The unit is RESET The unit is powered OFF and ON again PF 1 is pressed The PF 1 switch can be pressed at any time to clear an error display without affecting normal operations. Test Transmissions 3.2.1.1.2.2 To select a pattern and begin transmission, start by pressing and holding PF1. It beeps once, all five RS232 LEDs light; listen for a second beep followed by a third beep. After two seconds, the unit beeps and goes in TX Select mode with only the three rightmost RS-232 LEDs now used as selection indicators. Only release PF1 after the third beep. Following release:

Start of selection must be made within two seconds. If not, the unit will default to pat-

tern one and start test transmitting. PF1 may be pressed more than once. The number of times it is pressed determines the type of pattern that will be transmitted ac-

cording to Table 3 Each pressing of PF1 extends the two-

second timer. The three rightmost RS-232 LEDs display are used to indicate TX mode selection as shown in Table 2. Table 2- TX mode selection LEDs indications TX pattern selected Binary TX mode LED indications FT LED RD LED TD LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Off Off Off On On On On Off On On Off Off On On On Off On Off On Off On Once the type of transmission is selected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. Automatically, the BDLCPD turns its transmitter ON, sends the selected test pattern for 55 seconds and turns its transmitter OFF. The TX LED in the RF group of indicators lights in red while test transmitting. Pressing PF1 while the 55 seconds test is in progress stops the test. At the end of test transmission, BDLCPD opera-

tion returns to normal and the RX LED lights in green (monitoring normal transmitter activity). Table 3 - Test Transmissions

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 ParagonPD 16000 b/s 25600 b/s 2400 Hz Dotting*

3200 Hz Dotting*

Do not use Do not use 100 Hz Square wave 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustment tone 7 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustment tone

* Dotting with reduced amplitude Notes:

A dotting pattern consists of alternating sequence of 1s and 0s The square wave is used for balancing transmitter low frequency response The 1000 Hz sine can be used for transmitter distor-

tion measurements. Pattern 6 produces a transmission of 55 seconds fol-

lowed by 55 seconds of silence. Initial transmission in a sequence may be shorter than 55 seconds. TX LED stays steadily red for duration of the test. Press PF1 to terminate beacon mode. 3.2.1.1.2.3 RS-232 LED Function Selection The PF 1 button is used to select the RS-232 display mode as follows:

If pressed ONCE (do not hold pressed):

- Clears Alarm indications

- CK LED stops flashing for 2 seconds

- During this time, one or all of the RS-232 numbered LEDs (see Figure 13) will light. If one LED lights, it denotes the port to which the subsequent display applies. If all numbered LEDs light, it denotes that the normal 3-port display mode is active. The selected display remains active un-

120 20170-200 13 ParagonPD Technical Manual til manually changed or until RESET is pressed or until power up. Table 4 - RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence ALL Radio Network Indicators 3.2.1.2.1 The Radio Network LEDs are useful when trou-

bleshooting as an indication of network activity. It can help isolate transmission problems. 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) TX LED in RF group lights with any and all transmission TX LED in RF group only lights with an ACK or DATA transmission If, during the 2 seconds period that CK is not flashing, PF 1 is pressed a second time, the LED functions will advance one step from top to bottom through the available options in the order shown in Table 4. PF 1 may be pressed repeatedly during the 2 second period (extended with each press) to advance to the desired numbered LED function option. Once the desired RS-232 LED function is se-

lected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. The BDLCPD returns to nor-

mal operation using the newly selected display. 3.2.1.2 LEDs and Indications LEDs are used to indicate the operation status of the BDLCPD. Although capable of displaying three colors, only the green and red colors are used for the BDLCPD. They are grouped by their function:

RF Group, displays radio channel status in green RS-232 Group, displays serial port status in green except the TX LED that also uses red ALARM Group, displays fault status in red C S R X T X R F Figure 12 - RF indicators CS RX TX Carrier Sense - Steady light indicates that an incoming radio data signal is being detected by the DSP modem. CS signal is not user-adjustable. Receive Data Flashing light indicates unit is internally receiving data from the radio network. Transmitter ON blinks green indicates

(depending on display mode selected):

That a data packet or ACK (packet acknowledgment) is being transmitted. That an idle packet, data packet or ACK is being sent. Test transmis-

sion display is done in red. RS-232 Port Indicators 3.2.1.2.2 The RS-232 LEDs normally indicate port activ-

ity on the port selected. See section 3.2.1.1.2.3 above for instructions for selecting display C M 1 F R F T R D 3 2 R S -232 T D mode. Figure 13 - RS-232 Port LED indicators CM Command Mode - LED lights and re-

mains lit while the selected port is ac-

cessing the Command Processor. It lights ON and OFF while being config-

ured. 120 20170-200 14 ParagonPD Technical Manual FR FT RD TD Flow Control on Receive - the BDLCPD has received a flow control signal from the device connected to it. When it lights, BDLCPD has stopped sending data to the DTE. When LED goes out, the port terminal is again ready to re-

ceive data. Flow Control on Transmit - the BDLCPD has sent a flow control signal to the DTE asking it to stop sending data. The LED remains lit as long as the terminal is being held off. Receive Data - when lit, it shows that the Receive Data pin 3 on the RS-232 interface connector is active. Since all BDLCPD are configured as DCE, it means that the DTE is receiving data from the BDLCPD. Transmit Data - shows the status of Transmit Data pin 2 of the RS-232 in-

terface. When lit, the DTE is sending data to the BDLCPD. 3.2.1.2.3 CK Check and Power Check:

Normally flashing rapidly (about 6 cps), indicates microprocessors are working correctly and power is applied. Not flashing indicates unit is not func-

tioning. Blinking slowly (1 cps), indicates the parameters contents of the flash memory have been corrupted. The unit automati-

cally loads its set of factory default pa-

rameters and starts beeping at 20 sec-

onds intervals. May also initialization has occurred indicate DSP-modem re-

Alarm Indicators 3.2.1.2.4 All alarm conditions will cause the BDLCPD to light one or more of the LED indicators. LEDs remain ON when lit until cleared by either pressing PF 1 (without affecting operation of the unit) or RESET (cycling unit OFF and ON). LM RM LF UF ALARMS Figure 14 - ALARMS LED indicators LM Local Minor Alarm - when lit, indicates the presence of any of the following mi-

nor faults:

- Parity, framing or overrun error at any RS-232 port.

- Out of buffers. No memory available to accept data from a local terminal de-

vice. Usually denotes a flow control problem.

- Flash memory error. At power-up or reset, the unit detected a change in non-

volatile memory. RM Remote Minor Alarm - when lit, indi-

cates any of the Local Minor Alarm listed above have taken place at the re-

mote end of the link (i.e. the mobile the local base station is currently communi-

cating with). It will also light when a protocol error has been detected on the network. In a network using the Host Link Ac-

tive (MSC) feature, the RM LED, flashing in-sync with the CK LED, indi-

cates that the link is down. 120 20170-200 15 ParagonPD Technical Manual LF UF Link Failure - when lit, indicates that the base station fails to receive an ACK for a packet sent and for all subsequent retries. Some data has possibly been lost. LF is not functional if all active ports are set to NAR mode. Link fails are inevitable during normal operation (mobiles temporarily out of range, in a tunnel, parked in a dead spot, etc.). A lit LF LED is not normally cause for concern. Unit Failure - when lit, the unit requires attention:

- the BDLCPD is not operable;

It may indicate detection of a system software error trap.

- the BDLCPD is operable;

Indicates that on power-up, invalid data was detected in the serial EEPROM chip (located in the radio modules). It may also indicate that connection to the radio modules is incorrect or that radio power is not applied. The LM, RM and UF alarms also sound a beep when a fault occurs. The LF alarm is silent. 3.2.2 BDLCPD Rear panel Referring to Figure 4, the rear panel of the BDLCPD has the following set of chassis con-

nectors:

Four DE-9F connectors:

DEV2 - usually connected to Datara-

dios RIS program (DMP/Setup 19200). Can also be used with special users ap-

plication such as telephone modem Note: connection to a telephone re-

quires the use of a DCE Crossover ca-

ble. DEV3 - Dedicated (9600) DEV4 and DEV5 - not used One DB-25F connector

- DEV1 - Connects to users application. a) DMP 19200 for single-site installa-

tions b) MSCP 19200 for multi-site installa-

tions One DA-15M connector:

- DEV6 Digital I/O - not used One DB-25M connector:

- EXT RADIO/TEST - connects to the Radio assembly (see Figure 15) Signal Levels 3.2.2.1 In the description of data signals in Table 7, the following conventions are used:

Table 5 - RS-232 Signal levels Term ON OFF Alternates Signal level Asserted, spacing

+3 to +15 V Dropped, marking

-3 to -15 V 3.2.2.2 Pin Functions Table 6 - DTE Port 9-pin funtions DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function (RS-232 signal levels) DCD from ParagonPD, normally asserted RXD data from ParagonPD TXD data to ParagonPD DTR to ParagonPD, handshaking Ground DSR from ParagonPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to ParagonPD, handshaking CTS from ParagonPD, handshaking Reserved Table 7 - DTE Port 25-pin functions DB-25F pin #

1 and 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 20 Function (RS-232 signal levels) PD PD PD Ground TXD data to BDLC RXD data from BDLC RTS to BDLC CTS from BDLC DSR from BDLC DCD from BDLC RI - from BDLC PD DTR to BDLC PD PD PD

, must be asserted PD

, handshaking

, always +8V

, always asserted

, always 8V

, handshaking We recommend the use of shielded 9-wire or 25-wire cables with all pins connected. Dataradio recommends the use of secure (i.e. password protected and/or dial-back) modems in any installation where dialup access is provided. 120 20170-200 16 ParagonPD Technical Manual YEL LOW G RAY GREEN B LUE O RANGE B LACK WHITE SHIELD B RO WN VIOLE T RED B LACK SHIELD BDLC D212 DB-25 FEM ALE (P8) TXA 1 8 EXT IO _OUT1 1 0 EXTIO_IN1 2 2 RXA ( 1) RSSI (1 ) P TT G RO UND (1) EXT IO _OUT3 EXTIO_IN3 SHIELD RXA ( 2) RSSI (2 ) 3 1 6 6 4 7 2 4 1 7 1 1 4 EXT IO _OUT2 9 EXTIO_IN2 2 3 G RO UND (2) 2 SHIELD 1 5 TO BDLC 730-03374-102 BACKPLANE 1 / RX 1 & EXC ITER DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 1 1 TXA (fr om SK 3 pin 8) 1) 1 RX 1 E EPROM (from S K1 pin 1 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 5 TX KEY (fro m SK3 pi n 1 3) 1 3 G RO UND 5

) TX EE PROM (fr om SK 3 p in 1) BACKPLANE 2 / RX 2 DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 RX 2 EEPROM (fr om SK 1 pin 1) 1 3 GROUND L E F T ( R X 1 -Ex) RIGHT (RX2) 18.00"

Figure 15 - BDLCPD Y cable and pinout 4. RIS program The Radio Installation Software (RIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot ParagonPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field configuring of units

(Requires intervention with technical sup-

port). Important note:

The aggregate total baud rate for all active ports on a BDLCPD must not exceed 30,000 for ParagonPD. Sustained simultaneous op-

eration on devices 1 and 3, using the factory settings for these ports, may result in lost characters. Using the factory settings, device 3 is in-

tended only for use during configuration and should not be used simultaneously with data traffic on device 1. For special user applica-

tion done while the BDLCPD is active, use either device 2, or set device 3 to 2400 bauds. 120 20170-200 17 ParagonPD Technical Manual To run the program, you will need:

- A PC or portable computer with a 486 class CPU or better. 2 free megabytes of RAM.

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard commands. ParagonPD and Paragon products share the RIS program with the MobilPac family of products. It is available on diskette, Dataradio p/n 085 03355-00n. Please refer to the readme.txt file included on the diskette for installation instructions. 4.1 Operation This support program is DOS-based and can be run in MS-Windows MS-DOS mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and program failure. It has the general look and feel of an MS-

Windows program. Mouse operation is the con-

ventional click, double-click plus click and drag In DOS, change to the directory where the program type mpac_ris.exe and press ENTER. installed and is In WIN 3.x, click on File, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click on OK to run mpac_ris.exe. method. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. Otherwise, the Index List is displayed. 4.2 To connect and start RIS 1- Connect a suitable 9-pin straight PC cable, between the BDLCPD rear-mounted DEV2 port (see Figure 4), defined as DMP/setup port (19200 bauds) at the time of manufac-

ture, and the port of the PC (or portable computer) that will be running the RIS pro-

gram. If needed, a 9/25 pin-adapter and a 25-pin PC cable may be used. 2- Check that ParagonPD is ON. 3- To run the Radio Service Software (RIS):

Note:

Refer to the RIS Readme.txt file for more details on how to set the Win-

dows environment, connect, install and run this program. In WIN 9x, click on Start, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click on OK to run mpac_ris.exe. 120 20170-200 18 ParagonPD Technical Manual Exit Connect Get Get As Put From Station Reset VIS Products Dataradio Radio Installation Program Banner:

Comments:

Password:

Put Comments Put Password Channels Ping Address:

A Ping CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4 CHANNEL 5 CHANNEL 6 CHANNEL 7 CHANNEL 8 TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Flatness test Random data test i Figure 16 - RIS main screen 4.3 Screen The Radio Installation Software program uses one main display screen. Referring to Figure 16, starting from top and moving down to the bot-

tom, it has:

A Button bar, containing the programs six main commands: Exit, Connect, Get, Get As, Put From and Station Reset plus a Product type field. A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, grayed out in Para-

gonPD and Paragon family products. A Test section, containing the TXON, Flat-

ness and the Random data test buttons plus the Ping button and its address field. An i square button, which opens up the About window. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or in warning windows. 4.4 Functions The RIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check ParagonPDs transmit functions Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning: Do NOT make any change to these files unless called for in the trouble-shooting section of this manual or by Dataradios System Engineering or Technical Support departments. Changing unknown parameters may render unit inoperative. 120 20170-200 19 ParagonPD Technical Manual Connect using COM1 9600 OK Cancel Figure 17 - Connect using dialog window Connect Button 4.4.1.1 The Connect button is used to establish the re-

quired communication link with the connected ParagonPD unit. 1. Press the Connect button to open the Con-

nect using dialog window (see above). 2. Select the appropriate COM port where the ParagonPDs RS-232 cable is connected on your PC or portable computer and the port speed (usually 19200) for the COM port selected. This speed is independent of the network bit rate. Bit rates from 2400 to 19200 are supported. 3. Click OK. This validates the options entered and starts the connection sequence. The program briefly displays pop-up window messages as it establishes a communications link with the equipment. Their content is not normally user-sensitive and only denotes proper operation. If an Error window opens, check the connections and that the right options were se-

lected in the Connect using dialog window. Selecting an incorrect port speed in the Con-

nect using window will result in the status bar reporting Connection failed!

When communication linking is complete:

The Status bar reports Connection estab-

lished. All of the buttons grayed-out at startup be-

come available. The Comment and Password fields and their respective Put buttons are activated. The product field indicates the product model connected to. The Banner information is displayed. Get button 4.4.1.2 After communication is established using the Connect button, press the Get button to down-

load and automatically save the connected BDLCPD configuration setting to a file named with the unit's on-air address (as set at the time of manufacture). The RIS status bar will then report All parameters are successfully re-

trieved and saved in file [unit's on-air ad-

dress].bp2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Example: In a network using multiple BDLCPD having a common address, using the Get As button allows to uniquely name the files. Get As button 4.4.1.3 After communication is established using the Connect button, press the Get As button to:

Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.bp2 (already selected). Save the connected BDLCPDs operating characteristics (configuration setting) to a file, directory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

cessfully retrieved and saved in [filename]. 120 20170-200 20 ParagonPD Technical Manual 4.4.2 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a BDLCPD is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning: Do NOT make any change to these files unless called for in the trouble-shooting section of this manual or by Dataradios System Engineering or Technical Support departments. Changing unknown parameters may render unit inoperative. Put From button 4.4.2.1 After communication linking is established us-

ing the Connect button:

1- Press the Put From button on the button bar. The program selects the bt2 filter file. 2- In the opened File, Put From window, locate the drive, directory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar re-

ports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All pa-

rameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect!. 6- Press the Station Reset button (unit will beep). See the next paragraph for details. Station Reset button 4.4.2.2 Press the Station Reset button as a last step after doing a Put From. This action has the same effect as when pressing the membrane switch Reset (see section 3.2.1.1.1 on page 12 for details). Causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after do-

ing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 4.4.3 Special Functions The following RIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the con-

nected BDLCPD:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button i button Banner Field and i button 4.4.3.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmware(s) used and their version number. Format For ParagonPD model is:

[on-air address]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version # (where name 1 is for DSP and name 2 is for the main cpu). ParagonPD's flash EPROM and are designed to allow field up-

grades. firmware(s) resides in When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the RIS used. You will find the version number in the About window. To open it, click the lower left square button (with a lowercase letter i in it). The Banner field is blank prior to establishing a link with the equipment using the Connect but-

ton. 120 20170-200 21 ParagonPD Technical Manual Comments 4.4.3.2 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) location, etc).

(customer name, 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Connect, this field displays en-

tered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.3.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Connect, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.4.4 Test Functions The following RIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

TXON (Modulated) button TXON (Unmodulated) button Flatness test button Random data test button Ping Address and Ping button Note:

While a button is in-use for test trans-

missions, all others are inoperative. Channel Selection 4.4.4.1 ParagonPD uses its default radio channel. No channel selection being available, all channels are grayed-out. 4.4.4.2 TXON Tests Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.4.2.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reflected power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated test signal for 30 sec-

onds on its default channel or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is displayed on the status bar. Modulated Carrier 4.4.4.2.2 Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with a test tone at a speed and a deviation level that depends on network speed as detailed in Table 8 below. 120 20170-200 22 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 8 - Typical Carrier Modulation 4.4.4.4 Ping addresses Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed Typical deviation in kHz

(b/s) TX test tone in ( ) K S F 4 C R R S 25600 19200 4.0

(1000 Hz) 4.7

(1000 Hz) This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to be-

gin transmitting a modulated test signal for 30 seconds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. Ping Button 4.4.4.3 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of ParagonPD to communicate with a mobile unit by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the ping address (section 4.4.4.4) 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. 3- The program sends a test query and contin-

ues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 sec-

onds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field as an Alpha-Mapped-

Nibble (AMN) address for mobiles, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN (8 characters max.). The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or Ping address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. Flatness test button 4.4.4.5 This complimentary feature has been added to support the ParagonPD radios low-frequency balance adjustment. Tests generate a square wave at a frequency of 100 Hz. Press the Flatness test button to transmit a square wave test signal for 30 seconds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is displayed on the status bar. Random data test 4.4.4.6 Random data test transmissions are used for checking low-frequency balance. Refer to Table 10, at the Low Frequency Balance (step 7). Random data test requires the use of an IFR COM-120B service monitor with option 03:

30KHz IF filter and its DC coupled demodulator output selected. Press the Random data test button to generate a test signal on the channel selected for 30 sec-

onds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is displayed on the status bar. 120 20170-200 23 ParagonPD Technical Manual 5. Testing and Trouble-

Shooting The checks described below should be done at time of installation, annual intervals or when-

ever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required In-line watt meter (150W & 10 W ranges) Radio service monitor (IFR-120B with op-

tion 03: 30KHz IF filter or equivalent). RG-214 or RG-223 cable with N-Type male connector to connect ParagonPD to the service monitor. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months. 5.2 Recommended Checks A) After an installation 1. LED Indications 2. Save unit config to a file 3. Transmitter Output Power 4. Transmitter Reflected Power 5. RF Link test between ParagonPD and mo-

bile unit(s) B) For annual maintenance & trouble-shooting Same checks as A) plus:

6. Carrier Frequency Error 7. TX Deviation 8. Low Frequency Balance 9. 12 dB SINAD 10. Receiver distortion 11. RSSI check 120 20170-200 24 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 9 - Checklist A (after installation) CHECKLIST A

(ParagonPD) Recommended Check out after Installation Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

1 2 3 4 5 Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press RIS Get but-

ton Transmitter Output Power Press TX (Unmod) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON mod)

(Un-

RF Link test

"Ping" a mobile BDLCPD beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.2 as per section 4.4.1 VHF/UHF: 100 watts 800: 70 watts

+10%, -10%

to Factory-settable down 10 watts as per customer request. Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna con-

nector. 1Refer to Checklist B

<5% of forward power or as specified by Syst. Eng. 10W in-line wattmeter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Ping Successful as per sections 4.4.4.3

- Mobile is out of range

- Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless unit has been set a lower value). Note that readings less than 100 watts for VHF/UHF or 70 watts for 800 MHz models, may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter or the RF feedline & antenna installation. 120 20170-200 25 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 10 - Checklist B (General) CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD) General Check out (part1 of 2) ParagonPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting a unit may result in significant performance losses. Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press RIS Get but-

ton Transmitter Output Power Press TX ON (Un-

modulated) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON modulated) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmade)

(Un-

TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. will Low Frequency Balance Press TX Random data test BDLCPD beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.2 VHF/UHF: 100 watts 800: 70 watts

+10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer re-

quest. as per section 4.4.1 Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. Adjust Power on the front panel of the Power Amp

( see Figure 8)

<5% of forward power or as specified by Syst. Eng. 10 W in-line watt-

meter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc.

< 300 Hz SRRC4FSK, Full ch. unit:

25.6 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 19.2 kb/s: 4.7 kHz a) Record deviation level read from step 7 b) Record deviation read from TX Random test c) Difference between a) and b) must be:

< 500 Hz Service monitor set to read frequency error Adjust TCXO

(see inside Exciter module) Figure 22 &

Figure 35 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Adjust according to Appendix 1 - ParagonPD Deviation adjust on page 57 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position, all audio filtering disabled ) Refer to Section 6.2.3.4 for Series I and section 6.4.3.4 for Se-

ries II 120 20170-200 26 ParagonPD Technical Manual CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD) General Check out (part2 of 2) ParagonPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting unit may result in significant performance losses. Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

Set the service monitor to generate on the selected receive frequency. Verify alternately for both receivers. The carrier should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation level specified below:

8 9 10 12 dB SINAD

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

For Full channel unit, set devia-

tion to 3 kHz. For Half channel unit, set devia-

tion to 1.5 kHz Receiver distortion

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

Set service monitor RF Gen output to 70 dBm

- Deviation level as per SINAD above. RSSI

Vary the RF level output from 120 to 80 dBm

- Measure voltage at each RSSI re-

ceiver ouputs Better than -110 dBm

(including cable loss) 5.5 %

2VDC @ -110dBm 10dB/V 0.2V

Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 30) Service monitor

(IFR) set to SINAD IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 30) Service monitor

(IFR) set to SINAD IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 5 (see Figure 30)

- DC Voltmeter measurement Refer to section 6.2 for Series I and to section 6.4 for Series II Refer to section 6.2 for Series I and to section 6.4 for Series II Refer to section 6.2.2.5 for Series I and to sections 6.4.2.5 or 6.4.2.6 for Series II 120 20170-200 27 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6. Radio Programming and Adjustments All receiver procedures detailed in this section should be done twice: once for the main receiver module and a second time for the second receiver module. Connect to the relevant module and its corresponding backplane PCB as required. Both Series of ParagonPD radio module assemblies share the same backplane PCBs. Refer to section 3.1.2.1 for details. Programming for Series I is done via EPROMs while Series II uses of the RJ11 con-

nector present on the front of the Speaker panel and mirrored on both backplane boards (see section 6.3 below). 6.1 Series I 800MHz Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the ParagonPDs Tait T800 Series I radio (half &

full channel) used in all ParagonPD 800 MHz versions. This procedure is a supplement to the Tait pro-

gramming procedure. 6.1.1 Recommended Items T800win programming kit for Series I:

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- EPROM Programmer BP MicroSystemss model CP-1128 (suggested model)

- EPROM Programmer software BP MicroSystemss (Version 3.08 or later)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 27C64 EPROM (150 nanoseconds or faster) 486 PC or better, Ms-Windows 3.1 or later 6.1.2 Introduction Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win software for Series I Base station. It will be needed to generate a binary file required in programming the EPROM. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

Press and hold the Alt key while pressing the relevant hotkey (indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command).

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey letter without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As directory service box. For full description of the programming procedure, refer to the T800 Programming Software Users Manual. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is programmed outside the radio tuning range: 3 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed outside the radio tuning range: 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 120 20170-200 28 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.1.3 File Creation 1. In WIN 3.x: Start by clicking on File, then on Run, type the path or browse to select the Tait pro-

gram, click OK to run PGM800Win executable program. In WIN 9x: click on Start, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click OK to run PGM800Win. 2. In the Tait programs Menu bar, click on View. On the drop-down menu, make sure that a check mark is present in front of the T800 EPROM option. If not, click this option to activate it and click on View again to verify that a check mark is now present. 3. Select File, New and choose the relevant unit model to program. Click on OK. The program dis-

plays a dual-tabbed virtual file folder. 4. Click the System Information tab; enter the units serial number in the relevant field. In the User Remarks field, you may enter user comments as required (up to 16 characters). Use as a notepad (customer name, location, technical info etc...). Refer to Figure 18. Click the Channel Information tab; click the relevant frequency field to make it active and type in the required channel number in the frequency field. Refer to Figure 19 Figure 18 - Series I Receiver System Information Warning:

DO NOT enter anything in the CTCSS fields. If there is already something in any of those fields, erase their content(s). The indication should be 00.0 5. Select File, Save As. Enter an appropriate name in the Filename field. Always use the suffix

.bin for these binary files. Choose the relevant drive and directory to save under and click on OK. 6. Repeat file creation procedure for the Exciter, the main receiver and for the diversity receiver modules as required. 7. Select File, Exit to leave the program. 120 20170-200 29 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 19 - Series I Channel Information 6.1.4 Programming the EPROM Connect a straight 25-pin ribbon parallel cable between the PCs LPT1 port and the EPROM program-

mer. Apply power to it. At the DOS prompt, type bp.exe to open the EPROM program software. ParagonPD uses three 27C64 EPROMs (150 nanoseconds or faster) in the Exciter and Receivers modules. Repeat the following procedure for each EPROM as needed. Carefully grasp between thumb and index the 27C64 EPROM chip to be tested and gently insert it with a rocking motion in the EPROM Programmer socket until well seated. Navigate the programmers screen using the keyboard directional arrows. The left and right keys move through the available options and the up and down arrows select the function. 1. Move to and select Buffer 2. In the sub-menu, move to and select Load 3. Press ENTER 4. In the opened box, type in the directory path where the file created in paragraph 6.1.3 above is located. In the list of filenames, move to the appropriate file and press ENTER once to complete the selection and press ENTER a second time to load the file. This closes the directory service box. The message Load successful displays until directional arrows are pressed again. 5. Move to and choose Select 6. Press ENTER 7. A selection box opens, in the Device Selector: field, type M27C64A. Move to and choose the brand of EPROM. Press ENTER to close the selection box. The program is now ready to config-

ure the EPROM and the name of the device is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 8. Move to and select Device 9. In the now opened sub-menu, move to and select Program. 120 20170-200 30 ParagonPD Technical Manual 10. Press ENTER. The program loads the binary file into the EPROM (approximately fifteen sec-

onds). The message Function complete displays until directional arrows are pressed again. *

11. Move to and select Buffer 12. In the now opened sub-menu, move to and select Clear 13. Press ENTER. The program displays at the bottom of the screen: All buffers cleared 14. Press ENTER 15. Move to and select Quit 16. Press ENTER 17. Remove configured EPROM from the EPROM Programmer

* If an Error message (and warning beep) appears during the procedure, it normally indicates improper erasure of the EPROM. Replace it with a fresh one and start from the beginning. The removed EPROM will need to be cycled through an EPROM eraser. 6.1.5 EPROM Installation Warning Always use a grounding strap and wear an anti-static bracelet when working with sensitive cir-

cuitry or components susceptible to static discharge or transients damage. 1. Remove power to the radio 2. Unscrew #1 Pozidriv screw on the front panel to slide out the module. 3. Unscrew the fourteen #2 Pozidriv screws on the handle side and remove cover. 4. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully slide the blade between the EPROM socket and the chip (IC1) itself. Gently pry the chip away from its base and remove. The removed EPROM will need to be cycled through an EPROM eraser. Refer to Figure 21 on page 38. 5. Install the appropriate EPROM by carefully grasping the chip between thumb and index and gently inserting it with a rocking motion in its socket until well seated. 6. Select the channel configured in the EPROM as detailed in the next section. 6.1.6 Channel Selection via DIP Switches Channel selection is done via DIP switches inside each module. Example: To select channel 5, the DIP switch settings are as shown in Figure 20 below. Notes:

- For channel 1 (one), switch #1 must be OFF and switches #2 through #7 must be ON.

- Always have switch #8 set to OFF.

- The EPROM and DIP switches locations are identical in both receiver and exciter modules (refer to Figure 21 and to Figure 22. 120 20170-200 31 ParagonPD Technical Manual S W O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Always ON except when default channel is required Figure 20 - Channel Selection via DIP switches 6.2 Series I 800MHz Radio Tuning This section covers some basic tuning and verification for the 800 MHz Series I base station modules. 3 feet long double shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar). 6.2.1 Test Equipment You will need the following test equipment:

- Digital multimeter and probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

- Digital or analog calibrated Oscilloscope (X1, X2 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (with .001ppm TCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x six-inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

1x Torx screwdriver #10 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (provided with the ParagonPD to connect the exciter to the PA) 120 20170-200 32 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.2 Receiver Module (T885) Note 1: Refer to Figure 21, page 38 for locating tuning controls Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will be flashing showing that it needs to be re-tuned. 6.2.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during each receiver alignment procedures that follow:

1. Remove the receiver (T885) module from the ParagonPD rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD extender Rail kit between the RX module and the empty chassis re-

ceiver slot. 4. Set the multimeter to read DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD. 6.2.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 7V

(working range is between 3V to 10V). Multiple channels: Select the middle channel via the EPROM PCB DIP switch. Adjust the VCO loop to 7V. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 10V and 3V respectively. 6.2.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1) IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel frequency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1 kHz sine e) Select SINAD meter 2) Monitor the SINAD by connecting an X1 scope probe to the Demod O/P test point (close to PL103 in the first section from the module front panel) or on the relevant backplane board at SK1 pin 6 (see Figure 30 for test point location). 3) Adjust the helical resonators #H1 to #H3 for best SINAD. 4) Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do steps 3) and 4) again.

(minimum requirement to reach is 12 dB SINAD for 110 dBm) 5) Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in the next paragraphs below. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20170-200 33 ParagonPD Technical Manual WARNING: Do not attempt to re-tune the IF stages (i.e. L312 to L318). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the DSP modem coefficient settings and may significantly reduce the radio performances over data. 6.2.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Generator mode, Output T/R

IFR TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off, except for wide-

band. Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios.

2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level must be better than -110dBm (including cable loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. Note:

If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-end. If it is still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 6.2.2.5 Note: This check is only recommended for ParagonPD model running DBA protocol 3.06.009 series or RSSI Adjustment later. 1. Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110dBm with deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) at 1kHz tone. 2. Adjust RV301 (RSSI level) to give 2.0V RSSI output when measured with a multimeter at SK301 pin 2 or on the relevant backplane board at SK1 pin 5 (see Figure 30 for test point loca-

tion). 3. Vary the RF level in 10dB steps and check that the RSSI output voltage changes at a rate of a 10dB/V (0.20VDC) over the range of 120dBm to 80dBm. If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20170-200 34 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.3 Exciter Module (T881) Note 1: Refer to Figure 22 on page 39 for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will be flashing showing that it needs to be re-tuned. 6.2.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station 2. Prepare the multimeter to read DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T881) module from the base station rack frame 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail kit between the exciter module and the empty chassis ex-

citer slot. 6. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the exciter antenna connector. 7. Apply power to the base station 6.2.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 7VDC. Multiple channels: Adjust the VCO loop to 7V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 10V and 3V respectively. Note: Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always energized. Where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 6.2.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter (BW) set to 30KHz 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO to trim to meet the require-

ment, preferably within 100Hz. 120 20170-200 35 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.3.4 Low Frequency Balance Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source: Demod Out Connector). Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure out-

lined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2 or run on another computer the RIS program and press the Flatness test button. Adjust RV-105 (REF MOD) close to the microphone connector, for best wave shape;

no damping, no overshoot. Record the deviation read. 4. If transmission has not ended by itself, press PF1 or RIS Flatness test button again to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 7. 5. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2 or run on another computer the RIS program and press the Flatness test button. Record deviation again. 6. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300 Hz. If not, re-

adjust RV105 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 7. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare the de-

viation produced between:

- TX ON (Modulated) and

- Random data tests, The difference should be lower than 300 Hz. For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the high-

est frequency channel. 8. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2 or run on an-

other computer the RIS program and press the TX ON (Modulated) button. Make sure that de-

viation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use (see Table 8 - Typical Car-

rier Modulation). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to Checklist B - page 26. 6.2.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power must be:

800 MHz (T881) = 5W 300mW. 3. If 5Watts is not reached, adjust helical #L300 for maximum power output (which should be at least 7W); adjust RV356 down to 5W. 120 20170-200 36 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.4 Power Amplifier Module (T889) 1. Re-install the exciter module into the Paragon rack frame 2. Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier 3. Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load. 6.2.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Out 1. Set RV63 (Power adjustment, access on the front panel) fully clockwise. 2. Key the transmitter from the exciter Carrier button. The power output should exceed 90W. 3. Adjust RV69 (Driver power, access from the left end side) until the output power drops to 90W. 4. Adjust RV63 (Power) to reduce power output to its nominal value (70W) or lower as required. 5. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 6.2.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level 1. Power up the T889 and adjust RV63 (Power) so that the output power is at the alarm level re-

quired, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA normally operates at 50W). 2. Adjust RV48 (Forward power Alarm set) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust RV63 (Power) for the normal operating power level. 6.2.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) 1. Power up the T889 and adjust RV63 (Power) for the normal operating power level. 2. Place a known mismatch of the required value (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust RV52 (reverse power alarm set) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. Example: A VSWR of 3:1 can be simulated by connecting an undetermined 3 dB pad to the PA output. This will result in a loss of 6 dB. 120 20170-200 37 ParagonPD Technical Manual FRONT PL103 Demod output RSSI Test point:

SK301 pin 2 SK301 Pin 1 L318 RSSI SET RV301 L320 IC301 L321 L319 L317 L316 L315 L314 L313 L312 IC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TCXO C6 L1 CHANNEL SELECTION H3 H2 H1 Figure 21 - T885 Receiver tuning control location 120 20170-200 38 ParagonPD Technical Manual FRONT Micro-phone connector Ref Mod RV105 Temp control Hi-Temp adjust

#L300

#L300 Power Adjust RV356 IC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TCXO C6 L1 CHANNEL SELECTION IC202 Tail Timer Tx Timer BACK Figure 22 - T881 Exciter tuning controls location 120 20170-200 39 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3 Series II Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the UHF & VHF model that uses the ParagonPD base station radios (half & full channels). 6.3.1 Recommended Items

- T800win programming kit for Series II:

486 PC or better, MS-Windows 3.1 or later

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- T800-01-0002 programming cable (DB-25 to RJ-45 cable)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 120 20170-200 40 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3.2 Module Programming Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win software for Series II Base station. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

- Press and hold the Alt key while pressing at the same time the relevant hotkey as indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command.

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As di-

rectory service box. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is pro-

grammed outside the radio tuning range:

UHF = 2.5 MHz from previous center frequency. VHF = 1.5 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter and PA alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed out-

side the radio tuning range:

VHF & UHF= 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 1. Connect the PC, via the supplied programming lead, to the speaker panels front-mounted RJ11 connector. 2. Run Tait PGM800Win program and follow instructions found in the T800 Programming Software Users Manual to select the proper module to be programmed. 3. Program required channel's frequencies. Do not program any CTCSS tones on channels. Do not change any other parameters. Refer to Figure 23, Figure 24, Figure 25 and Figure 26 for screen program examples. 4. Save the base station programming info to a file for further reference. 120 20170-200 41 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 23 - Receiver System Information Figure 24 - Receiver Channel Information screen 120 20170-200 42 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 25 - Exciter System Information screen Figure 26 - Exciter Channel Information screen 120 20170-200 43 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches The backplane-mounted DIP switch settings override the default channel programmed by PGM800Win. To set a default channel via the software, all DIP switches must be set to OFF (i.e. 00000000). When a switch is Off, its binary count is active; when a switch is ON its binary count is in-

active. The various DIP switch combinations of ON or OFF make up a binary total, which identifies the channel number. To select a channel, set the appropriate DIP switch or switches to OFF to make the binary count total the channel number you want. Set all other switches to ON. It is recommended to set both SW1 (RX) and SW2 (TX) to the same settings. Example: To select channel 5, set the DIP switches as shown in below:

I X T H C T W S L E N N A H C Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Always ON except when default channel is required O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 27 - Backplane DIP switches example - Channel 5 selected I X R H C T W S L E N N A H C 120 20170-200 44 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4 Series II Radio Tuning This section covers some basic radio tuning and verification for VHF (T83x-xx) and UHF (T85x-

xx) Series II base station modules. 6.4.1 Test Equipment 1 HP 34330A Shunt 30A (UHF only, used for transmitter current measurement) 3 feet long double shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar).

- Digital multimeter & probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

- Digital or analog calibrated Oscilloscope & scope probes (X1, X2 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (.001ppm TCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x Six inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

1x Torx screwdriver #10 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (comes with the radio to connect the exciter to the PA) 6.4.2 Receiver module (T855 & T835) Note 1: Refer to Figure 32 (T855) and to Figure 34 (T835) for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning, The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 6.4.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during all receiver alignment procedures described be-

low:

1. Remove the receiver (T855 or T835) module from the ParagonPD rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail Kit for Series II to the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Prepare the multimeter to DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD. 120 20170-200 45 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T855 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T835 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels:

1. T855 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle channel. 2. T835 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. 3. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of respectively All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T855 and within 13V and 5V for the T835. 6.4.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1. IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R out-

put and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel frequency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1KHz sine e) Select SINAD meter f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835). 2. Adjust the helical resonators for best SINAD: #FL410 and #FL420 (T855) or L410, L420, L460 and L470 (T835). 3. Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do step 2) & 3) again.

(minimum requirement to reach is 12dB SINAD for -110dBm) 4. Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in paragraph 6.4.2.4. If it fails to pass the re-

quirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. WARNING: Do NOT attempt to re-tune the IF stages

(i.e. L310 to L390 for T855, CV318 or L330 to L360 for T835). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-

programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the modem DSP coefficient settings and may reduce significantly the radio performances over data. 6.4.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

a) Generator mode, Output T/R b) IFR TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency 120 20170-200 46 ParagonPD Technical Manual c) Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) d) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off. e) Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios. f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to IFR SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835) 2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level must be better than -110dBm (in-

cluding cable loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2kHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) above the main ra-

dio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1dB from the on fre-

quency SINAD reading. For T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full channel) or 0.8kHz (half channel). 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1dB from the on-

frequency SINAD reading. For T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full channel) or 0.8kHz (half channel). Note: If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-end. It still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 6.4.2.5 Note: This check is only recommended for Paragon/R model running DBA protocol 3.06.009 RSSI Adjustment (UHF: T855) series or later.

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110dBm with deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) at 1kHz tone.

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 2.0V RSSI output at SK330 pin 2 or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter (See Figure 30).

- Vary the RF level in 10dB steps and check that the RSSI output voltage (SK1 pin5) changes at a rate of a 10dB/V (0.20VDC) over the range of 120 dBm to -80dBm (see Figure 28). If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Volt Figure 28 - T855 and T885, RSSI Curve: volt to dBm 120 20170-200 47 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2.6 Note: This check is only recommended for Paragon/R model running DBA protocol 3.06.009 RSSI Adjustment (VHF: T835) series or later.

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -100dBm with deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) at 1kHz tone.

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 4.5V RSSI output at RSSI test point (near of quad. Coil L360) or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter

- Vary the RF level in 15dB steps and check that the RSSI output voltage (SK1 pin5) changes at a rate of a 15dB/V (+/- 0.30VDC) over the range of -120 dBm to -80dBm (see Figure 29). If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. Figure 29 - T835, RSSI Curve: Volt to dBm PL1 F F O SW1 N O F F O SW2 N O O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I H C T W S L E N A H C X T O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I H C T W S L E N A H C X R SK1 1 5 6 RSSI ouput SK1 pin 5 RX-Audio1 SK1 pin 6 Figure 30 T800-50-0001 Backplane and test pins location 120 20170-200 48 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.3 Exciter Module (T857 or T837) Note 1: Refer to Figure 33 (T857) and to Figure 35 (T837) for locating tuning controls and com-

ponents. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning: The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 6.4.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station 2. Prepare the multimeter to DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T857 or T837) module from the base station rack frame 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R out-

put and the exciter antenna connector. 6. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail Kit to the empty chassis exciter slot. 7. Apply power to the base station 6.4.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T857 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T837 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels:

1. T857 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle channel. 2. T837 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T857 and within 13V and 5V for the T837. Note:

Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. In the case where that option was not fitted, we must key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 6.4.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 120 20170-200 49 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-Key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 6.4.3.4 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment PGM800Win controls this adjustment. Electronic potentiometer (256 step) is used to allow channel adjustment of two-point modulation (Low freq. balance). 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source Demod out connector, DC cou-

pled). IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the proce-

dure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2 or run on another computer the RIS program and press the Flatness test button. You can also run both programs on the same computer if two serial COM ports are available. 4. Adjust IC220 via PGM800Win reference modulation to obtain the best square wave, no damping, no overshoot. (You can use either the mouse or up and down arrow keys). Record the deviation read. 5. If transmission has not ended by itself, press BDLCPD PF1 or press RIS Flatness test button to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 7. 6. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2 or run on another computer the RIS program and press the Flatness test but-

ton. Record deviation again. 7. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300Hz. If not, re-adjust IC220 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 8. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare the deviation produced between:

- TX ON (Modulated) and

- Random data tests, The difference should be lower than 300 Hz. For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel. 8. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2 or run on another computer the RIS program and press the TX ON (Modulated) button. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use

(see Table 8 - Typical Carrier Modulation). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to the related Checklist (B for ParagonPD - page 26 120 20170-200 50 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power must be:

- VHF (T837) = 800 mW 200mW

- UHF (T857) = 1W 300mW 6.4.4 Power Amplifier Module (T859 or T839)

- Re-install the exciter module into the ParagonPD rack frame

- Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier.

- Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load.

- Forward and reverse power alarm set (control) are identified on the PA cover. 6.4.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Output

- Key the transmitter on the exciter and adjust the PA output for 100W using front panel power control. If power cannot be reached, refer to section 6.4.4.4 for T859 UHF model or to Tait T839 service manual for T839 model. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 6.4.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level 1. Power up the PA and adjust front panel power control so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA nor-

mally operates at 50W). 2. Adjust the forward power alarm set (T859: RV48 or T839: RV101) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust front panel power control (T859: RV63 or T839: RV109) for the normal operat-

ing power level 6.4.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) 1. Power up the PA and adjust the front panel power control for the normal operating power level. 2. Place a known mismatch of the required value (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust the reverse power alarm set (T859: RV52 or T839: RV105) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. Example:

A VSWR of 3:1 can be simulated by connecting an unterminated 3dB pad to the PA output. This will result in a return loss of 6dB. 120 20170-200 51 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.4.4 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure 1. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, set RV69 (driver power level) fully clockwise. 2. For all units, preset the tuning controls as shown in Figure 31 Figure 31 - T859 Tuning Settings 3. Set RV63 (front panel power control) fully clockwise. 4. Key on the exciter (press PTT button). 5. Adjust CV1 for maximum output. 6. Adjust CV8 for maximum output. 7. Adjust CV32 for maximum output. 8. Adjust CV51 and CV57 for maximum output. 9. Adjust CV34 and CV35 for maximum output. 10. Recheck all settings. The power output should exceed 110W. 11. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, adjust RV69 (driver power level) until the output power drops to 110W. 12. For all units, adjust RV63 to reduce the power output to the required level (normally 100W). 6.4.4.5 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency 1. Insert a Shunt current device (HP 34330A Shunt 30A ) between the power supply red wire and its 13.8Vdc output, then connect the shunt to the multimeter (VDC scale) 2. While transmitting, monitor the current. It should remain under 22A. 3. Retune CV32, CV51 and CV57 towards maximum capacitance to obtain minimum sup-

ply current, but do not exceed a maximum drop of 0.5A per control. 4. Check that the supply current is <22A for 100W output power. Note:

These control settings are normally very close to minimum supply current. If the current is reduced too far, maximum power output will drop and 2f rejection may degrade. 120 20170-200 52 ParagonPD Technical Manual IC 310 SK330 pin 2 Figure 32 - T855 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-200 53 ParagonPD Technical Manual TCXO Figure 33 - T857 Exciter Tuning Controls Locations 120 20170-200 54 ParagonPD Technical Manual L410 L420 L1 L460 L47 L330 CV318 L340 RSSI Test Point P207 IC 700 CV1 L350 IC 350 L360 Figure 34 - T835 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-200 55 ParagonPD Technical Manual IC700 TCXO L1 CV1 IC220 Figure 35 - T837 Exciter Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-200 56 ParagonPD Technical Manual Appendix 1 - ParagonPD Deviation adjust 1. Using the RIS, press TX ON (Modulated) and record deviation level as read on the IFR. 2. Using Windows Notepad, Edit the .bp2 file named with the corresponding BDLCPD serial number (e.g. abcd.bp1). Save as to another file name and keep it in case something goes wrong while changing a parameter. 3. Locate the line labeled Dev0 Par85= and record the value beside the = sign. This is the corresponding parameter value to the deviation read in step 1. 4. Apply the following formula to determine the new parameter value to be set:

(New Par85 value) = [(initial Par85 value) X (target deviation) / (deviation read)] + 2 5. Change the value in the file, Save as using the BDLCPD serial number file name. 6. Run the RIS again and do a Put From. From the opened window, select the file that you just made the change to and then press OK 7. Again, check deviation level while pressing TX ON (Modulated). If fine-tuning of Par90 value is still required, Edit the file again and re-do step 5 by changing directly the Par85 value by 1 or 2 up or down. 8. Re-check deviation level. If the level is now correct, press Stationreset to make the change permanent. 120 20170-200 57 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Cabinet Size RF/Modem Assembly Size Frequency Stability Rx Operating Voltage/

Current Consumption Tx Current Consumption Channel spacing VHF 136 -156 MHz 148 -174 MHz UHF 400 - 440 MHz1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 MHz Rx 800 - 880 MHz Tx 850 - 870 MHz Rx 870 960 MHz Tx 870 960 MHz 5W only 22.06 W x 75.82 H (without leveling feet) x 27.06: D 19.0 W x 17.5.0 H x 12.5 D + 2.0 connector allowance 2.5 ppm 1.0 ppm 1.5 ppm 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 13.8 VDC/ 6A max. 21A DC max. 24A DC max. 12.5 or 25 kHz Operating Temperature Range

-30C to +60C (deleted power supply, catalog number ending with a 0)

-10C to +60C (with standard Dual Power Supply assembly, catalog number ending with a 2) RECEIVER Selectivity @ 25 kHz

@ 12.5 kHz Sensitivity @ 12 dB SINAD Spurious Response Intermodulation

- EIA 25 kHz

- EIA 300-096 12.5 kHz Hum and Noise

- EIA

- ETS 300-096 TRANSMITTER Rated Continuous RF Power Range of Adjustment Spurious Emissions

- transmit

- standby Hum and Noise

- narrow

- Wide VSWR Stability Transmitter Sideband Noise

@ +/-25 kHz

@ +/- 1 MHz 95 dB 89 dB 85 dB 80 dB N/A 100W 20 100 W

-50 dB

-55 dB

-95 dBc

-105 dBc 85 dB 85 dB 90 dB 85 dB

-117 dBm 100 dB 55 dB 50 dB 100W 20 100 W

-36 dBm to 1 GHz/-30 dBm to 4 GHz

-57 dBm to 1 GHz/-47 dBm to 4 GHz

-50 dB

-55 dB 5:1 mismatch

-95 dBc

-105 dBc 85 dB 80 dB 50 dB 45 dB 70W 20 70 W

-45 dB

-50 dB

-88 dBc

-100 dBc 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20170-200 58 ParagonPD Technical Manual FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS *

VHF UHF 800 MHz 136 - 156 MHz 148 - 174 MHz 400 - 440 MHz 1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz FCC CASTEL0007 CASTEL0002 CASTEL0021 CASTEL0023 CASTEL0025 CAS8IPT889BW (100 Watts) CAS8IPT881 (5Watts) IC (DOC) 737195375A 737195376A 3993195401A N/A 737194358

* Pending for Class II permissive change approvals or approval of request for FCC ID change 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20170-200 59 ParagonPD Technical Manual

 

 

Preliminary version ParagonPD+ Deviation adjust for optional Integra VIS controller/switch (IVIS) The ParagonPD+ optional Integra VIS (IVIS) deviation must be adjusted to match its associated base station. Referring to Section 4.1, obtain and setup Required Equipment listed. Following initial matching, deviation testing is an annual check. The setup port of the IVIS controller module is used to connect the PC running the system software supplied along with the module. The procedure outlined below may ONLY be carried out to calibrate the IVIS module. If the Exciter needs re-tuning or for annual maintenance check or troubleshooting, the procedures outlined in Section 4 MUST be followed. 1. From the operating network settings, record the speed (19.2 or 9.6 kb/s) and the channel type

(25 or 12.5 kHz). Using the softwares Production Test window, select Tx Deviation Adj radio button in Adjustments frame and set Tx Mode to Tone. 2. Press F5 (Tx On Tx frequency) to start the transmission. 3. Using PageUp/Dn or Ctrl+PageUp/Dn., adjust the Tx Deviation Adj value until the deviation reading on IFR matches or is slightly less than the value in the Tone column of the table below. Record the reading of the Direct Adjust field from the Adjustments frame (initial value) Speed and Channel 19200b/s 25kHz 9600b/s 25kHz 9600b/s 12.5 kHz Tx Mode Tone 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 2.5 kHz Tx Mode Random Data 4.5 kHz 4.8 kHz 3.0 kHz 4. Press F5 to toggle the transmission OFF. 5. Change the Tx mode to Random Data. 6. Press F5 to toggle transmission of Random data ON. Measure the deviation and check that it is equal to or less than the value in the table. Press F5 to toggle the transmission OFF. 7. If the measurement at step 6 is excessive, repeat steps 2-6 once to obtain deviation readings that best correspond to the table values. If unable to obtain a Direct Adjust reading (after editing up and/or down) that varies from the initial value (from step 3 above) by less than 2, contact System Engineering. 8. When satisfied with value obtained, press Write button on the button bar to write the value in the units flash memory.

 

 

ParagonPD+

Data Base Station Technical Manual Version 1.00 PRELIMINARY, For Internal Use Only The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2003 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. December 2002 Part no.: 120 20180-100a Preliminary Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................. 3 1.2.1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................................... 3 Features:................................................................................................................................................. 3 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT........................................................................................................................ 4 1.4............................................................................................................................................................................. 5 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY...................................................................................................................................... 5 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................................................................................................................................... 5 Factory Repair........................................................................................................................................ 5 1.6 PACKAGING ...................................................................................................................................................... 5 1.5.1 2. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4 2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 4 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................................ 4 2.2 LOCATION......................................................................................................................................................... 4 2.3 ELECTRICAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 Radio Assembly Power ........................................................................................................................... 6 BDLCPD+ assembly Power ...................................................................................................................... 7 2.4 ANTENNA ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 7 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection ......................................................................................................................... 7 2.5 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 8 2.6 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION............................................................................................................... 8 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................... 9 3.2.1 3.1.2 3.1.1 3.1.2.1 3.1.1.5.1 3.1 RADIO ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................................................ 9 Front panels............................................................................................................................................ 9 Receiver module ................................................................................................................................................................ 9 3.1.1.2 Exciter module.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Power Amp module ...................................................................................................................................... 10 3.1.1.3 Speaker panel................................................................................................................................................ 11 3.1.1.4 Dual Power Supply module .......................................................................................................................... 11 3.1.1.5 Rear Connections..................................................................................................................................... 12 Radio Assembly, rear panel .................................................................................................................. 12 Backplane PCB............................................................................................................................................. 12 3.2 BDLCPD+........................................................................................................................................................ 12 BDLCPD+ Front panel ........................................................................................................................... 12 Front Switches .............................................................................................................................................. 13 Reset ........................................................................................................................................................ 13 PF 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 13 Clearing Errors ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Test Transmissions ....................................................................................................................................... 13 RS-232 LED Function Selection .................................................................................................................. 15 LEDs and Indications ................................................................................................................................... 15 Radio Network Indicators ........................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.1.5.1 RS-232 Port Indicators ............................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.1.5.2 3.2.1.5.3 Check and Power LEDs ........................................................................................................................... 16 3.2.1.5.4 Alarm Indicators ...................................................................................................................................... 17 BDLCPD+ Rear panel............................................................................................................................. 17 RS-232 Signal Levels ................................................................................................................................... 18 Pin Functions................................................................................................................................................ 18 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.1.5 3.2.1.1.1 3.2.1.1.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.1.1 3.2.2 4. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ..................................................................................................... 20 120 20180-100a Preliminary ii ParagonPD Technical Manual 4.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................... 20 4.2........................................................................................................................................................................... 21 4.2 RECOMMENDED CHECKS................................................................................................................................ 21 4.3 ADDITIONAL TEST DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 25 4.3.1 RF Data Link Test................................................................................................................................. 25 4.3.2 Carrier deviations................................................................................................................................. 26 5. RADIO PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENTS..................................................................................... 27 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.2.3 5.2.2.4 5.2.2.5 5.1 SERIES II RADIO PROGRAMMING.................................................................................................................... 27 5.1.1 Recommended Items.............................................................................................................................. 27 5.1.2 Module Programming........................................................................................................................... 27 5.1.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 31 5.2 SERIES II RADIO TUNING................................................................................................................................ 32 Test Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 32 Receiver module (T885-xx-0200, T855-xx-0250 & T835-xx-0200) ...................................................... 33 Initial Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Synthesizer Alignment.................................................................................................................................. 33 Front-End Alignment.................................................................................................................................... 34 SINAD and Linearity Check......................................................................................................................... 34 RSSI Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Exciter Module (T881-xx-0200,T857-xx-0250 or T837-xx-0200)...................................................................... 36 Initial Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 36 Synthesizer Alignment.................................................................................................................................. 36 TX Frequency Error Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 37 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment............................................................................................................ 37 Exciter Power Output ................................................................................................................................... 38 Power Amplifier Module (T889 (800-870 MHz only), T859 or T839).................................................. 38 Power Amplifier Power Output .................................................................................................................... 38 Forward Power Alarm Level (Optional setting) ........................................................................................... 39 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional setting) ............................................................................................ 39 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure .............................................................................................. 39 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency........................................................................................................... 39

(TPL) LMS series Power amplifier (PA8-2BF-LMS) (890-960 MHz) .................................................. 40 Power Output alignment (from TPL Communications)................................................................................ 40 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 40 Amplifier Activation..................................................................................................................................... 40 RF Input (Relative Reading)......................................................................................................................... 40 Forward Power meter calibration.................................................................................................................. 40 Reverse Power meter calibration .................................................................................................................. 40 Reverse Power Alarm Level ......................................................................................................................... 41 5.2.5.1 5.2.5.2 5.2.5.3 5.2.5.4 5.2.5.5 5.2.5.6 5.2.5.7 5.2.4.1 5.2.4.2 5.2.4.3 5.2.4.4 5.2.4.5 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.2 5.2.3.3 5.2.3.4 5.2.3.5 5.2.4 5.2.5 6. SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 49 APPENDIX 1 - PARAGONPD+ DEVIATION ADJUST ...................................................................................................... 48 FIGURE 1 - TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLIES, FRONT VIEW .................................................................. 4 FIGURE 2 - BDLCPD+, FRONT VIEW ............................................................................................................................... 4 FIGURE 3 - TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLIES ASSEMBLY, REAR VIEW .................................................................... 5 FIGURE 4 - BDLCPD+, REAR VIEW ................................................................................................................................. 5 FIGURE 5 - BDLCPD+S REAR CONNECTION, SWITCH, AND FUSE.................................................................................... 7 FIGURE 6 - RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL................................................................................................................ 9 FIGURE 7 - EXCITER MODULE, FRONT PANEL............................................................................................................... 10 FIGURE 8 - POWER AMP MODULE, FRONT PANEL......................................................................................................... 10 FIGURE 9 - SPEAKER PANEL......................................................................................................................................... 11 FIGURE 10 - DUAL POWER SUPPLY REAR CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................. 12 FIGURE 11 - BDLCPD+

MEMBRANE SWITCHES............................................................................................................. 13 120 20180-100a Preliminary iii ParagonPD Technical Manual FIGURE 12 - RF INDICATORS ....................................................................................................................................... 16 FIGURE 13 - RS-232 LED PORT INDICATORS .............................................................................................................. 16 FIGURE 14 - ALARMS LED INDICATORS ................................................................................................................... 17 FIGURE 15 - BDLCPD+

Y CABLE AND PINOUT.............................................................................................................. 19 FIGURE 16 - CARRIER DEVIATIONS FOR TONE OR DATA MODULATION........................................................................ 26 FIGURE 17 - RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ........................................................................................................... 29 FIGURE 18 - RECEIVER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN............................................................................................ 29 FIGURE 19 - EXCITER SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN................................................................................................. 30 FIGURE 20 - EXCITER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN.............................................................................................. 30 FIGURE 21 - BACKPLANE DIP SWITCHES EXAMPLE - CHANNEL 5 SELECTED............................................................... 31 FIGURE 22 - T855 AND T885, TYPICAL RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM ......................................................................... 35 FIGURE 23 - T835, TYPICAL RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM........................................................................................... 35 FIGURE 24 - T800-50-0001 BACKPLANE..................................................................................................................... 36 FIGURE 25 - T859 TUNING SETTINGS .......................................................................................................................... 39 FIGURE 26 - (TPL) LMS REAR PANEL........................................................................................................................ 41 FIGURE 27 - T885-0020 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION............................................................................. 42 FIGURE 28 - T881-0200 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATIONS ............................................................................. 43 FIGURE 29 - T855 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION ...................................................................................... 44 FIGURE 30 - T857 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATIONS....................................................................................... 45 FIGURE 31 - T835 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION ...................................................................................... 46 FIGURE 32 - T837 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION ........................................................................................ 47 TABLE 1 - ON-AIR DATA SPEEDS AND MODULATION TYPES ............................................................................................ 4 TABLE 2 - POWER SUPPLY LEDS INDICATIONS ............................................................................................................. 6 TABLE 3 - TX MODE SELECTION LEDS INDICATIONS................................................................................................... 14 TABLE 4 - TEST TRANSMISSIONS................................................................................................................................. 14 TABLE 5 - RS-232 LED FUNCTION SELECTION SEQUENCE ......................................................................................... 15 TABLE 6 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS .............................................................................................................................. 18 TABLE 7 - DTE PORT 9-PIN FUNTIONS......................................................................................................................... 18 TABLE 8 - DTE PORT 25-PIN FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................... 18 TABLE 9 - CHECKLIST A (AFTER INSTALLATION) ......................................................................................................... 22 TABLE 10 - CHECKLIST B (GENERAL) ......................................................................................................................... 23 120 20180-100a Preliminary iv ParagonPD Technical Manual WHAT'S NEW History Version 1.00a (preliminary): January 2003 Appended data for 8-FSK modulation on transmit side Version 1.0: December 2002 First released version 120 20180-100a Preliminary v ParagonPD Technical Manual Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Asynchronous AVL BDLCPD+

DBA DCE DTE GeminiPD GeminiPD+

Network Speed ParagonPD ParagonPD+

Parallel Decode Information that can be sent at random times, and not synchronized to a clock. Transmission characters begin with a start bit and end with a stop bit. Automatic Vehicle Location. Optional feature that involves using GPS (Global Positioning System) signals from the mobile unit by the Host PC. Base Station Data Link Controller (PD = Parallel decode). An async radiomo-

dem designed to control the base station in mobile systems. A component of ParagonPD+. Dataradios Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation protocol designed for short-

inquiry/long response applications such as dispatch systems. Latest enhance-

ments include support for occasional long messages inbound, and for Out-of-

Band data for AVL reports with no extra overhead. Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. High specs mobile radiomodem. (PD = Parallel Decode) On-air compatible with GeminiPD. Runs up to 32 kb/s This is the bit rate on the RF link between units. Could be different from COM port baud rate. Factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station using Parallel Decode tech-

nology. Used in VIS mobile networks. Higher performance model. Technology featuring dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments. Radio Assembly Radio modules used in ParagonPD and ParagonPD+ and available in two distinct RS-232 VIS WinRIS series depending on radios frequency band. Industrystandard interface for serial data transfer. Vehicular Information Solutions. Dataradios name for a series of products spe-

cially designed for mobile data. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests, unit con-

figuration, and troubleshooting. 120 20180-100a Preliminary vi ParagonPD Technical Manual 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides information required for the setting up, operation, testing and trouble-shooting of the DATARADIO ParagonPD+ radio-modem base station. 1.1 Intended Audience This document is intended for engineering, installation, and maintenance personnel. 1.2 General Description ParagonPD+ product is a factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station used in mobile networks and is designed specifically to fit the needs of vehicular applications. It features dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. When used with Dataradios state-of-the-art Gemini PD/PD+ mobile data solution, the system delivers unequaled high-speed data performance and unmatched effective throughput. All ParagonPD+ models are supplied in a rack-mount configuration that includes:

A ParagonPD+ full-duplex Radio assembly. A contemporary, high-speed Dataradio Base Station Data Link Controller (BDLC PD+). In ParagonPD+ units:

Duplexer and backup power units are custom furnished items. Wire line modem(s) are optional items. Laptop PC and its application software are user-supplied items. 1.2.1 Features:

Parallel Decode (PD) technology featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as listed in Table 1 Available in 800 MHz, 900 MHz, UHF, and VHF Power output of 20W to 70W for ParagonPDs 800 MHz, of 65W to 100W for 900 MHz, and of 20W to 100W for UHF and for VHF Supports high-efficiency Dataradio DBA over-the-air protocol Over-the-air compatible with MobilPac/R, GeminiPD, and PD+ mobile products Modular design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis ParagonPD+ units are factory-configured based on each customers network system requir ements 120 20180-100a Preliminary 3 ParagonPD Technical Manual EEPROM Flash programmable firmwares Table 1 - on-air data speeds and modulation types Modulation type DGMSK 1 xRC4FSK 1 xRC8FSK 1, 2 12.5 kHz 9.6 kb/s 8.0 kb/s 16 kb/s 14.4 kb/s 21.6 kb/s 24.0 kb/s Channel spacing NPSPAC& 900MHz 9.6 kb/s 8.0 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 16 kb/s 24.0 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 25 kHz 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 32 kb/s2 25.6 kb/s 43.2 kb/s 48.0 kb/s Factory Technical Support 1.3 The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical prob-

lems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

For Canada and International customers:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:+1 514 737-7883

+1 514 737-0020 Email address: support@dataradio.com or For U.S. customers:

DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:1 770 392-9199 1 770 392-0002 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1 Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. 2 Available with Gemini PD+ only 120 20180-100a Preliminary 4 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.4 Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. Product Warranty Replacement Parts 1.5 This product is usually not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of individual radio modules. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair logic, modem boards, and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service information before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. Factory Repair 1.5.1 When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the prob-

lem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should a question arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Packaging Each ParagonPD product normally leaves the factory packaged as follows:

A Series II Dataradio base station Radio assembly A dual power supply assembly A Dataradio BDLCPD+ model A Radio Interface Cable to link the Radio assembly to the BDLCPD+:

18-inch long Y cable; DB-25 female to dual DB-25 female (p/n 730 03374-102) for connection between backplane PCBs and BDLCPD+. One standard seven-foot 120VAC power cord Two DC power cables to connect the radio assembly to the dual power supply assembly. Courtesy small parts kit Frequently, ParagonPD+ product components are field-assembled prior to customer delivery. The cabinetry may then be supplied in one of several custom rack-mount configurations that may also include fan, backhaul modems, duplexer/filters/combiners, and ancillary equipment. If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 5 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2. Installation Overview 2.1 The cabinet and rack-mount housing the ParagonPD+s radio assembly and the BDLC PD+ is generally installed in a sheltered facility. Occasionally located adjacent to the nerve center of the users network, it is often located near tower sites or at remote locations where it operates unattended. Furnishings needed include power, cabling, and installation of antenna, landline or microwave mo-

dem, and host PC or portable computer. Details of these are outside the scope of this manual. This manual covers the radio assembly and the BDLCPD+ that includes the modem. 2.2 Location Be sure to place the ParagonPD+ in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna connector and to the back connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling. Electrical 2.3 Standard 120 VAC electrical power is required. It should be capable of providing at least 10A to power ParagonPD+ (<6A) and ancillary equipment. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 4 ParagonPD Technical Manual Air Flow Receiv er E xc ellence in Radio Communic at ions Receiv er Exciter Pow er Amp lifi er S peaker Panel Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Line Le vel Supply Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute Supply L ow Forw ard P ower Hi gh Re ver se Power Pow er Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Car ri er O n Line Le vel Supply Supply Line Sensitivi ty Microphone Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH RX1 RX2 OFF p rogra mmin g po rt Dual Power Supply Module OL Stby On Power OL Stby On Power Figure 1 - Typical radio and power supply assemblies, front view T800 II Slimline S-3 CS T X RX RF CM FR FT RD TD 1 3 2 RS-232 CK LM LF RM UF ALARMS PF1 RES ET Figure 2 - BDLCPD+, front view 120 20180-100a Preliminary 4 ParagonPD Technical Manual REAR VIEW Air Flow FAN _ +

CN 2 SK5 PL1 PL1 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 2 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 1 GND DC INPUT 2 SE U F F U S E FUSE E S U F FU S E FUSE FUSE 2 FUSE 1 DC INPUT 1 13.8 VDC 2 AMPS MAX.

T808-10-00CA GND T807-10-00CA GND Figure 3 - Typical radio and power supplies assembly, rear view Use only with a 250 V fu se Emp loyer uniquement av ec un fu sible de 250 V D EV. 3 R S-232 D EV. 2 R S-232 D EV. 1 R S-232 D EV. 6 DIG. I/O EX T. R AD IO/TE ST DEV. 5 RS-232 DEV. 4 RS-232 Figure 4 - BDLCPD+, rear view 120 20180-100a Preliminary 5 ParagonPD Technical Manual Radio Assembly Power 2.3.1 Referring to Figure 3, the Radio assembly unit receives two separate 13.8 VDC power inputs from a T800 Slimline dual power supply typically rack-mounted right below the main assembly radio chassis. The T800 is made up of two separate power supply units joined in a single chassis:

A T807 using convection cooling is rated up to 15A at 13.8VDC. It supplies all the radio mod-

ules other than the Power Amplifier. A T808 using convection and fan cooling is rated up to 25A at 13.8VDC. It supplies only the Power Amplifier module. Normally used at room ambient temperatures, they can operate within their specifications over a range of 10 to +60 C. Note: Internal over-temperature protection shuts down the main transformer above 105 degrees Celsius. Both power supply modules are internally connected to ground via their individual, rear-connected, seven-foot standard 120 VAC power cords. Nevertheless, each requires a separate secure electrical ground connection. Individual grounding tabs are provided next to the power connectors. Similarly, the Radio Assembly chassis requires a secure ground connection. A threaded grounding binding post fitted with a knurled binding-nut is provided on the chassis next to DC input 2. Separate grounding leads with appropriate connectors are supplied (either in the courtesy small-parts kit or with one end fastened to the equipment. For each of the power supply modules:

1. Fit one end of the grounding leads push-on connector onto the groun ding tab. For the Radio Assembly chassis:

1. Install the grounding leads lug over the binding post and firmly hand-tighten the binding-nut. For both A and B 2. Fit the slotted connector (on the other end of each of the grounding connector) under a con-

veniently located screw on the rack frame or other support surface. Scrape away paint if needed to ensure clean contact. 3. Apply anti-corrosion compound where paint scraping was done. 4. Ensure by testing continuity that a secure electrical and mechanical connection is achieved. If a DC rail (0V) is installed as part of the system, the grounding leads may alternatively be fitted to the rail terminal. Caution:

Improper grounding between power supply case and rack frame may result in harmful voltage po-

tentials and/or miscellaneous power supply switching noise problems in both receivers and trans-

mitter. Press both red power buttons located on the front of the module to have complete power distribution to the Radio assembly. The power supply front panel LEDs indications are:

Table 2 - Power Supply LEDs Indications LED On Stby OL On & OL Color Green Red Steady Red Flashing green and red respectively Indication Power enabled *

Power disabled *

Current Overload Over voltage

* To remove voltage from the power supply PCB, disconnect the main power cords. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 6 ParagonPD Technical Manual For LEDs descriptions, see section 3.2.1.5 The Radio assembly is fused at the rear of the chassis:

Fuse 1 is a 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 10A Fuse 2 is a 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 30A Note: the fuses form factor and their locations may differ from Figure 3. 2.3.2 The BDLCPD+ assembly uses a standard 120 VAC power cord. Plug this cord to the rear power outlet shown in Figure 4 and Figure 5. BDLCPD+ assembly Power To check or install a fuse:

1. Open the slide-out fuse drawer located below the power connector by using a fine bladed screw-

driver or a knife blade and gently pry open. 2. Hold the fuse support in one hand and with the other, lift the center plastic retainer until it releases the fuse sliding base. 3. Replace or install a 250V, 2A fuse. 4. To complete the procedure, push the sliding fuse base until it snaps under the retainer. 5. Re-insert the fuse drawer in its housing and push until it is fully seated and closed. When ready to apply power, use the ON-OFF toggle power switch adjacent to the power connector. ON-OFF Switch 120VAC Connector Fuse Slide-out Drawer Use only with a 250 V fuse Employer uniquement av ec un fusible de 250 V Figure 5 - BDLCPD+s rear connection, switch, and fuse 2.4 Antenna Overview 2.4.1 ParagonPD+ commonly uses three antennas (one transmit and two receive) unless a duplexer is used with one of the receive antennas; then only two antennas would be needed. They should be mounted according to any guidelines supplied with the antennas. For antennas placement and spacing, consult System Engineering. 2.4.2 1- Route good quality 50-ohm double-shielded coaxial cable(s) (e.g. RG-214 or Heliax) from the Cabling and Connection selected antenna position(s) to the ParagonPD+ Radio assembly. 2- Terminate the RX-1 and RX-2 cable ends at the Receiver modules rear position with an N-type connector. 3- Similarly, terminate the TX cable end at the Power Amps module rear position with an N -type connector. Caution:

When terminating RF cables use brand-name crimping tools (such as AMP, Jensen, CrimpMas-

ter, etc) of the correct size for the cable and type of connector used. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 7 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.5 Completing the physical Installation. ParagonPD+ products are factory-configured to users requirements and are shipped ready to run. After new installations:

Re-check that all connections are secure on radio and BDLCPD+ assemblies (antennas, PC, power cords etc.) Check that fuses are inserted. Turn both BDLCPD+ and radio power ON. You are now ready to check for normal operation (as per paragraph 2.6) and to run the Dataradio Windows Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. Any change(s) to the settings must be done via files saved on diskette and loaded into the unit using the WinRIS program. 2.6 Checking out Normal Operation 1- Check that power is applied. 2- Check Radio assembly lights for proper operation as per section 3.1.1 3- Check for proper operation of the BDLCPD+s LEDs as per se ction 3.2.1.5. 4- Using the WinRIS program and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to confirm main antenna installation (as per section 4) 5- Using WinRIS, check the RF Data Link with a mobile that can be heard (as per section 4.3.1) If user application and mobiles are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 8 ParagonPD Technical Manual 3. Operating Description 3.1 The Radio assembly component of each Paragon product is made up of high performance synthesized radio base station designed for single operation. Referring to Figure 1 on page 4, the Radio Assemblys modules are commonly installed in a standard, 19-inch wide rack frame. Radio Assembly 3.1.1 The complement of modules is identical for Series II VHF, UHF, and 800/900 MHz models:

Front panels 2 x Receivers 1 x Exciter 1 x Power Amplifier 1 x Speaker panel 1 x Dual Power Supply 3.1.1.1 Receiver module The RX1 and RX2 receivers use identical front panel controls and indicators. These are:

Gating Sensitivity - sets the RF signal level required to open the mute gate and allow audio to pass to the speaker1. Gate LED - indicates the status of the mute circuit. It is lit when a signal above the mute threshold is received1. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is applied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Line Level - Not used Monitor Volume - The audio output delivers up to 1 watt to the speaker. Always set volume knob to minimum when not in use to reduce current consumption. Monitor Mute Switch - opens the mute, allowing continuous monitoring of the audio signal. On = audio muted Receiver Gating Sensitivity Gate Line Level Supply Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute Gating Sensitivity Gate LED Line Level Monitor Volume Monitor Mute On - Off Figure 6 - Receiver module front panel 1 Gating Sensitivity and Gate LED are not functionally used except to allow listening to incoming receptions as a trouble-shooting aid. Depending on the sensitivity adjustment, the Gate LED lights and a relay can be heard on incoming RF signals. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 9 ParagonPD Technical Manual 3.1.1.2 Exciter module The Exciters front panel controls and indicators are:

Carrier Switch - momentarily keys the transmitter ON while pressed (used for test purposes only). On LED - is lit when transmitting Line Sensitivity not used. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is applied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes in-

dicates VCO (synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Microphone Socket not used. Exciter Carrier On Supply Line Sensitivity Microphone Carrier Switch On LED Supply LED Line Sensitivity Microphone Socket Figure 7 - Exciter module, front panel 3.1.1.3 Power Amp module Power Am plifier Supply LED The Power Amp front panel and indicators are:

Supply LED - is lit when DC power is applied. Low Forward Power LED - is lit when forward power is below the level set, normally 80% of nominal forward power. High Reverse Power LED - is lit when high reverse power is detected (e.g. VSWR= 3:1). Power - sets the PA output power:

- VHF & UHF models: 20 - 100 Watts

800 model: 20-70 Watts S up ply Low Forward Power High Rev erse Power Po w er Low Forward Power LED High Reverse Power LED Power Adjustment Figure 8 - Power Amp module, front panel 120 20180-100a Preliminary 10 ParagonPD Technical Manual 3.1.1.4 Speaker panel The speaker panel is fitted with a four-W Both series of radio assemblies share the same front panel fitted with an RJ11 connector. This connector is used to allow programming the radio from the front of the unit via a programming lead. This feature is exclusive to the Series II modules. If the speaker panel needs to be removed, a mirror programming port connector is provided on the backplane. speaker. S peaker Panel SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 O FF programm ing p ort Not Used with 800 MHz Series I model Figure 9 - Speaker panel 3.1.1.5 Dual Power Supply module The Dual Power Supply module is made up of two separate power supply units coupled in a single chas-

sis. Refer to Table 2 on page 6 for tabular listing of power supply LEDs indicators. Refer to Figure 1 for the front panel LED layout. This module has:

Two Power red-colored pushbutton switches - Push in for ON and release out for OFF. Control complete power distribution to the Radio assembly Two ON LEDs - light green when push button(s) is (are) ON; DC power is distributed to radio modules. Flash green in conjunction with the OL LED (flashing red) when an over voltage cond i-

tion is present. Two Stby- Standby voltage LED, lights red when push button is off; AC power is applied but DC is not distributed to radio modules. To remove presence of voltage, disconnect both power cords. Two OL LEDs - Monitor current overload, light steady red when supply exceeds current limit set;

nominally 25Amps (T808 model). Flashes red in conjunction with the ON LED (flashing green) when an over voltage condition is present. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 11 ParagonPD Technical Manual Rear Connections 3.1.1.5.1 The rear connections (convection-cooled model shown; fan-cooled model not illustrated) for each of the power supply are:

Fail Alarm Off: Power supply OK; approx. +Vout (via 1k resistor - typ. 13.8V). ON: Power supply failure; approx. -Vout (via 11k resistors - typ. 0V)

+ Remote Not used for Paragon

- Sense Not used for Paragon

-VE main ground (0V)

+13.8V Mains DC output supply 1 5 A M a x

. 1 3

. 8 V O u t p u t R e m o t e S e n s e F a i l l A a r m Note: more power supply installation details are covered in section 1.1.1

Figure 10 - Dual Power Supply rear connections 3.1.2 Radio Assembly, rear panel 3.1.2.1 Backplane PCB Referring to Figure 3, two main backplanes are used. Their main components are:

RJ11 connector Mirrors the one on the front of the Speaker panel (series connected to both backplanes). Used for programming the Radio Assembly whenever the speaker panel has been removed. DB-25M plug at PL1 (one side of the Y cable on each PCB) used to supply the receive signal to the BDLCPD+s single EXT.RADIO/TEST DB-25F plug. Two channel-select DIP switches (SW1 and SW2) This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Cooling fan driver CN2 located on backplane connects to the horizontally-mounted fan on top of the Radio assembly and activated by BDLCs PTT signal. Coaxial relay driver not used. 3.2 BDLCPD+

The rack-mounted BDLCPD+ is housed in a steel case. It has no user serviceable parts. Units configur a-

tion is stored in flash memory (EEPROM). 3.2.1 BDLCPD+ Front panel Referring to Figure 2, the front panel of the BDLCPD+ has two cutouts across its length. A- The left cutout groups the units type label and ten LED indicators:

The S3 label designates the BDLCPD+ as a three Serial-port model

(Ports 4 and 5 are reserved for future use) The RF group of 3 LEDs The RS-232 group of 5 LEDs A single CK LED 120 20180-100a Preliminary 12 ParagonPD Technical Manual The ALARMS group of 4 LEDs B- The right cutout groups two tactile (membrane) switches (PF1 and RESET). 3.2.1.1 Front Switches The BDLCPD+ uses two membrane-type switches labeled:

RESET PF 1 These switches indicate contact by emitting a short BEEP tone when pressed. PF1 RESET Figure 11 - BDLCPD+ membrane switches Reset 3.2.1.1.1 Pressing Reset produces the same result as powering OFF and ON again. It restarts the microprocessor, the peripherals and invokes the on-board diagnostics. BDLCPD+s radio modules internal flash-memories are read and their values are loaded in system SRAM CPU flash-memory. Normally, pressing Reset results in one short BEEP tone followed by all LEDs coming ON for about four seconds. Then, the LEDs flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds indicating diagnostics are in progress. At the end of this period, all LEDs should be OFF except CK that should flash about six to eight times per second. Expect an additional two seconds delay for CK to start flashing and the UF indicator to come ON if the radio assembly is not connected or not powered (see section 3.2.1.5.4 for Alarm details). PF 1 3.2.1.1.2 PF 1 is a multi-function switch:

It clears LED error indications It initiates test transmissions It sets the function of the RS-232 LEDs Clearing Errors 3.2.1.2 Major and minor error LED indications remain lit on the front panel until:

The unit is RESET The unit is powered OFF and ON again PF 1 is pressed The PF 1 switch can be pressed at any time to clear an error display without affecting normal operations. Test Transmissions 3.2.1.3 To select a pattern and begin transmission, start by pressing and holding PF1. It beeps once, all five RS232 LEDs light; listen for a second beep followed by a third beep. After two seconds, the unit beeps and goes in TX Select mode with only the three rightmost RS-232 LEDs now used as selection indic a-

tors. Only release PF1 after the third beep. Following release:

Start of selection must be made within two seconds. If not, the unit will default to pattern one and start test transmitting. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 13 ParagonPD Technical Manual PF1 may be pressed more than once. The number of times it is pressed determines the type of pattern that will be transmitted according to Table 4. Each pressing of PF1 extends the two-second timer. The three rightmost RS-232 LEDs are used to indicate TX mode selection as shown in Table 3. Table 3 - TX mode selection LEDs indications TX pattern se-

lected Binary TX mode LED indications FT LED RD LED TD LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Off Off Off On On On On Off On On Off Off On On On Off On Off On Off On Table 4 - Test Transmissions

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8000 b/s 2000 Hz Dotting 4000 Hz Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode DGMSK ParagonPD +

9600 b/s 2400 Hz Dotting 4800 Hz 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustm ent tone 19200 b/s 4800 Hz Dotting 9600 Hz Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode xRC4FSK ParagonPD+ / xRC8FSK ParagonPD+

32000 b/s / 48000 b/s 25600 b/s / 43200 b/s 19200 b/s / 28800 b/s 16000 b/s / 24000 b/s 14400 b/s / 21600 b/s 4000 Hz Dotting*

3200 Hz / 3600 Hz Dotting*

2400 Hz Dotting*

2000 Hz Dotting*

1800 Hz Dotting*

Do not use Do not use Do not use Do not use Do not use 100 Hz Square wave 100 Hz Square wave 100 Hz Square wave 100 Hz Square wave 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unm od Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode Random data Unm od 1000 Hz sine beacon m ode 1000 Hz sine wave Adj. tone 1000 Hz sine wave Adj. tone 1000 Hz sine wave Adj, tone 1000 Hz sine wave Adj, tone 1000 Hz sine wave Adj, tone

* Dotting with reduced amplitude Notes:

For DGMSK models, a dotting pattern consists of an alternating series of bits. For the xRC4FSK models, a dotting pattern consists of an alternating series of bits where only the lowest-level symbols modulation is used. The square wave is used to check transmitter low frequency balance.. Pattern 6 produces a transmission of approximately 55 seconds followed by about 55 seconds of silence. Initial transmission in a sequence may be shorter than 55 seconds. TX LED stays steadily red for duration of the test. Press PF1 to terminate beacon mode.

Once the type of transmission is selected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. Automatically, the BDLCPD+ turns its transmitter ON, sends the selected test pattern for 55 seconds, 120 20180-100a Preliminary 14 ParagonPD Technical Manual and turns its transmitter OFF. The TX LED in the RF group of indicators lights in red while test trans-

mitting. Pressing PF1 while the 55 seconds test is in progress stops the test. At the end of test transmission, BDLCPD+ operation returns to normal and the RX LED lights in green

(monitoring normal transmitter activity). RS-232 LED Function Selection 3.2.1.4 The PF 1 button is used to select the RS-232 display mode as follows:

If pressed ONCE (do not hold pressed):

- Clears Alarm indications

- CK LED stops flashing for 2 seconds

- During this time, one or all of the RS-232 numbered LEDs (see Figure 13) will light. If one LED lights, it denotes the port to which the subsequent display applies. If all numbered LEDs light, it denotes that the normal 3-port display mode is active. The selected display remains active until manually changed or until RESET is pressed or until power up. Table 5 - RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) TX LED in RF group lights with any and all transmission TX LED in RF group only lights with an ACK or DATA transmission If, during the 2 seconds period that CK is not flashing, PF 1 is pressed a second time, the LED func-

tions will advance one step from top to bottom through the available options in the order shown in Table 5. PF 1 may be pressed repeatedly during the 2 second period (extended with each press) to advance to the desired numbered LED function option. Once the desired RS-232 LED function is selected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. The BDLCPD+ returns to normal operation using the newly selected display. 3.2.1.5 LEDs and Indications LEDs are used to indicate the operation status of the BDLCPD+. Although capable of displaying three col-

ors, only the green and red colors are used for the BDLCPD+. They are grouped by their function:

RF Group, displays radio channel status in green RS-232 Group, displays serial port status in green except the TX LED that also uses red ALARM Group, displays fault status in red 120 20180-100a Preliminary 15 ParagonPD Technical Manual 3.2.1.5.1 Radio Network Indicators The Radio Network LEDs are useful when troubleshooting as an indication of network activity. It can help isolate transmission problems. CS RX TX Carrier Sense - Steady light indicates that an incoming radio data signal is being detected by the DSP modem. CS signal is not user-adjustable. Receive Data Flashing light indicates unit is internally receiving data from the radio network. Transmitter ON blinks green indicates (depending on display mode selected):

That a data packet or ACK (packet acknowledgment) is being transmit-

ted. That an idle packet, data packet or ACK is being sent. Test transmission display is done in red. CS RX TX RF Figure 12 - RF indicators RS-232 Port Indicators 3.2.1.5.2 The RS-232 LEDs normally indicate port activity on the port selected. See section 3.2.1.4 above for in-

structions for selecting display mode. CM Command Mode - LED lights and remains lit while the selected port is accessing the Command FR FT RD TD Processor. It lights ON and OFF while being configured. Flow Control on Receive - the BDLCPD+ has received a flow control signal from the device con-

nected to it. When it lights, BDLCPD+ has stopped sending data to the DTE. When LED goes out, the port terminal is again ready to receive data. Flow Control on Transmit - the BDLCPD+ has sent a flow control signal to the DTE asking it to stop sending data. The LED remains lit as long as the terminal is being held off. Receive Data - when lit, it shows that the Receive Data pin 3 on the RS-232 interface connector is active. Since all BDLCPD+ are configured as DCE, it means that the DTE is receiving data from the BDLCPD+. Transmit Data - shows the status of Transmit Data pin 2 of the RS-232 interface. When lit, the DTE is sending data to the BDLCPD+. C M FR FT RD TD 1 3 2 R S-232 3.2.1.5.3 CK Check and Power LEDs Figure 13 - RS-232 LED Port indicators Check:

Normally flashing rapidly (about 6 cps), indicates microprocessors are working correctly and power is applied. Not flashing indicates unit is not functioning. Blinking slowly (1 cps), indicates the parameters contents of the flash memory have been cor-

rupted. The unit automatically loads its set of factory default parameters and starts beeping at 20 seconds intervals. May also indicate DSP-modem re-initialization has occurred 120 20180-100a Preliminary 16 ParagonPD Technical Manual Alarm Indicators 3.2.1.5.4 All alarm conditions will cause the BDLCPD+ to light one or more of the LED indicators. LEDs remain ON when lit until cleared by either pressing PF 1 (without affecting operation of the unit) or RESET (cy-

cling unit OFF and ON). LM Local Minor Alarm - when lit, indicates the presence of any of the following minor faults:

- Parity, framing or overrun error at any RS-232 port.

- Out of buffers. No memory available to accept data from a local terminal device. Usually de-

notes a flow control problem.

- Flash memory error. At power-up or reset, the unit detected a change in non-volatile memory. RM Remote Minor Alarm - when lit, indicates any of the Local Minor Alarm listed above have taken place at the remote end of the link (i.e. the mobile the local base station is currently communi-

cating with). It will also light when a protocol error has been detected on the network. LF UF In a network using the Host Link Active (MSC) feature, the RM LED, flashing in-sync with the CK LED, indicates that the link is down. Link Failure - when lit, indicates that the base station fails to receive an ACK for a packet sent and for all subsequent retries. Some data has possibly been lost. LF is not functional if all active ports are set to NAR mode. Link fails are inevitable during normal operation (mobiles temporarily out of range, in a tunnel, parked in a dead spot, etc.). A lit LF LED is not normally cause for concern. Unit Failure - when lit, the unit requires attention:

- The BDLCPD+ is not operable;

It may indicate detection of a system software error trap.

- The BDLCPD+ is operable;

Indicates that on power-up, invalid data was detected in the serial EEPROM chip (located in the radio modules). It may also indicate that connection to the radio modules is incorrect or that radio power is not applied. The LM, RM and UF alarms also sound a beep when a fault occurs. The LF alarm is silent. LM RM LF UF ALARMS Figure 14 - ALARMS LED indicators 3.2.2 BDLCPD+ Rear panel Referring to Figure 4, the rear panel of the BDLCPD+ has the following set of chassis connectors:

One DB-25F connector DEV1 - Connects to users applic ation. a) DMP 19200 or 38400 baud for single-site installations b) MSCP 19200 or 38400 baud for multi-site installations Four DE-9F connectors:

DEV2 - usually connected to Dataradios WinRIS program (Dedicated or DMP at 19200 baud). DEV3 - Dedicated (up-to 9600 baud) DEV4 and DEV5 - not used One DA-15M connector:

120 20180-100a Preliminary 17 ParagonPD Technical Manual DEV6 Digital I/O - not used One DB-25M connector:

EXT RADIO/TEST - connects to the Radio assembly through the radio interface cable (see Figure 15) 3.2.2.1 RS-232 Signal Levels In the description of data signals in Table 8, the following conventions are used:

Table 6 - RS-232 Signal levels Term ON OFF Alternates Asserted, spacing Dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 3.2.2.2 Pin Functions Table 7 - DTE Port 9-pin funtions DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function (RS-232 signal levels) DCD from ParagonPD+, normally asserted RXD data from ParagonPD+

TXD data to ParagonPD+

DTR to ParagonPD+, handshaking Ground DSR from ParagonPD+, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to ParagonPD+, handshaking CTS from ParagonPD+, handshaking Reserved Table 8 - DTE Port 25-pin functions DB-25F pin #

1 and 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 20 Function (RS-232 signal levels) Ground TXD data to BDLCPD+

RXD data from BDLCPD+

RTS to BDLCPD+, must be asserted CTS from BDLCPD+, handshaking DSR from BDLCPD+, always +8V DCD from BDLCPD+, always asserted RI - from BDLCPD+, always 8V DTR to BDLCPD+, handshaking We recommend the use of shielded 9-wire or 25-wire cables with all pins connected. Dataradio recommends the use of secure (i.e. password protected and/or dial-back) modems in any in-

stallation where dialup access is provided. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 18 ParagonPD Technical Manual BDLC D212 DB-25 FEM ALE (P8) TXA 1 8 EXTIO _OUT1 1 0 EXTIO_IN1 RXA ( 1) RSSI (1 ) P TT G RO UND (1) EXTIO _OUT3 EXTIO_IN3 SHIELD RXA ( 2) RSSI (2 ) 2 2 3 1 6 6 4 7 2 4 1 7 1 1 4 EXTIO _OUT2 9 EXTIO_IN2 2 3 G RO UND (2) 2 SHIELD 1 5 YEL LOW G RAY GREEN B LUE O RANGE B LACK WHITE SHIELD B RO WN VIOLE T RED B LACK SHIELD TO BDLC 730-03374-102 18.00"

Figure 15 - BDLCPD+ Y cable and pinout BACKPLANE 1 / RX 1 & EXC ITER DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 1 1 TXA (fr om SK 3 pin 8) 1) 1 RX 1 E EPROM (from S K1 pin 1) 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 5 TX KEY (fro m SK3 pin 1 3) 1 3 G RO UND 5

) TX EE PROM (fr om SK 3 p in 1) BACKPLANE 2 / RX 2 DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1) 1 RX 2 EEPROM (fr om SK 1 pin 1) 1 3 GROUND L E F T ( R X1 -Ex) RIGHT (RX2) 120 20180-100a Preliminary 19 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 4. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at time of installation, annual intervals, or whenever deterio-

ration in performance is noted. In-line watt meter (150W & 10 W ranges) 4.1 Equipment Required Radio service monitor (IFR-120B with option 03: 30KHz IF filter or equivalent). RG-214 or RG-223 cable with N-Type male connector to connect ParagonPD+ to the service monitor. WinRIS 3.11 or later1 Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation problems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done dur-

ing winter months. 1 To learn how to launch the Windows-based software alignment and system-testing tool WinRIS, please refer to the readme.txt file on the applications installation diskette. For functional details of the numerous buttons and menu-selectable items available, please refer to the programs context sensitive help. It is also possible to access the help inform ation via the F1 key. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 20 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 4.2 Recommended Checks A) After an installation 1. LED Indications 2. Using WinRIS, Save unit config to a file 3. Transmitter Output Power 4. Transmitter Reflected Power 5. RF Link test between ParagonPD+ and mobile unit(s) B) For annual maintenance & trouble-shooting Same checks as A) plus:

6. Carrier Frequency Error 7. TX Deviation 8. Low Frequency Balance 9. 12 dB SINAD 10. Receiver distortion 11. RSSI check Transmissions for some of the tests above can be initiated by pressing the PF1 membrane button located on the front of the BDLCPD+. For details on its use, refer to Table 4 and section 3.2.1.3 on page 14. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 21 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Table 9 - Checklist A (after installation) Step ACTION CHECKLIST A

(ParagonPD+) Recommended Check out after Installation EXPECTED RESULTS at 25

C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

1 2 3 4 5 Normal Power-up Sequence BDLCPD+ beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.5 Connect and save unit config Press WinRIS Get but-

ton Transmitter Output Power Press TXON (Unmod) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) RF Link test Use the mobile address function and Send but-

ton to dynamically test the link as per WinRIS Help content VHF/UHF: 20 - 100 watts 800 MHz: 20 - 70 watts 900 MHz: 65 - 100 watts

+10%, -10%

Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. 1Check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc.

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Engineering. 10W meter in-line watt-

Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Look for Delivery confirmed on the Status bar Refer to 4.3.1 and to WinRIS Help content. Mobile is out of range Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless unit has been set a lower value). Note that readings less than 100 watts for VHF/UHF or 70 watts for 800 MHz models, may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter or the RF feedline & antenna installation. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 22 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Table 10 - Checklist B (General) CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD+) General Check out (part1 of 2) ParagonPD+ units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting a unit may result in significant performance losses. The proposed adjustments in the "IF NOT?" column below, should be tried ONLY if system data Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 performance degradation is noticed combined with out-of-tolerance items. ACTION Expected Results at 25 MEASURE WITH

C IF NOT?

Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press WinRIS Get button BDLCPD+ beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.5 as per WinRIS Help content Transmitter Output Power Press TX ON (Unmod) VHF/UHF: 20 - 100 watts 800 MHz: 20 - 70 watts 900 MHz: 65 - 100 watts

+10%, -10%

Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. Adjust Power on the front panel of the Power Amp

( see Figure 8) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation (KHz) Press TX (Unmod) Carrier will be modu-

lated with a 1 kHz tone. Low Frequency Balance Initiate a TX Random data test via BDLCPD+s PF1

(See Table 4)

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Engineering.

< 300 Hz Refer to "Figure 16 - Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation" per bit rates Tolerance is +5%, -10%

for all bit rates. a) Record deviation level read from step 6 b) Record deviation read from TX Random test c) Difference between a) and b) should be:

< 600 Hz (DGMSK)

< 1.5 kHz (xRC4FSK, xRC8FSK, HC)

< 2.0 kHz (xRC4FSK, xRC8FSK, FC/NPSPAC) 10 W in-line wattmeter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Service monitor set to read frequency error Service monitor set to read deviation.

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Adjust TCXO (IC700)

(see inside Exciter module at, Figure 28 (800), Figure 30

(UHF), Figure 32 (VHF) ) Adjust according to Appendix 1

- ParagonPD+ Deviation adjust on page 48 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position, all audio filtering disabled ) Refer to Section 5.2.3.4 120 20180-100a Preliminary 23 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD+) General Check out (part2 of 2) ParagonPD+ units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting unit may result in significant performance losses. The proposed adjustments in the "IF NOT?" column below, should be tried ONLY if system data Step performance degradation is noticed combined with out of tolerance items. ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

25

C Set the service monitor to generate on the selected receive frequency. Verify alternately for both receivers. The carrier should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation level specified below:

8 12 dB SINAD

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

- For Full channel unit, set deviation to 3 kHz.

- For Half &

NPSPAC channel unit, set deviation to 1.5 kHz Receiver distortion

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

- Set service monitor RF Gen output to 70 dBm

- Deviation level as per SINAD above. RSSI Apply to each receiver input the following RF level UHF & 800/900Mhz:

-110dBm VHF: -100 dBm 9 10

- Backplane correspond-

ing to the receiver being verified: SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 24)

- Service monitor (IFR) set to SINAD

- IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter.

- Backplane correspond-

ing to the receiver being verified: SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 24)

- Service monitor (IFR) set to SINAD

- IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter.

- Backplane correspond-

ing to the receiver being verified: SK1, Pin 5 (see Figure 24)

- DC Voltmeter measurement Refer to section 5.2.2 Refer to section 5.2.2 Refer to section 5.2.2.5 for all models. Refer to factory technical support only if RX data performance degradation is noticed combined with out of tolerance RSSI readings. Better than -108 dBm including cable loss

(Typically -109 to -110 dBm) 5.5 %

(Typically < 3.5 %) UHF & 800 MHz:

2.0 VDC (+/- 0.3VDC) VHF:

4.0 VDC (+/- 0.35VDC) Note: BDLC must be connected to the radio during the measurements 120 20180-100a Preliminary 24 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 4.3 Additional test details 4.3.1 RF Data Link Test A link test between a mobile and a known base station can be done using the WinRIS "Address" and

"Send" functions. The Address and Device fields, the Send button and the Chat message screen are used to send messages to specific mobile or base or to carry out RF test. Start by entering the address of the mobile (or base station) you wish to send a test message to or test:

1- Specify the address:

Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) address , consisting of upper case letters in the range A-

P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

- For ParagonPD+ products:

address is not in AMN or number fo rmat

- For mobile products:

address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 2- Enter the Device number for mobile (or base station). 3- Press the Send button. The Chat window reports Sent to xx m obile (where xx is mobile name). If test is successful:

Status line reports Delivery confirmed. If test unsuccessful:

Chat window reports Waiting, Then the Status line reports Delivery Failed. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 25 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 4.3.2 Carrier deviations DGMSK Carrier Modulation xRC4FSK xRC8FSK Tone Data Tone Data Tone Data Network Speed

(b/s) Typical deviation in kHz

(1000Hz test tone) Maximum deviation in kHz Network Speed

(b/s) Typical deviation in kHz

(1000Hz test tone) Maximum*

deviation in kHz Network Speed

(b/s) Typical deviation in kHz

(1000Hz test tone) Maximum*

deviation in kHz 19200 9600 19200 9600 8000 9600 8000 9600 8000 9600 4.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.8 3.2 1.5 2.5 Full Channel (800MHz) 32000 25600 3.6 3.7 5.6 5.7 Full Channel (VHF/UHF) 32000 25600 4.3 4.0 6.3 6.0 NPSPAC Channel (800MHz - U.S. only) 16000 19200 2.4 2.1 3.9 3.6 900MHz Channel ( U.S. only) 16000 19200 2.4 2.4 3.9 3.8 Half-Channel (VHF/UHF & 800MHz) 14400 16000 2.0 1.6 3.6 3.2 48000 43200 48000 43200 28800 24000 28800 24000 21600 24000 21600 4.6 3.6 4.6 3.6 3.1 3.1 3.4 3.9 2.1 3.1 3.9 4.5 4.5 4.3 3.5 3.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 2.5 2.8 4.8 5.7 6.2 6.0 3.2 4.6 4.2 4.6 5.0 3.3 3.8

* Data deviation shown may seem higher than tone deviation, however they fall within the appropriate FCC / ICs masks limits Figure 16 - Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation 120 20180-100a Preliminary 26 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5. Radio Programming and Adjustments All receiver procedures detailed in this section should be done twice: once for the Main (or RX1) r e-

ceiver module and a second time for the Auxiliary (or RX2) receiver module. Connect to the relevant module and its corresponding backplane PCB as required. 5.1 Series II Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the ParagonPD+ base station UHF, VHF & 800MHz radios (half & full channels). 486 PC or better, MS-Windows 3.1 or later 5.1.1 Recommended Items

- T800win programming kit for Series II:

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- T800-01-0002 programming cable (DB-25 to RJ-45 cable)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 5.1.2 Module Programming Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win software for Series II Base station. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

- Press and hold the Alt key while pressing at the same time the relevant hotkey as indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command.

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As directory service box. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 27 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 3.0 MHz from previous center frequency Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is programmed outside the radio tuning range:

800/900 =

UHF =

VHF =

Exciter and PA alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed outside the radio tuning range:

1. Connect the PC, via the supplied programming lead, to the speaker panels front-mounted RJ11 co n-

2.5 MHz from previous center frequency. 1.5 MHz from previous center frequency. 4 MHz from previous center frequency. nector. 2. Run Tait PGM800Win program and follow instructions found in the T800 Programming Software Users Manual to select the proper mo dule to be programmed. 3. Program required channel' s frequencies. Do not program any CTCSS tones on channels. Do not change any other parameters. Refer to Figure 17, Figure 18, Figure 19 and Figure 20 for screen program examples. 4. Save the base station programming info to a file for further reference. 5. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 28 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Figure 17 - Receiver System Information Figure 18 - Receiver Channel Information screen 120 20180-100a Preliminary 29 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Figure 19 - Exciter System Information screen Figure 20 - Exciter Channel Information screen 120 20180-100a Preliminary 30 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5.1.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches The backplane-mounted DIP switch settings override the default channel programmed by PGM800Win. To set a default channel via the software, all DIP switches must be set to OFF (i.e. 00000000). When a switch is Off, its binary count is active; when a switch is ON its binary count is inactive. The various DIP switch combinations of ON or OFF make up a binary total, which identifies the channel number. To select a channel, set the appropriate DIP switch or switches to OFF to make the binary count total the channel number you want. Set all other switches to ON. It is recommended to set both SW1 (RX) and SW2 (TX) to the same settings on both back plane boards. Example: To select channel 5, set the DIP switches as shown below:

I X T H C T W S L E N N A H C Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Always ON except when default channel is required O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 21 - Backplane DIP switches example - Channel 5 selected I X R H C T W S L E N N A H C 120 20180-100a Preliminary 31 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5.2 Series II Radio Tuning This section covers some basic Series II base station modules radio tuning and verification for:

- VHF (T83x-xx-0200),

- UHF (T85x-xx-0250) and

800 MHz/900 MHz (T88x-xx-0200). Note: Usually, this section is not done unless called for in section 5.1 Series II - Radio Programming or in Table 10 Checklist B (General). To identify the radio modules, check the part number on the manufacturers label at the back of the Receiver, Exciter and Power Amplifier modules:

RX T885-10-0200 (800-870 MHz, 25kHz) T885-15-0200 (800-870 MHz, 12.5kHz

& NPSPAC) T885-30-0200 (890-960 MHz, 25kHz) T885-35-0200 (890-960 MHz, 12.5kHz) T855-10-0250 (400 - 440 MHz, 25kHz) T855-15-0250 (400 - 440 MHz, 12.5kHz) T855-20-0250 (440 - 480 MHz, 25kHz) T855-25-0250 (440 - 480 MHz, 12.5kHz) T855-30-0250 (480 - 530 MHz, 25kHz) T855-35-0250 (480 - 530 MHz, 12.5kHz) T835-10-0200 (136 - 156 MHz, 25kHz) T835-15-0200 (136 - 156 MHz, 12.5kHz) T835-20-0200 (148 - 174 MHz, 25kHz) T835-25-0200 (148 - 174 MHz, 12.5kHz) 5.2.1 Test Equipment TX T881-1x-0200 (800-870 MHz) T881-1x-0200 (800-870 MHz) T881-3x-0200 (890-960 MHz) T881-3x-0200 (890-960 MHz) PA T889-10 (850-870 MHz) TPL- PA8-2BF-LMS (890-960) T857-1x-0250 (400 - 440 MHz) T857-2x-0250 (440 - 480 MHz) T857-3x-0250 (480 - 520 MHz) T859-10-0000 (400 - 440 MHz) T859-20-0000 (440 - 480 MHz) T859-30-0000 (480 -520 MHz) T837-1x-0200 (136 - 156 MHz) T837-2x-0200 (148 - 174 MHz) T839-10-0000 (136 - 156 MHz) T839-20-0000 (148 - 174 MHz) to ' N'

type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar). 3-foot length of double-shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x ' BNC'

- Digital Multimeter & probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

1 HP 34330A Shunt 30A (UHF only, used for transmitter current measurement)

- Digital or Analog calibrated Oscilloscope & scope probes (X1, X10 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (.001ppm OCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x Six-inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

3dB 150watt attenuator 1x Torx screwdriver #T-10 and #T-20 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (comes with the radio to connect the exciter to the PA) 120 20180-100a Preliminary 32 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5.2.2 Receiver module (T885-xx-0200, T855-xx-0250 & T835-xx-0200) Note 1: Refer to Figure 27 (T885), Figure 29 (T855) and to Figure 31 (T835) for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning, The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 5.2.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during all receiver alignment procedures described below:

1. Remove the receiver (T885, T855 or T835) module from the ParagonPD+ rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD+ Extender Rail Kit for Series II to the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Prepare the Multimeter to DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD+. 5.2.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the Multimeter to either side of L504 (T885) or the long lead of L1 (T855 and T835) in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T885 (800/900 MHz) Tune VCO trimmer CV500 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10VDC. 2. T855 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 3. T835 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels (adjusting as shown for single channel above):

1. T885 (800/900 MHz) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 2. T855 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 3. T835 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. 4. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of respectively All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T885 and T855 or within 13V and 5V for the T835. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 33 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5.2.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1. IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel frequency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1KHz sine e) Select SINAD meter f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the back-

plane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver I/O Pad P207 (T885), the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835). 2. Adjust the helical resonators for best SINAD: #H400, #H401 and #H900 (T885); #FL410 and #FL420

(T855) or L410, L420, L460 and L470 (T835). 3. Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do step 2) & 3) again. The absolute minimum requirement level to reach is -108dBm (typical level is -109 to -110 dBm) 4. Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in paragraph 5.2.2.4. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. WARNING: Do NOT attempt to re-tune the IF stages

(I.e. L300 and L301 for T885, L310 to L390 for T855 or L330 to L360 and CV318 for T835). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-programming. Touch-

ing these coils will have a direct impact on the modem DSP ISI coefficient settings and may reduce significantly the radio performances over data. 5.2.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR COM-120:

a) Generator mode, Output T/R, TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency b) Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) c) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off. d) Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios. e) Use a X1 scope probe connected to the IFR SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the radio backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver I/O Pad P207 (T885), the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835). 2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level should be better than -108dBm (including ca-

ble loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2kHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half / NPSPAC channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5 dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. For T885 and T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full channel) or 0.8kHz

(half channel). 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half / NPSPAC channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5 dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. For T885 and T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full channel) or 0.8kHz

(half channel). Note: If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-end. If still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 34 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5.2.2.5 RSSI Adjustment

- Caution: mis-adjusting RSSI may reduce the ParagonPD+' s Parallel Decode (PD) performance.

- BDLCPD+ must be connected to the radio backplane during this process. 1. T885-xx-0200 (800/900 MHz) and T855-xx-0250 (UHF) receivers:

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110 dBm modulated by a 1 kHz tone at a deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half / NPSPAC channel).

- Adjust RV 345 (RSSI level) for T885, RV320 (RSSI level) for T855 to give 2.0V RSSI output at SK330 pin 2 (T855) or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter (See Figure 24 for test point location). T835-xx-0200 (VHF) receivers:

2.

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -100 dBm with deviation of 3kHz

(full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) at 1kHz tone.

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 4.5V RSSI output at RSSI test point (near quad. Coil L360) or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter (Figure 24 - T800-50-0001) for test point loca-

tion). The following RSSI graphics are given as general information only. Refer to factory technical support only if RX data performance degradation is noticed combined with something that does not look like those RSSI curves.

-80

-70 dBm

-120 -110 -100 -90 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 e g a t l o V Figure 22 - T855 and T885, Typical RSSI Curve: volt to dBm Figure 23 - T835, Typical RSSI Curve: volt to dBm 120 20180-100a Preliminary 35 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual PL1 OFF ON TX CH AN EL SW ITC H SW1 O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 OFF ON RX CH AN EL SW ITC H SW2 O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SK1 1 5 6 RSSI ouput SK1 pin 5 RX-Audio1 SK1 pin 6 RSSI ouput SK1 pin 5 RX-Audio1 SK1 pin 6 Figure 24 - T800-50-0001 Backplane 5.2.3 Exciter Module (T881-xx-0200,T857-xx-0250 or T837-xx-0200) Note 1: Refer to Figure 28 (T881), Figure 30 (T857) and to Figure 32 (T837) for locating tuning controls and components. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indi-

cating that it needs re-tuning. Warning:

The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 5.2.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station. 2. Prepare the Multimeter to DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T881, T857 or T837) module from the base station rack frame. 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the exciter antenna connector. 6. Connect the ParagonPD+ Extender Rail Kit to the empty chassis exciter slot. 7. Apply power to the base station. 5.2.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the Multimeter to either side of L309 (T881) or the long lead of L1 in the VCO (T857 and T835) (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T881 (800/900 MHz) Tune VCO trimmer CV300 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T857 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 3. T837 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 36 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Multiple channels (adjusting as shown for single channel above):

1. T881 (800/900 MHz) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 2. T857 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 3. T837 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T881 and T857 or within 13V and 5V for the T837. Note:

Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. In the case where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 5.2.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-Key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO (IC700) to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 5.2.3.4 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment Note:

PGM800Win version 3.00 or later must be used for T881 adjustments and can also be used to adjust T857 and T837 units. Electronic potentiometer (256 step) is used to allow channel adjustment of two-point modulation (Low freq. balance). PGM800Win version 3.00 or later must be used, if the unit serial number is longer than 6 digits. 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source Demod out connector, DC coupled). Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPD+s PF1 button and following the procedure ou t-

lined in section 3.2.1.3 or run the Dataradio WinRIS program on the same computer if two serial COM ports are available. 4. Press EPOTs button. Adjust IC220 via PGM800Win reference modulation to obtain the best square wave, no damping, no overshoot. (You can use either the mouse or up and down arrow keys). Record the deviation read. 5. If transmission has not ended by itself, press BDLCPD+ PF1 to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 8. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 37 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 6. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPD+s PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.3. Record de-

viation again. 7. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300Hz. If not, re-

adjust IC220 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 8. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare the de-

viation produced between 1000 Hz sine wave test tone and Random data test pattern The difference between the test tone and the test pattern should be:

< 600 Hz (DGMSK)

< 1.5 kHz (xRC4FSK, xRC8FSK, HC)

< 2.0 kHz (xRC4FSK, xRC8FSK, FC/NPSPAC). For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel. 9. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.3. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use (see Figure 16). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to Checklist B at step 6, page 23. 5.2.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power at the coaxial cable end connecting to the power amplifier should be:

- VHF (T837) = 800 mW 200mW (no adjustment provided)

- UHF (T857) = 1W 300mW (no adjustment provided)

800/900 MHz (T881) = 4W 300mW (RV502, Figure 28) 5.2.4 Power Amplifier Module (T889 (800-870 MHz only), T859 or T839)

- Re-install the exciter module into the ParagonPD+ rack frame.

- Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier.

- Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load.

- Forward and reverse power alarm set (control) are identified on the PA cover. Note: For the TPL Communications Power Amplifier (PA8-2BF-LMS) adjustment, see sec-

tion 5.2.5 5.2.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Output

- Key the transmitter on the exciter and adjust the PA output for required output (max 100W for VHF and UHF and max 70W for 800) using the front panel power control If power cannot be reached, refer to section 5.2.4.4 for T859 UHF model, or factory technical support for T839 and T889 models. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 38 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 5.2.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level (Optional setting) 1. Power up the PA and adjust front panel power control so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA normally operates at 50W). 2. Adjust the forward power alarm set (T889 or T839: RV101and T859: RV48) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust front panel power control for the normal operating power level 5.2.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional setting) 1. Power up the PA and adjust the front panel power control for the normal operating power level. 2. Connect an unterminated 3dB 150 W pad to the PA output (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust the reverse power alarm set (T889 or T839: RV105 and T859: RV52) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. 5.2.4.4 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure 1. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, set RV69 (driver power level) fully clockwise. 2. For all units, preset the tuning controls as shown in Figure 25 Figure 25 - T859 Tuning Settings 3. Set RV63 (front panel power control) fully clockwise. 4. Key on the exciter (press PTT button). 5. Adjust CV1 for maximum output. 6. Adjust CV8 for maximum output. 7. Adjust CV32 for maximum output. 8. Adjust CV51 and CV57 for maximum output. 9. Adjust CV34 and CV35 for maximum output. 10. Recheck all settings. The power output should exceed 110W. 11. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, adjust RV69 (driver power level) until the output power drops to 110W. 12. For all units, adjust RV63 (front panel power control) to reduce the power output to the required level (normally 100W). 5.2.4.5 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency 1. Insert a Shunt current device (HP 34330A Shunt 30A ) between the power supply red wire and its 13.8Vdc output, then connect the shunt to the multimeter (VDC scale) 2. While transmitting, monitor the current. It should remain under 22A. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 39 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 3. Retune CV32, CV51 and CV57 towards maximum capacitance to obtain minimum supply cur-

rent, but do not exceed a maximum drop of 0.5A per control. 4. Check that the supply current is <22A for 100W output power. Note:

These control settings are normally very close to minimum supply current. If the current is re-

duced too far, maximum power output will drop and 2f rejection may degrade. 5.2.5 (TPL) LMS series Power amplifier (PA8-2BF-LMS) (890-960 MHz) Note:

Refer to Figure 26 for parts location.

- Do not re-install the Exciter module back in the ParagonPD+ rack frame.

- Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier using the 18" coax cable N-M to BNC-M

(727-03353-101)

- Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load. 5.2.5.1 Power Output alignment (from TPL Communications) a) Key the transmitter using the Exciter Carrier button. b) Adjust VR 1 (LMS rear panel) and reduce power output to its nominal value (100W, max 125W) or lower as required. Warning:

Do not drop the power to less than 65 Watts. Setting a lower value may create spurious emissions that can create interference with adjacent channels. 5.2.5.2 Forward Power Alarm Level a) Key the transmitter using the Exciter Carrier button b) Adjust T881' s RV502 Exciter output power to drop the RF power amplifier output to 65 Watts. c) Adjust TPL' s VR5 until the front panel LED begins to flash. d) Adjust T881' s RV502 (Exciter) output level to the normal operating power level. 5.2.5.3 Amplifier Activation a) Key the transmitter using the Exciter Carrier button b) Set T881' s RV502 Exciter output power to a level 6 dB below the normal drive level. (e.g. divide by 4 the Exciter nominal output power) Refer to 5.2.3.5 Exciter Power Output. c) Adjust TPL' s VR4 to activate the amplifier and its fans at this threshold. d) Adjust T881' s RV502 Exciter output level for the normal operating power level. 5.2.5.4 RF Input (Relative Reading) a) Toggle the front panel switch until the top line of the display reads RF INPUT. b) Key the transmitter from the T881' s Exciter Carrier button c) Adjust TPL' s VR8 to a nominal 10 units at nominal input drive 5.2.5.5 Forward Power meter calibration a) Toggle the front panel switch until the top line of the display reads FWD PWR. b) Key the transmitter from the T881' s Exciter Carrier button. c) Adjust TPL' s VR6 so that the front panel meter is in agreement with the calibrated power meter. 5.2.5.6 Reverse Power meter calibration a) Connect an unterminated 3dB pad to the PA output (e.g. 3:1 VSWR). 120 20180-100a Preliminary 40 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual b) Toggle the front panel switch until the top line of the display reads RFL PWR. c) Key the transmitter T881' s Exciter Carrier button. d) Adjust TPL' s VR7 so that the front panel meter is in agreement with the calibrated power meter. 5.2.5.7 Reverse Power Alarm Level a) Connect an unterminated 3dB pad to the PA output (e.g. 3:1 VSWR). e) Key the transmitter T881' s Exciter Carrier button. b) Adjust TPL' s VR3 until the front panel SWR LED begins to flash Note: The LED should extinguish when the normal load is connected (connected to IFR). VR8 VR4 VR5 VR3 VR6 VR7 VR1 SW1 Figure 26 - (TPL) LMS Rear Panel 120 20180-100a Preliminary 41 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual

Figure 27 - T885-0020 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20180-100a Preliminary 42 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Figure 28 - T881-0200 Exciter Tuning Controls Locations 120 20180-100a Preliminary 43 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual IC 310 SK330 pin 2 Figure 29 - T855 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20180-100a Preliminary 44 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual TCXO Figure 30 - T857 Exciter Tuning Controls Locations 120 20180-100a Preliminary 45 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual L410 L420 L1 L460 L470 L330 CV318 L340 RSSI Test Point P207 IC 700 CV1 L350 RV 320 IC 350 L360 Figure 31 - T835 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20180-100a Preliminary 46 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual IC700 TCXO L1 CV1 IC220 Figure 32 - T837 Exciter Tuning Controls Location 120 20180-100a Preliminary 47 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Appendix 1 - ParagonPD+ Deviation adjust 1. Using the WinRIS, press TX ON (Modulated) and record deviation level as read on the IFR. 2. Using Windows Notepad, Edit the .bp2 file named with the corresponding BDLCPD+ serial number (e.g. abcd.bp2). Save as to another file name and keep it in case something goes wrong while changing a parameter. 3. Locate the line labeled Dev0 Par85= and record the value beside the = sign. This is the corresponding parameter value to the deviation read in step 1. 4. Apply the following formula to determine the new parameter value to be set:

(New Par85 value) = [(initial Par85 value) X (target deviation) / (deviation read)] + 2 5. Change the value in the file, Save as using the BDLC PD+ serial number file name. 6. Run the WinRIS again and do a Put From. From the opened window, select the file that you just made the change to and then press OK 7. Again, check deviation level while pressing TX ON (Modulated). If the level is now correct, press StationReset to make the change permanent. Otherwise do step 5 again, changing the value entered in the file by 1 or 2 digit(s) up or down, fine-tuning directly the Par85 (DSP deviation) parameter. Do steps 6 and 7 again to confirm acceptance. This last step may have to be repeated once or twice while varying the entered value up or down. If unable to obtain the correct level after editing up and/or down by no more than 2, contact System Engineering. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 48 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency VHF 136 -156 MHz 148 -174 MHz UHF 400 - 440 MHz1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 900 RX 800 - 870 MHz TX 850 - 870 MHz RX 890 - 960 MHz TX 890 - 960 MHz RF/Modem Assembly Size Frequency Stability 19.0 W x 17.5.0 H x 12.5 D + 2.0 connector allowance 2.5 ppm (-30 to +60C) 1.0 ppm (-20 to +60C) 13.8 VDC nominal (negative ground), 10.8 - 16 VDC Supply Voltage Circuit protection RX Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC TX Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC Base Station Power Consumption

@ 115 VAC Channel spacing or 115 VAC Fuse 1: 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 10A Fuse 2: 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 30A Crowbar diodes for reverse polarity protection 1.5A max. (Two receivers with speaker monitoring) 20A (16A typical @

156MHz for 100W) 24A (22A DC typical @

450MHz for 100W) 28A (23A DC typical @ 850MHz for 70W) 6A max. 25 kHz and 12.5 kHz Operating Temperature Range

-30 C to +60 C (deleted power supply, catalog number ending with a 0)

-10 C to +60 C (with standard Dual Power Supply assembly, catalog number ending with a 2) RECEIVER Selectivity @ 25 kHz

@ 12.5 kHz Sensitivity @ 12 dB SINAD Spurious Response Rejection Intermodulation Rejection

- EIA (25 kHz)

- EIA 300-096 (12.5 kHz) Hum and Noise

- EIA (25 kHz)

- ETS 300-096 (12.5 kHz) TRANSMITTER Rated Continuous RF Power Range of Adjustment Spurious Emissions: - transmit

- standby VSWR Stability Transmitter Sideband Noise 92 dB min, 95 dB (Typical) 86 dB min, 89 dB (Typical) 87 dB min, 90 dB (Typical) 83 dB min, 85 dB (Typical) 85 dB min, 88 dB (Typical) 79 dB min, 80 dB (Typical)

-117 dBm*

100 dB (Typical) 85 dB (Typical) 80 dB (Typical) 85 dB (Typical) 80 dB (Typical) 80 dB (Typical) 75 dB (Typical) 47 dB*

45 dB*

70W 20 70 W 65 - 100 W 100W 20 100 W 100W 20 100 W

-36 dBm to 1GHz, -30 dBm to 4 GHz (to 3.2GHz for 800/900 model)

-57 dBm to 1GHz, -47 dBm to 4 GHz ((to 3.2GHz for 800/900 model)) 5:1 mismatch

* Psophometrically weighted (De-emphasis response) 55 dB*

50 dB*

@ +/-25 kHz

@ +/- 1 MHz

-95 dBc

-105 dBc

-95 dBc

-105 dBc

-88 dBc

-100 dBc 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20180-100a Preliminary 49 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual Channel type VHF (25 kHz) VHF (12.5kHz) UHF (25 kHz) UHF (12.5kHz) 800 (25 kHz) 800 (NPSPAC) 800 (12.5kHz) 900 (12.5kHz) Channel type UHF (25 kHz) UHF (12.5kHz) 800 (25 kHz) 800 (NPSPAC) 800 (12.5kHz) 900 (12.5kHz) 32 kb/s

(RC4FSK) GeminiPD+ only TBD N/A 25.6 kb/s

(SRRC4FSK) GeminiPD+

only TBD N/A

-107 dBm

-110 dBm N/A N/A

-108 dBm

-109 dBm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 48 kb/s

(xRC8FSK) GeminiPD+

only 43.2 kb/s

(xRC8FSK) GeminiPD+

only

-TBD dBm

- TBD dBm N/A N/A

-TBD dBm

-TBD dBm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Dataradio Proprietary DBA Data rates and Modulation type*

19.2 kb/s

(SRRC4FSK) 19.2 kb/s

(DGMSK) 16 kb/s 14.4 kb/s

(SRRC4FSK)

(SRRC4FSK) NA N/A N/A N/A N/A

-108 dBm N/A TBD 28.8 kb/s

(xRC8FSK) GeminiPD+

only N/A N/A N/A

-TBD dBm N/A

-TBD dBm

-113 dBm N/A

-113 dBm N/A

-113 dBm

-108 dBm N/A TBD 24.0 kb/s

(xRC8FSK) GeminiPD+

only N/A N/A TBD N/A N/A TBD N/A

-109 dBm

-112 dBm N/A N/A

-113 dBm TBD N/A

-112 dBm

-110 dBm TBD 21.6 kb/s

(xRC8FSK) GeminiPD+

only N/A

-TBD dBm

-TBD dBm N/A

-TBD dBm

-TBD dBm

-TBD dBm N/A N/A

-TBD dBm

-TBD dBm Full duplex Packet Error Rate

(< 1% error, at Fc, with Parallel Decode) Protocol Operation

* Networks must use common modulation, bit, and baud rates. Different types are not on-air compatible FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS VHF UHF 800 MHz Series II 900 MHz Series II 136 - 156 MHz 148 - 174 MHz 400 - 440 MHz 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz 890 - 960 MHz FCC CASTEL0007 EOTBDD4T83-2 EOTBDD4T85-1 EOTBDD4T85-2 EOTBDD4T85-3 EOTBDD4T881S2 (4Watts) EOTBDD4T889 (100 Watts) EOTBD4T881-3 (4 Watts) BBD8-2BF-L (100 Watts, TPL) IC (DOC) *

737195375A 737195376A 3993195401A N/A 737194358 737194358

* Operating under Class II permissive change 120 20180-100a Preliminary 50 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual EMISSION DESIGNATORS*

Bit rate 32000 25600 19200 16000 14400 48000 43200 28800 24000 21600 Baud rate Modulation VHF UHF 800MHz 900MHz 16000 12800 9600 8000 7200 16000 14400 9600 8000 7200 RC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK xRC8FSK1) xRC8FSK1) xRC8FSK1) xRC8FSK1) xRC8FSK1) 15K2F1D 14K7F1D

7K67F1D 8K25F1D

16K5F1D 14K3F1D 15K9F1D 7K17F1D1) 8K00F1D1) 16K7F1D1) 14K9F1D1)

8K00F1D1) 8K33F1D1) 15K9F1D 14K3F1D 15K9F1D 9K50F1D 11K0F1D 13K7F1D1) 14K9F1D1) 9K17F1D1) 11K9F1D1)

9K58F1D 9K75F1D 10K9F1D

9K50F1D1) 9K42F1D1) 10K5F1D1)

* Emission designators for legacy DGMSK modulations are available on certificates 1) Ver 1.00a-Preliminary; Subject to Class II Permissive Change Approval 120 20180-100a Preliminary 51 ParagonPD+ Technical Manual

 

 

ParagonPD Data Base Station Technical Manual Version 2.02 The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2001 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. November 2001 Part no.: 120 20170-202 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................................................1 Features:..................................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .......................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 Factory Repair.........................................................................................................................................2 1.5.2 Model Designation...................................................................................................................................3 1.6 RADIO SERIES I OR II.........................................................................................................................................3 1.7 PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................4 2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................4 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................................4 2.2 LOCATION .........................................................................................................................................................4 2.3 ELECTRICAL ......................................................................................................................................................4 Radio Assembly Power ............................................................................................................................7 BDLCPD assembly Power.........................................................................................................................8 2.4 ANTENNA ..........................................................................................................................................................8 2.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................8 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection ..........................................................................................................................8 2.5 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ....................................................................................................8 2.6 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION................................................................................................................9 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................9 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.1.5.1 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2 3.1.1.3 3.1.1.4 3.1.1.5 3.1 RADIO ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................................................................9 Front panels.............................................................................................................................................9 Receiver module ............................................................................................................................................. 9 Exciter module.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Power Amp module ...................................................................................................................................... 10 Speaker panel................................................................................................................................................ 10 Dual Power Supply module .......................................................................................................................... 11 Rear Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 11 Radio Assembly, rear panel ...................................................................................................................11 Backplane PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 11 3.2 BDLCPD ..........................................................................................................................................................12 BDLCPD Front panel..............................................................................................................................12 Front Switches .............................................................................................................................................. 12 Reset......................................................................................................................................................... 12 PF 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 12 LEDs and Indications.................................................................................................................................... 14 Radio Network Indicators ........................................................................................................................ 14 3.2.1.2.1 RS-232 Port Indicators............................................................................................................................. 14 3.2.1.2.2 3.2.1.2.3 Check and Power ..................................................................................................................................... 15 3.2.1.2.4 Alarm Indicators....................................................................................................................................... 15 BDLCPD Rear panel ...............................................................................................................................16 Signal Levels................................................................................................................................................. 16 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.1.1.1 3.2.1.1.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.1 3.2.2 3.2.1 4. WINRIS PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................18 4.1 OPERATION .....................................................................................................................................................18 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START WINRIS...................................................................................................................18 4.3 WINDOW .........................................................................................................................................................19 120 20170-202 ii ParagonPD Technical Manual 4.4.4 4.4.3.1 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4 FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................................................20 4.4.1 Station Reset button...........................................................................................................................20 4.4.2 Configuration to a file ...........................................................................................................................20 Get button.................................................................................................................................................. 21 Get As button............................................................................................................................................. 21 4.4.3 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................21 Put From button......................................................................................................................................... 21 Special Functions...................................................................................................................................21 Banner Field.................................................................................................................................................. 22 Comments ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 22 Test Functions........................................................................................................................................22 DSR signal is High indicator ........................................................................................................................ 22 CTS signal is High indicator......................................................................................................................... 23 Channel Selection ......................................................................................................................................... 23 TXON Tests.................................................................................................................................................. 23 4.4.5.4.1 Unmodulated Carrier................................................................................................................................ 23 4.4.5.4.2 Modulated Carrier .................................................................................................................................... 23 Ping Button ................................................................................................................................................... 24 Status Bar ..............................................................................................................................................24 4.4.5.1 4.4.5.2 4.4.5.3 4.4.5.4 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 4.4.5.5 4.4.6 4.4.5 5. TESTING AND TROUBLE-SHOOTING ......................................................................................................25 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED....................................................................................................................................25 5.2 RECOMMENDED CHECKS.................................................................................................................................25 6. RADIO PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................29 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.1 SERIES I 800MHZ RADIO PROGRAMMING.......................................................................................................29 Recommended Items ..............................................................................................................................29 6.1.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................29 6.1.2 File Creation..........................................................................................................................................30 6.1.3 Programming the EPROM.....................................................................................................................31 6.1.4 EPROM Installation ..............................................................................................................................32 6.1.5 6.1.6 Channel Selection via DIP Switches......................................................................................................32 6.2 SERIES I 800MHZ RADIO TUNING...................................................................................................................33 Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................................33 Receiver Module (T885) ........................................................................................................................34 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 34 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 34 Front-End Alignment .................................................................................................................................... 34 SINAD and Linearity Check ......................................................................................................................... 35 RSSI Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Exciter Module (T881)...........................................................................................................................36 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 36 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 36 TX Frequency Error Adjustment................................................................................................................... 36 Low Frequency Balance Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37 Exciter Power Output.................................................................................................................................... 37 Power Amplifier Module (T889)............................................................................................................38 Power Amplifier Power Out.......................................................................................................................... 38 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 38 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 38 6.3 SERIES II RADIO PROGRAMMING.....................................................................................................................41 6.3.1 Recommended Items ..............................................................................................................................41 6.3.2 Module Programming............................................................................................................................41 6.3.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches......................................................................................................44 6.4 SERIES II RADIO TUNING.................................................................................................................................45 Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................................45 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.3.3 6.2.3.4 6.2.3.5 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.4.1 120 20170-202 iii ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2 Receiver module (T855 & T835)............................................................................................................45 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 45 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 46 Front-End Alignment .................................................................................................................................... 46 SINAD and Linearity Check ......................................................................................................................... 46 RSSI Adjustment (UHF: T855) .................................................................................................................... 47 RSSI Adjustment (VHF: T835) .................................................................................................................... 48 Exciter Module (T857, T837 or T881)...................................................................................................49 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 49 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 49 TX Frequency Error Adjustment................................................................................................................... 49 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 50 Exciter Power Output.................................................................................................................................... 51 Power Amplifier Module (T859 or T839) ..............................................................................................51 Power Amplifier Power Output .................................................................................................................... 51 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 51 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 51 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure .............................................................................................. 52 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency ........................................................................................................... 52 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.2.6 6.4.3.1 6.4.3.2 6.4.3.3 6.4.3.4 6.4.3.5 6.4.4.1 6.4.4.2 6.4.4.3 6.4.4.4 6.4.4.5 6.4.3 6.4.4 7. SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................................................58 APPENDIX 1 - PARAGON PD DEVIATION ADJUST.........................................................................................................57 FIGURE 1 TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLIES, FRONT VIEW...................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BDLCPD, FRONT VIEW..................................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLIES ASSEMBLY, REAR VIEW.....................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - BDLCPD, REAR VIEW....................................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 5 - BDLCPDS REAR CONNECTION, SWITCH AND FUSE .......................................................................................8 FIGURE 6 - RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL.................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 7 - EXCITER MODULE, FRONT PANEL................................................................................................................10 FIGURE 8 - POWER AMP MODULE, FRONT PANEL..........................................................................................................10 FIGURE 9 - SPEAKER PANEL..........................................................................................................................................11 FIGURE 10 - DUAL POWER SUPPLY REAR CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................11 FIGURE 11 - BDLCPD MEMBRANE SWITCHES ...............................................................................................................12 FIGURE 12 - RF INDICATORS.........................................................................................................................................14 FIGURE 13 - RS-232 PORT LED INDICATORS ...............................................................................................................15 FIGURE 14 - ALARMS LED INDICATORS ....................................................................................................................15 FIGURE 15 - BDLCPD Y CABLE AND PINOUT ................................................................................................................17 FIGURE 16 - WINRIS MAIN SCREEN..............................................................................................................................19 FIGURE 17 - SELECT PORT DIALOG WINDOW .............................................................................................................20 FIGURE 18 - SERIES I RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ..............................................................................................30 FIGURE 19 - SERIES I CHANNEL INFORMATION.............................................................................................................31 FIGURE 20 - CHANNEL SELECTION VIA INTERNAL DIP SWITCHES.................................................................................33 FIGURE 21 - T885 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROL LOCATION...........................................................................................39 FIGURE 22 - T881 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION ...........................................................................................40 FIGURE 23 - RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ............................................................................................................42 FIGURE 24 - RECEIVER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN.............................................................................................42 FIGURE 25 - EXCITER SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN..................................................................................................43 FIGURE 26 - EXCITER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN ...............................................................................................43 FIGURE 27 - BACKPLANE DIP SWITCHES EXAMPLE - CHANNEL 5 SELECTED ................................................................44 FIGURE 28 - T855 AND T885, RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM .........................................................................................47 FIGURE 29 - T835, RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM..........................................................................................................48 FIGURE 30 T800-50-0001 BACKPLANE AND TEST PINS LOCATION.............................................................................48 FIGURE 31 - T859 TUNING SETTINGS ...........................................................................................................................52 120 20170-202 iv ParagonPD Technical Manual FIGURE 32 - T855 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .......................................................................................53 FIGURE 33 - T857 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATIONS........................................................................................54 FIGURE 34 - T835 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .......................................................................................55 FIGURE 35 - T837 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .........................................................................................56 TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY LEDS INDICATIONS ..............................................................................................................7 TABLE 2- TX MODE SELECTION LEDS INDICATIONS ....................................................................................................13 TABLE 3 - TEST TRANSMISSIONS..................................................................................................................................13 TABLE 4 - RS-232 LED FUNCTION SELECTION SEQUENCE ..........................................................................................14 TABLE 5 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS ...............................................................................................................................16 TABLE 6 - DTE PORT 9-PIN FUNTIONS..........................................................................................................................16 TABLE 7 - DTE PORT 25-PIN FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................16 TABLE 8 CARRIER DEVIATIONS FOR TONE OR DATA MODULATION ...........................................................................23 TABLE 9 - KEY LATCH INDICATIONS .............................................................................................................................24 TABLE 10 - CHECKLIST A (AFTER INSTALLATION) ........................................................................................................26 TABLE 11 - CHECKLIST B (GENERAL) ..........................................................................................................................27 120 20170-202 v ParagonPD Technical Manual WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION History Preliminary Version 2.02: November 2001 First release of xRC4FSK modulation model for the 800MHz model, with on-air speeds of 32.0 Kbps that accommodate 25.0 kHz channel spac-

ing. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Section 1.5.2 Model Designation

- Table 3 Test transmissions

- Table 8 Carrier Deviations for tone or data modulation.

- Table 10 Checklist B (General)

- Section 7 Specifications Preliminary Version 2.01HC: May 2001 Version shipped only to FCC Preliminary Version 2.01: May 2001 First release of SRRC4FSK HC modulation model for the 800MHz model, with on-air speeds of 16.0 and 14.4 Kbps that accommodate 12.5 kHz channel spacing. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Section 1.5.2 Model Designation

- Table 3 Test transmissions

- Table 10 Checklist B (General)

- Section 7 Specifications Clarification of fuse type used, section 2.3.1 Addition of Figures 36 (T885) and 37 (T881) Tuning Locations and added tuning instructions to Section 6. Version 2.0: May 2001 First release covering, in addition to the DGFSK model, the SRRC4FSK modulated model with speeds of up to 25.6 Kbps. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Section 1.5.2 Model Designation

- Table 3 Test transmissions This version introduces the following changes:

- Section 1.6 Radio Series I or II:

120 20170-202 vi ParagonPD Technical Manual

- Revised description

- Section 2.3 Electrical:

- Clarification of amperage requirement

- Figure 4 BDLCPD, rear view. Re-tracing of top fan wiring to cor-

respond to factory routing.

- Section 3.1.1 Receiver:

- Endnote added to clarify troubleshooting characteristic.

- Section 3.1.1.5 Dual Power Supply, clarification of OL (over-

load) LED function.

- Figure 10 Dual Power Supply Rear Connection corrected to corre-

spond to the voltage printed on the connector label.

- Section 4 WinRIS program detailed.

- Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation. Now in-

corporates in a single table the details previously available as Table 8 and Table 10.

- Table 10 Checklist B, (General), steps 6 and 7 revised to merge values for the two models.

- Table 11 Checklist B, (Paragon/PD) steps 6,7 and 10 revised

- Figure 20 Channel Selection via internal DIP switches, clari-

fies the use of switch 8.

- Section 6.2.3.5 and 6.4.3.5 Exciter Power Output correction of output power to 4 Watts.

- Figure 21 T885 Receiver tuning control location, clarification of RSSI test point location.

- Section 7 Specifications:

- Rx and Tx Current Consumption values revised.

- Base Station Power Consumption specification added. Supersedes Paragon/PD Addendum 124 20170-001a, dated February 2001. Supersedes Technical Support Bulletin TSB ATL007, dated 17 April, 2001 and titled New Deviation Settings for 800MHz GeminiPD and Para-

gonPD with 4 level FSK Modulation. Version 1.0: May 2000 First released version, DGFSK modulated model, and speeds up to 19200 b/s. 120 20170-202 vii ParagonPD Technical Manual Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Asynchronous AVL BDLCPD DBA DCE DTE GeminiPD Network Speed ParagonPD Parallel Decode Refarming Information that can be sent at random times, and not synchronized to a clock. Transmission characters begin with a start bit and end with a stop bit. Automatic Vehicle Location. Optional feature that involves using GPS (Global Positioning System) signals from the mobile unit by the Host PC. Base Station Data Link Controller (PD = Parallel decode). An async radiomo-

dem designed to control the base station in mobile systems. A component of ParagonPD. Dataradios Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation protocol designed for short-

inquiry/long response applications such as dispatch systems. Latest enhance-

ments include support for occasional long messages inbound, and for Out-of-

Band data for AVL reports with no extra overhead. Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. High specs mobile radiomodem. (PD = Parallel Decode) This is the bit rate on the RF link between units. Could be different from COM port baud rate. Factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station using Parallel Decode tech-

nology. Used in VIS mobile networks. Technology featuring dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments. FCCs strategy for using the radio spectrum more efficiently to meet future communications requirements. Radio Assembly Radio modules used in ParagonPD and available in two distinct series depending RS-232 VIS WinRIS on radios frequency band. Industrystandard interface for serial data transfer. Vehicular Information Solutions. Dataradios name for a series of products spe-

cially designed for mobile data. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests, unit con-

figuration and troubleshooting. 120 20170-202 viii ParagonPD Technical Manual 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the setting up, operation, testing and trouble-

shooting of the DATARADIO ParagonPD radio-modem base station. 1.1 Intended Audience This document is intended for engineering, in-

stallation, and maintenance personnel. is a 1.2 General Description ParagonPD product factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station used in mobile networks and is designed specifically to fit the needs of vehicular applications. It features dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environ-

ments. When used with Dataradios state-of-the-art GeminiPD mobile data solution, the system delivers unequaled high-speed data performance and unmatched effective throughput. All ParagonPD models are supplied in a rack-

mount configuration that includes:

A ParagonPD Radio assembly A contemporary, high-speed Dataradio Base Station Data Link Controller

(BDLCPD). ParagonPD units do not include the optional wire line modem(s). Duplexer and backup power units are custom furnished items. The laptop PC and its application software are user-supplied items. 1.2.1 Features:

Dual receivers Parallel Decode technology SRRC4FSK modulation model capable of 32000, 25600 and 19200 b/s in 25 kHz channel spacing and 16000 and 14400 b/s in 12.5 kHz channel spacing. DGFSK modulation model capable of 19200 and 16000 b/s in 25 kHz channel spacing and 9600 b/s in 12.5 kHz channel spacing. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance and fewer retries Available in VHF, UHF and 800 MHz radio bands Power output of 20W to 70W for ParagonPDs 800 MHz and of 20W to 100W for VHF and UHF Supports high-efficiency Dataradio DBA over-the-air protocol Over-the-air compatible with MobilPac/R DGFSK and SRRC4FSK modulated Gem-

iniPD mobile products *

Modular design in a rugged die-cast alumi-

num chassis Full-duplex operation ParagonPD units are factory-configured based on each customers network system requirements Flash programmable firmware upgradabil-

ity.

* Networks must use common modulation scheme, bit and baud rates 120 20170-202 1 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

departments DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by con-

tacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is usually not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of individual radio modules. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair logic, modem boards and ra-

dio modules. Contact Technical Support for service informa-

tion before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authoriza-

tion) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should a question arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be re-

paired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the war-

ranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Support. 120 20170-202 2 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.5.2 Model Designation To correctly identify your ParagonPD unit, check its catalog number label located on the rear of the BDLCPD adjacent to the power connector. The first four digits designate the model:

- BDDD = ParagonPD (DGFSK)

- BDD4 = ParagonPD (xRC4FSK) The next three digits designate the Band used:

83X = VHF, 100W 85X = UHF, 100W 88X = 800 MHz, 70W 1 = 136 156 MHz 2 = 148 174 MHz The next digit designates the RF band of opera-

tion:

For the 83X band:

For the 85X band:

For the 88X band:

1 = 400 440 MHz 2 = 440 480 MHz 3 = 480 520 MHz 1 = 800 880 MHz (RX 850 870 MHz (TX) 2 = 870 960 MHz (RX)

(TX, 5W only) The next digit designates the RF Bandwidth used:

For the 83X band:

0 = 25 kHz full channel, 2.5 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 2.5 ppm*

6 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 2.0 ppm* (U.S. model only) 0 = 25 kHz full channel, 1 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 1 ppm*

For the 85X band:

For the 88X band:

0 = 25 kHz full channel, 1.5 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 1.5 ppm*

* denotes Frequency Stability The next digit designates the transmitter power:

005 = 5 watt transmitter 070 = 70 watt transmitter (850-870 MHz only) 100 = 100 watt transmitter

The next and last digit designates the Power Source:

0 = Power supply deleted on order 2 = heavy-duty 120 VAC dual supplies 1.6 Radio Series I or II System-engineered installations use one of two complements of ParagonPD radio modules. To identify the radio series model, check the part number on the manufacturers label at the back of the Receiver and Exciter:

- T8nn-nn identifies a Series I model.

- T8nn-nn-nnnn identifies a Series II model. where n denotes a number. Examples:

- T881-10 is a Series I Exciter (850870 MHz)

- T881-10-0000 is a Series II Exciter (850870 MHz) They are assembled on a common chassis:

Series I models:

- Frequency programming 800 MHz frequency range radios is done via EPROM. (This model does not use the pro-

gramming port of Series II models). Series I models will not be available after the Series II models receive FCCs and ICs approvals. Series II models:

- VHF and UHF frequency range radios. The 800MHz Series II models are pending FCC

& IC approvals.

- Frequency programming is done using soft-

ware via a programming port located on the speaker front panel. 120 20170-202 3 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.7 Packaging 2. Installation Each ParagonPD product normally leaves the factory packaged as follows:

A Series I or II Dataradio base station Ra-

dio assembly A dual power supply assembly A Dataradio BDLCPD model A Radio Interface Cable to link the Radio assembly to the BDLCPD:

18-inch long Y cable; DB-25 female to dual DB-25 female (p/n 730 03374-

102) for connection between backplane PCBs and BDLCPD. One standard seven-foot 120VAC power cord Two DC power cables to connect the radio assembly to the dual power supply assem-

bly. Courtesy small parts kit Frequently, ParagonPD product components are field-assembled prior to customer delivery. The cabinetry may then be supplied in one of several custom rack-mount configurations that may also include fan, backhaul modems, duplexer/filters/combiners, and ancillary equipment. If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immedi-

ately. 2.1 Overview The cabinet and rack-mount housing the Para-

gonPDs Radio assembly and the BDLCPD is generally installed in a sheltered facility. Occa-

sionally located adjacent to the nerve center of the users network, it is often located near tower sites or at remote locations where it operates unattended. Furnishings needed include power, cabling and installation of antenna, landline or microwave modem and host PC or portable computer. De-

tails of these are outside the scope of this man-

ual. This manual covers the radio assembly and the BDLCPD that includes the modem. 2.2 Location Be sure to place the ParagonPD in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in trouble-

shooting) Access to the antenna connector and to the back connectors is possible without remov-

ing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling. 2.3 Electrical Standard 120 VAC electrical power is required. It should be capable of providing at least 10A to power ParagonPD (<6A) and ancillary equip-

ment. 120 20170-202 4 ParagonPD Technical Manual Air Flow Receiv er E xc ellence in R adio C ommunic at ions Receiv er Exciter Pow er Amp lifi er S peaker Panel Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Line Le vel Supply Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute Supply L ow Forw ard P ower Hi gh Re ver se Power Pow er Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Car ri er O n Line Le vel Supply Supply Line Sensitivi ty Microphone Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 OFF p rogra mmin g po rt Dual Power Supply Module OL Stby On Power OL Stby On Power Figure 1 Typical radio and power supply assemblies, front view T800 II Slimline CM FR FT RD TD 1 3 2 RS-232 CK LM LF RM UF ALARMS PF1 RES ET S-3 CS T X RX RF Figure 2 - BDLCPD, front view 120 20170-202 5 ParagonPD Technical Manual REAR VIEW Air Flow FAN _ +

CN 2 SK5 PL1 PL1 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 2 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 1 GND DC INPUT 2 SE U F F U S E FUSE E S U F FU S E FUSE FUSE 2 FUSE 1 DC INPUT 1 13.8 VDC 2 AMPS MAX

T808-10-00CA GND T807-10-00CA GND Figure 3 Typical radio and power supplies assembly, rear view Use only with a 250 V fu se Emp loyer uniquement av ec un fu sible de 250 V D EV. 3 R S-232 D EV. 2 R S-232 D EV. 1 R S-232 D EV. 6 DIG. I/O EX T. R AD IO/TE ST DEV. 5 RS-232 DEV. 4 RS-232 Figure 4 - BDLCPD, rear view 120 20170-202 6 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.3.1 Radio Assembly Power Referring to Figure 3, the Radio assembly unit receives two separate 13.8 VDC power inputs from a T800 Slimline dual power supply typi-

cally rack-mounted right below the main assem-

bly radio chassis. The T800 is made up of two separate power supply units joined in a single chassis:

A T807 using convection cooling is rated up to 15A at 13.8VDC. It supplies all the radio modules other than the Power Amplifier. A T808 using convection and fan cooling is rated up to 25A at 13.8VDC. It supplies only the Power Amplifier module. Normally used at room ambient temperatures, they can operate within specifications over a range of 10 to +60 C. Note: Internal over-temperature protection shuts down the main transformer above 105 degrees Celsius. Both power supply modules are internally con-

nected to ground via their individual, rear-

connected, seven-foot standard 120 VAC power cords. Nevertheless, each requires a separate secure electrical ground connection. Individual grounding tabs are provided next to the power connectors. Similarly, the Radio Assembly chassis requires a secure ground connection. A threaded grounding binding post fitted with a knurled binding-nut is provided on the chassis next to DC input 2. Separate grounding leads with appropriate con-

nectors are supplied (either in the courtesy small-parts kit or with one end fastened to the equipment. A- For each of the power supply modules:

1. Fit one end of the grounding leads push-on connector onto the grounding tab. B- For the Radio Assembly chassis:

1. Install the grounding leads lug over the binding post and firmly hand-

tighten the binding-nut. For both A and B 2. Fit the slotted connector (on the other end of each of the grounding connector) under a conveniently located screw on the rack frame or other support surface. Scrape away paint if needed to ensure clean contact. 3. Apply anti-corrosion compound where paint scraping was done. 4. Ensure by testing continuity that a se-

cure electrical and mechanical connec-

tion is achieved. If a DC rail (0V) is installed as part of the sys-

tem, the grounding leads may alternatively be fitted to the rail terminal. Caution:

Improper grounding between power supply case and rack frame may result in harmful voltage potentials and/or miscellaneous power supply switching noise problems in both receivers and transmitter. Press both red power buttons located on the front of the module to have complete power distribution to the Radio assembly. The power supply front panel LEDs indications are:

Table 1 - Power Supply LEDs Indications LED On Stby OL Color Green Red Steady Red Indication Power enabled *

Power disabled *

Current Overload Flashing green and red respectively On & OL

* To remove voltage from the power supply PCB, discon-

nect the main power cords. Over voltage For LEDs descriptions, see section 3.2.1.2 The Radio assembly is fused at the rear of the chassis:

Fuse 1 is a 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 10A Fuse 2 is a 32-volt MDL (slow-blow) 30A 120 20170-202 7 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.3.2 BDLCPD assembly Power The BDLCPD assembly uses a standard 120 VAC power cord. Plug this cord to the rear power outlet shown in Figure 6. To check or install a fuse:

1. Open the slide-out fuse drawer located be-

low the power connector. 2. Use a fine bladed screwdriver or a knife blade and gently pry open. 3. Hold the fuse support in one hand and with the other, lift the center plastic retainer until it releases the fuse sliding base. 4. Replace or install a 250V, 2A fuse. 5. To complete the procedure, push the sliding fuse base until it snaps under the retainer. 6. Re-insert the fuse drawer in its housing and push until it is fully seated and closed. When ready to apply power, use the ON-OFF toggle power switch adjacent to the power con-

nector. ON-OFF Switch 120VAC Connector Fuse Slide-out Drawer Use only with a 250 V fuse Employer uniquement av ec un fusible de 250 V Figure 5 - BDLCPDs rear connection, switch and fuse 2.4 Antenna 2.4.1 Overview ParagonPD commonly uses three antennas (one transmit and two receive) unless a duplexer is used with one of the receive antennas; then only two antennas would be needed. They should be mounted according to any guidelines supplied with the antennas. For antennas placement and spacing, consult System Engineering. 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection 1- Route good quality 50-ohm double-shielded coaxial cable(s) (e.g. RG-214 or Heliax) from the selected antenna position(s) to the ParagonPD Radio assembly. 2- Terminate the RX-1 and RX-2 cable ends at the Receiver modules rear position with an N-type connector. 3- Similarly, terminate the TX cable end at the Power Amps module rear position with an N-type connector. Caution:

When terminating RF cables use brand-name crimping tools

(such as AMP, Jensen, Crimp-

Master, etc) of the correct size for the cable and type of connector used. Common pliers are NOT ac-

ceptable. 2.5 Completing the physical Installation. ParagonPD products are factory-configured to users requirements and are shipped ready to run. After new installations:

Re-check that all connections are secure on radio and BDLCPD assemblies (antennas, PC, power cords etc.) Check that fuses are inserted. Turn both BDLCPD and radio power ON. You are now ready to check for normal opera-

tion and to run the Windows Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trou-

ble-shooting. Any change(s) to the settings must be done via files saved on diskette and loaded into the unit using the WinRIS program. 120 20170-202 8 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.6 Checking out Normal Operation 1- Check that power is applied. 2- Check Radio assembly lights for proper op-

eration as per section 3.1.1 3- Check for proper operation of the BDLCPDs LEDs as per section 3.2.1.2. 4- Using the WinRIS program (described in section 4), and an in-line wattmeter, check the forward & reflected power to confirm antenna installations. 5- Using the WinRIS, check the RF link with a mobile station that can be heard, by using the WinRIS Ping feature. See section 4.4.5.5 If user application and a mobile station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 3. Operating Description 3.1 Radio Assembly The Radio assembly component of each Paragon product is made up of high performance synthe-

sized radio base station designed for single op-

eration. Referring to Figure 1 on page 5, the Ra-

dio Assemblys modules are commonly installed in a standard, 19-inch wide rack frame. 3.1.1 Front panels The complement of modules is identical for:

Series I, (800 MHz model) and Series II, (VHF and UHF models)*

* 800 MHz models will be available as Series II at a future date) 2 Receivers Exciter Power Amplifier Speaker panel Dual Power Supply Receiver module 3.1.1.1 The RX1 and RX2 receivers use identical front panel controls and indicators. These are:

Receiver Gating Sensitivity Gate Line Level Supply Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute Gating Sensitivity Gate LED Line Level Monitor Volume Monitor Mute On - Off Figure 6 - Receiver module front panel Gating Sensitivity - sets the RF signal level required to open the mute gate and allow audio to pass to the speaker1. Gate LED - indicates the status of the mute circuit. It is lit when a signal above the mute threshold is received1. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Line Level - Not used Monitor Volume - The audio output delivers up to one watt to the speaker. Always set 1 Gating Sensitivity and Gate LED are not functionally used except to allow listening to in-

coming receptions as a trouble-shooting aid. Depending on the sensitivity adjustment, the Gate LED lights and a relay can be heard on in-

coming RF signals. 120 20170-202 9 ParagonPD Technical Manual volume knob to minimum when not in use to reduce current consumption. Monitor Mute Switch - opens the mute, al-

lowing continuous monitoring of the audio signal. On = audio muted Exciter module 3.1.1.2 The Exciters front panel controls and indicators are:

Exciter Carrier On Supply Line Sensitivity Microphone Carrier Switch On LED Supply LED Line Sensitivity Microphone Socket Figure 7 - Exciter module, front panel Carrier Switch - momentarily keys the transmitter ON while pressed (used for test purposes only). On LED - is lit when transmitting Line Sensitivity not used. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Microphone Socket not used. 3.1.1.3 The Power Amp front panel and indicators are:

Power Amp module P o w e r A m plifier Supply LED S up ply Low Forward Power High Rev erse Power Po w e r Low Forward Power LED High Reverse Power LED Power Adjustment Figure 8 - Power Amp module, front panel Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Low Forward Power LED - is lit when for-

ward power is below the level set, normally 80% of nominal forward power. High Reverse Power LED - is lit when high reverse power is detected (e.g. VSWR=

3:1). Power - sets the PA output power:

- VHF & UHF: 20 100 Watts

800: 20-70 Watts Speaker panel 3.1.1.4 Referring to Figure 9, the speaker panel is fitted with a 4 speaker. Both series of radio assemblies share the same front panel fitted with an RJ11 connector. This connector is used to allow programming the ra-

dio from the front of the unit via a programming lead. This feature is exclusive to the Series II modules. 120 20170-202 10 ParagonPD Technical Manual If the speaker panel needs to be removed, a mir-

ror programming port connector is provided on both backplanes. Programming for Series I 800MHz units is done via EPROM and is detailed in section 6.1. The RJ11 front port is covered (not used). S peaker Panel SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 O FF programm ing p ort Not Used with 800 MHz Series I model Figure 9 - Speaker panel 3.1.1.5 Dual Power Supply module The Dual Power Supply module is made up of two separate power supply units coupled in a single chassis. Refer to Table 1 on page 7 for tabular listing of power supply LEDs indicators. Refer to Figure 1 for the front panel LED lay-

out. This module has:

Two Power red-colored pushbutton switches - Push in for ON and release out for OFF. Control complete power distribu-

tion to the Radio assembly Two ON LEDs - light green when push button(s) is (are) ON; DC power is distrib-

uted to radio modules. Flash green in con-

junction with the OL LED (flashing red) when an over voltage condition is present. Two Stby- Standby voltage LED, lights red when push button is off; AC power is applied but DC is not distributed to radio modules. To remove presence of voltage, disconnect both power cords. Two OL LEDs - Monitor current over-

load, light steady red when supply exceeds current limit set; nominally 25Amps (T808 model). Flashes red in conjunction with the ON LED (flashing green) when an over voltage condition is present. Rear Connections 3.1.1.5.1 Referring to Figure 10, (convection-cooled model shown; fan-cooled model not illustrated), the rear connections for each of the power sup-

ply are:

Fail Alarm Off: Power supply OK; approx. +Vout

(via 1k resistor - typ. 13.8V). ON: Power supply failure; approx. -

Vout (via 11k resistors - typ. 0V)

+ Remote Not used for Paragon

- Sense Not used for Paragon

-VE main ground (0V)

+13.8V Mains DC output supply 1 5 A M a x

. 1 3

. 8 V O u t p u t F a i l l A a r m R e m o t e S e n s e

Figure 10 - Dual Power Supply rear connections Note: more power supply installation details are covered in section 2.3.1 3.1.2 Radio Assembly, rear panel Backplane PCB 3.1.2.1 Referring to Figure 3, two main backplanes are used. Their main components are:

RJ11 connector Mirrors the one on the front of the Speaker panel (series connected 120 20170-202 11 ParagonPD Technical Manual to both backplanes). Used for programming the Radio Assembly whenever the speaker panel has been removed. This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Series I models programming is done externally via EPROMs. DB-25M plug at PL1 (one side of the Y cable on each PCB) used to supply the re-

ceive signal to the BDLCPDs single EXT.RADIO/TEST DB-25F plug. Two channel-select DIP switches (SW1 and SW2) This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Cooling fan driver CN2 located on back-

plane connects to the horizontally-mounted fan on top of the Radio assembly and acti-

vated by BDLCs PTT signal. Coaxial relay driver not used. 3.2 BDLCPD The rack-mounted BDLCPD is housed in a steel case. It has no user serviceable parts. Units configuration flash memory

(EEPROM). is stored in 3.2.1 BDLCPD Front panel Referring to Figure 2, the front panel of the BDLCPD has two cutouts across its length. A- The left cutout groups the units type label and ten LED indicators:

The S3 label designates the BDLCPD as a three Serial-port model

(Ports 4 and 5 are reserved for future use) The RF group of 3 LEDs The RS-232 group of 5 LEDs A single CK LED The ALARMS group of 4 LEDs B- The right cutout groups two tactile (mem-

brane) switches (PF1 and RESET). Front Switches 3.2.1.1 Referring to Figure 11, the BDLCPD uses two membrane-type switches labeled:

RESET PF 1 These switches indicate contact by emitting a short BEEP tone when pressed. PF1 RESET Figure 11 - BDLCPD membrane switches Reset 3.2.1.1.1 Pressing Reset produces the same result as pow-

ering OFF and ON again. It restarts the micro-

processor, the peripherals and invokes the on-

board diagnostics. BDLCPDs radio modules internal flash-memories are read and their val-

ues are loaded in system SRAM CPU flash-

memory. Normally, pressing Reset results in one short BEEP tone followed by all LEDs coming ON for about four seconds. Then, the LEDs flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds indi-

cating diagnostics are in progress. At the end of this period, all LEDs should be OFF except CK that should flash about six to eight times per second. Expect an additional two seconds delay for CK to start flashing and the UF indicator to come ON if the radio assembly is not connected or not powered (see section 3.2.1.2.4 for Alarm de-

tails). PF 1 3.2.1.1.2 PF 1 is a multi-function switch:

It clears LED error indications It initiates test transmissions It sets the function of the RS-232 LEDs 120 20170-202 12 ParagonPD Technical Manual Clearing Errors 3.2.1.1.2.1 Major and minor error LED indications remain lit on the front panel until:

The unit is RESET The unit is powered OFF and ON again PF 1 is pressed The PF 1 switch can be pressed at any time to clear an error display without affecting normal operations. Test Transmissions 3.2.1.1.2.2 To select a pattern and begin transmission, start by pressing and holding PF1. It beeps once, all five RS232 LEDs light; listen for a second beep followed by a third beep. After two seconds, the unit beeps and goes in TX Select mode with only the three rightmost RS-232 LEDs now used as selection indicators. Only release PF1 after the third beep. Following release:

Start of selection must be made within two seconds. If not, the unit will default to pat-

tern one and start test transmitting. PF1 may be pressed more than once. The number of times it is pressed determines the type of pattern that will be transmitted ac-

cording to Table 3. Each pressing of PF1 extends the two-

second timer. The three rightmost RS-232 LEDs display are used to indicate TX mode selection as shown in Table 2. Table 2- TX mode selection LEDs indications TX pattern selected Binary TX mode LED indications FT LED RD LED TD LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Off Off Off On On On On Off On On Off Off On On On Off On Off On Off On Once the type of transmission is selected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. Automatically, the BDLCPD turns its transmitter ON, sends the selected test pattern for 55 seconds and turns its transmitter OFF. The TX LED in the RF group of indicators lights in red while test transmitting. Pressing PF1 while the 55 seconds test is in progress stops the test. At the end of test transmission, BDLCPD opera-

tion returns to normal and the RX LED lights in green (monitoring normal transmitter activity). Table 3 - Test Transmissions

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DGFSK ParagonPD 9600 b/s 16000 b/s 19200 b/s 2400 Hz Dotting 4000 Hz Dotting 4800 Hz Dotting 4800 Hz 8000 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz Square 100 Hz Square 100 Hz Square wave wave wave Random data Random data Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustment tone Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustment tone Adjustment tone SRRC4FSK ParagonPD 32000 b/s 4000 Hz Dotting*

Do not use 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave 25600 b/s 3200 Hz Dotting*

Do not use 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave 19200 b/s 2400 Hz Dotting*

Do not use 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave 16000 b/s 2000 Hz Dotting*

Do not use 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave 14400 b/s 1800 Hz Dotting*

Do not use 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Adj. tone Adj. tone Adj, tone Adj, tone Adj, tone

* Dotting with reduced amplitude Notes:

For DGFSK models, a dotting pattern consists of an alternating series of bits. For the SRRC4FSK models, only the lowest-level symbols modulation is used. The square wave is used to check transmitter low frequency balance. The 1000 Hz sine can be used for transmitter distor-

tion measurements. Pattern 6 produces a transmission of approximately 55 seconds followed by about 55 seconds of silence. Initial transmission in a sequence may be shorter than 55 seconds. TX LED stays steadily red for dura-

tion of the test. Press PF1 to terminate beacon mode. 120 20170-202 13 ParagonPD Technical Manual 3.2.1.1.2.3 RS-232 LED Function Selection The PF 1 button is used to select the RS-232 display mode as follows:

If pressed ONCE (do not hold pressed):

- Clears Alarm indications

- CK LED stops flashing for 2 seconds

- During this time, one or all of the RS-232 numbered LEDs (see Figure 13) will light. If one LED lights, it denotes the port to which the subsequent display applies. If all numbered LEDs light, it denotes that the normal 3-port display mode is active. The selected display remains active un-

til manually changed or until RESET is pressed or until power up. Table 4 - RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) TX LED in RF group lights with any and all transmission TX LED in RF group only lights with an ACK or DATA transmission If, during the 2 seconds period that CK is not flashing, PF 1 is pressed a second time, the LED functions will advance one step from top to bottom through the available options in the order shown in Table 4. PF 1 may be pressed repeatedly during the 2 second period (extended with each press) to advance to the desired numbered LED function option. Once the desired RS-232 LED function is se-

lected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. The BDLCPD returns to nor-

mal operation using the newly selected display. 3.2.1.2 LEDs and Indications LEDs are used to indicate the operation status of the BDLCPD. Although capable of displaying three colors, only the green and red colors are used for the BDLCPD. They are grouped by their function:

RF Group, displays radio channel status in green RS-232 Group, displays serial port status in green except the TX LED that also uses red ALARM Group, displays fault status in red Radio Network Indicators 3.2.1.2.1 The Radio Network LEDs are useful when trou-

bleshooting as an indication of network activity. It can help isolate transmission problems. C S R X T X R F Figure 12 - RF indicators CS RX TX Carrier Sense - Steady light indicates that an incoming radio data signal is being detected by the DSP modem. CS signal is not user-adjustable. Receive Data Flashing light indicates unit is internally receiving data from the radio network. Transmitter ON blinks green indicates

(depending on display mode selected):

That a data packet or ACK (packet acknowledgment) is being trans-

mitted. That an idle packet, data packet or ACK is being sent. Test transmis-

sion display is done in red. RS-232 Port Indicators 3.2.1.2.2 The RS-232 LEDs normally indicate port activ-

ity on the port selected. See section 3.2.1.1.2.3 above for instructions for selecting display mode. 120 20170-202 14 ParagonPD Technical Manual C M 1 F R F T R D 3 2 R S -232 T D Figure 13 - RS-232 Port LED indicators FR CM Command Mode - LED lights and re-

mains lit while the selected port is ac-

cessing the Command Processor. It lights ON and OFF while being config-

ured. Flow Control on Receive - the BDLCPD has received a flow control signal from the device connected to it. When it lights, BDLCPD has stopped sending data to the DTE. When LED goes out, the port terminal is again ready to re-

ceive data. Flow Control on Transmit - the BDLCPD has sent a flow control signal to the DTE asking it to stop sending data. The LED remains lit as long as the terminal is being held off. FT RD TD Receive Data - when lit, it shows that the Receive Data pin 3 on the RS-232 interface connector is active. Since all BDLCPD are configured as DCE, it means that the DTE is receiving data from the BDLCPD. Transmit Data - shows the status of Transmit Data pin 2 of the RS-232 in-

terface. When lit, the DTE is sending data to the BDLCPD. 3.2.1.2.3 CK Check and Power Check:

Normally flashing rapidly (about 6 cps), indicates microprocessors are working correctly and power is applied. Not flashing indicates unit is not func-

tioning. Blinking slowly (1 cps), indicates the parameters contents of the flash memory have been corrupted. The unit automati-

cally loads its set of factory default pa-

rameters and starts beeping at 20 sec-

onds intervals. May also initialization has occurred indicate DSP-modem re-

Alarm Indicators 3.2.1.2.4 All alarm conditions will cause the BDLCPD to light one or more of the LED indicators. LEDs remain ON when lit until cleared by either pressing PF 1 (without affecting operation of the unit) or RESET (cycling unit OFF and ON). LM RM LF UF ALARMS Figure 14 - ALARMS LED indicators LM Local Minor Alarm - when lit, indicates the presence of any of the following mi-

nor faults:

- Parity, framing or overrun error at any RS-232 port.

- Out of buffers. No memory available to accept data from a local terminal de-

vice. Usually denotes a flow control problem.

- Flash memory error. At power-up or reset, the unit detected a change in non-

volatile memory. RM Remote Minor Alarm - when lit, indi-

cates any of the Local Minor Alarm listed above have taken place at the re-

mote end of the link (i.e. the mobile the local base station is currently communi-

cating with). It will also light when a protocol error has been detected on the network. In a network using the Host Link Ac-

tive (MSC) feature, the RM LED, flashing in-sync with the CK LED, indi-

down. cates link that the is 120 20170-202 15 ParagonPD Technical Manual UF LF Link Failure - when lit, indi-

cates that the base station fails to re-

ceive an ACK for a packet sent and for all subsequent retries. Some data has possibly been lost. LF is not functional if all active ports are set to NAR mode. Link fails are inevitable during normal operation (mobiles temporarily out of range, in a tunnel, parked in a dead spot, etc.). A lit LF LED is not normally cause for concern. Unit Failure - when lit, the unit requires attention:

- The BDLCPD is not operable;

It may indicate detection of a system software error trap.

- The BDLCPD is operable;

Indicates that on power-up, invalid data was detected in the serial EEPROM chip (located in the radio modules). It may also indicate that connection to the radio modules is incorrect or that radio power is not applied. The LM, RM and UF alarms also sound a beep when a fault occurs. The LF alarm is silent. 3.2.2 BDLCPD Rear panel Referring to Figure 4, the rear panel of the BDLCPD has the following set of chassis con-

nectors:

Four DE-9F connectors:

DEV2 - usually connected to Datara-

dios WinRIS program (DMP/Setup 19200). Can also be used with special users application such as telephone modem. Note: connection to a tele-

phone requires the use of a DCE Cross-

over cable. DEV3 - Dedicated (9600) DEV4 and DEV5 - not used One DB-25F connector

- DEV1 - Connects to users application. a) DMP 19200 for single-site installa-

tions b) MSCP 19200 for multi-site installa-

tions One DA-15M connector:

- DEV6 Digital I/O - not used One DB-25M connector:

- EXT RADIO/TEST - connects to the Radio assembly (see Figure 15) Signal Levels 3.2.2.1 In the description of data signals in Table 7, the following conventions are used:

Table 5 - RS-232 Signal levels Term ON OFF Alternates Signal level Asserted, spacing

+3 to +15 V Dropped, marking

-3 to -15 V 3.2.2.2 Pin Functions Table 6 - DTE Port 9-pin funtions DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function (RS-232 signal levels) DCD from ParagonPD, normally asserted RXD data from ParagonPD TXD data to ParagonPD DTR to ParagonPD, handshaking Ground DSR from ParagonPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to ParagonPD, handshaking CTS from ParagonPD, handshaking Reserved Table 7 - DTE Port 25-pin functions DB-25F pin #

1 and 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 20 Function (RS-232 signal levels) PD PD PD Ground TXD data to BDLC RXD data from BDLC RTS to BDLC CTS from BDLC DSR from BDLC DCD from BDLC RI - from BDLC PD DTR to BDLC PD PD PD

, must be asserted PD

, handshaking

, always +8V

, always asserted

, always 8V

, handshaking We recommend the use of shielded 9-wire or 25-wire cables with all pins connected. Dataradio recommends the use of secure (i.e. password protected and/or dial-back) modems in any installation where dialup access is provided. 120 20170-202 16 ParagonPD Technical Manual YEL LOW G RAY GREEN B LUE O RANGE B LACK WHITE SHIELD B RO WN VIOLE T RED B LACK SHIELD BDLC D212 DB-25 FEM ALE (P8) TXA 1 8 EXT IO _OUT1 1 0 EXTIO_IN1 2 2 RXA ( 1) RSSI (1 ) P TT G RO UND (1) EXT IO _OUT3 EXTIO_IN3 SHIELD RXA ( 2) RSSI (2 ) 3 1 6 6 4 7 2 4 1 7 1 1 4 EXT IO _OUT2 9 EXTIO_IN2 2 3 G RO UND (2) 2 SHIELD 1 5 TO BDLC 730-03374-102 BACKPLANE 1 / RX 1 & EXC ITER DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 1 1 TXA (fr om SK 3 pin 8) 1) 1 RX 1 E EPROM (from S K1 pin 1 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 5 TX KEY (fro m SK3 pi n 1 3) 1 3 G RO UND 5

) TX EE PROM (fr om SK 3 p in 1) BACKPLANE 2 / RX 2 DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 RX 2 EEPROM (fr om SK 1 pin 1) 1 3 GROUND L E F T ( R X 1 -Ex) RIGHT (RX2) 18.00"

Figure 15 - BDLCPD Y cable and pinout Important note:

The aggregate total baud rate for all active ports on a BDLCPD must not exceed 30,000 for Para-

gonPD. Sustained simultaneous operation on devices 1 and 3, using the factory settings for these ports, may result in lost characters. Using the factory settings, device 3 is intended only for use during configuration and should not be used simultaneously with data traffic on device 1. For special user application done while the BDLCPD is active, use either device 2, or set device 3 to 2400 bauds. 120 20170-202 17 ParagonPD Technical Manual 4. WinRIS program The Windows Radio Installation Software

(WinRIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot ParagonPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field configuring of units

(Requires intervention with technical sup-

port). To run the program, you will need:

- A PC or portable computer running a 32-bit MS-Windows application:

Win ME Win2000 Win NT Win 9x

(For Win 95, if COMCTL32.DLL has been updated to the most recent version and copied to the \windows\system\ directory). Note:

WinRIS does not operate under:

- Win CE (embedded in PocketPC)

16-bit Windows 3.x

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard command 4.1 Operation This support program can be run in MS-

Windows mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone re-

sults in unexpected transmissions. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. 4.2 To connect and start WinRIS GeminiPDs and ParagonPDs share a common WinRIS program available on diskette, Datara-

dio p/n 980 03392-00n. Refer to the WinRIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set the MS-Windows environment, and how to connect, install and run this program. In summary, before starting the WinRIS when running MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) lead-

ing to:

WinRIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop short-

cut icon for WinRIS:

Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut icon, Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 120 20170-202 18 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 16 - WinRIS main screen 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Placing the cursor over a Toolbar or Button generates to ScreenTip. Referring a Figure 16, starting from top and moving down to the bottom, the screen display is made up of:

A Menu bar, containing the menu names listed below. They give access to command options. Unavailable commands are shown in light gray color. Shortcut keys are listed whenever available. File menu lists the:

- Put From command (Ctrl+O)

- Get command (Ctrl+S)

- Get As command and below a command separator, the:

- Exit command

! Test menu lists the:

- Modulated command

- UnModulated command

! View menu lists the:

- Toolbar checked command

- Status bar checked command

! Help menu lists the:

- Help Topics command and below a command separator, the:

- About WinRIS command A Toolbar row, located immediately below the menu bar containing buttons (each 120 20170-202 19 ParagonPD Technical Manual bearing an icon) for commonly used tasks as follows:

! Put From button

! Get button Get As button and to the right of a bar separator, the:

! About button and the

! Context-sensitive Help button An Indicator and Button bar, located im-

mediately below the Toolbar row, it con-

tains two circular indicators

! DSR signal is High indicator

! CTS signal is High indicator and three buttons for commonly used tasks as follows. Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check ParagonPDs transmit functions Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Station Reset button The Station Reset button is the only button available when first starting the program and is used to initiate the connection process. Press Station Reset. Enter Port and Baud rate information in the Select Port sub-window.

! Station Reset button

! Modulated TXON button

! Unmodulated TXON button A Product field, displays product type be-

ing used after a connection to the product has been established. Illustration used indi-

cates a GeminiPD product connection. A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel for GeminiPD products. The Channels selection and the Show All Channel Frequencies button functions are disabled for ParagonPD as it uses a single channel. A Test section, with a Ping button and the relevant address field. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or warning windows. The RSSI Bar Graph on the right side of the window is exclusive to GeminiPD and is dis-

abled when connected to ParagonPD. 4.4 Functions The WinRIS program is used to:

Figure 17 - Select Port dialog window Press OK to validate the selection (or Can-

cel to exit back to the main screen). When connection is established, all test buttons and fields valid for the product identified are activated. The Station Reset button is also pressed as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after do-

ing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 4.4.2 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

120 20170-202 20 ParagonPD Technical Manual Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engi-

neering. Get button 4.4.2.1 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get command or press the Get button on the Toolbar to:

Establish linking Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The WinRIS status bar will then report All pa-

rameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file [unit' s/n].BP2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.2.2 After communication is established using the Connect button, press the Get As button to:

Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.bp2 (already selected). Save the connected BDLCPDs operating characteris-

tics (configuration setting) to a file, direc-

tory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

in [file-

cessfully retrieved and saved name]. 4.4.3 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engi-

neering. Put From button 4.4.3.1 1- On the menu bar, select File, then the Put From command or press the Put From button on the Toolbar. 2- In the Open window, locate the drive, di-

rectory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. is The status bar reports: [filename]

downloading to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect!

into unit and up 6- Press the Station Reset button. See section 4.4.1 for details. 4.4.4 Special Functions The following WinRIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the connected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button 120 20170-202 21 ParagonPD Technical Manual Banner Field 4.4.4.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. ParagonPD's firmwares reside in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the WinRIS used. You will find the version number by se-

lecting the Help menu option, then About WinRIS command or pressing the About button on the Toolbar. The Banner field is blank prior to doing a

"Get", "Get As" or "Put From". Comments 4.4.4.2 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) location, etc).

(customer name, 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.4.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.4.5 Test Functions The following WinRIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

DSR signal is High indicator CTS signal is High indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button While a button is in-use for test transmissions, all others are inoperative. DSR signal is High indicator 4.4.5.1 The Data Set Ready (DSR) indicator light, located on the button bar (leftmost), is an RS-

232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indi-

cates proper connection and that the value is 120 20170-202 22 ParagonPD Technical Manual High. The DMP protocol used requires that DSR be normally asserted. CTS signal is High indicator 4.4.5.2 The Clear-to-Send (CTS) indicator light, lo-

cated on the button bar (second indicator from the left), is an RS-232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indicates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used re-

quires that CTS be normally asserted. Channel Selection 4.4.5.3 ParagonPD uses its default radio channel. No channel selection being available, all channels are grayed-out and the Show All Channel Fre-

quencies button is disabled. TXON Tests 4.4.5.4 TXON test functions are selected by choosing Test from the file menu, then Modulated or UnModulated command or by pressing the relevant button on the Toolbar. Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.5.4.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated 20-seconds test signal on the channel selected or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. Measure the forward (nominal 40W for UHF model and 35W for 800MHz model) and re-

flected power levels by powering TX ON (<5%

of forward power or as specified by System Eng.). Modulated Carrier 4.4.5.4.2 Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed as shown in Table 8. This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to begin transmitting a 20-seconds modulated test signal on the channel or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation Network Speed

(b/s) Carrier Modulation Tone Typical deviation in kHz TX test tone in ( ) Data Absolute Maximum deviation in kHz K S F 4 C R x K S F 4 C R x K S F G D K S F G D K S F 4 C R x K S F G D K S F 4 C R x Full Channel (800MHz) U.S. & Canada 32000 25600 19200 32000 25600 19200 3.5

(1000 Hz) 3.7

(1000 Hz) 4.3

(1000 Hz) 5.3 *

5.7 *

6.2 *

Full Channel (UHF) U.S. & Canada 4.3

(1000 Hz) 4.0

(1000 Hz) 4.5

(1000 Hz) 6.3*

6.0*

6.5*

Full Channel (UHF & 800MHz) U.S. & Canada 19200 16000 9600 4.0

(1000 Hz) 4.0

(1000 Hz) 3.0

(1000 Hz) 4.7 4.7 3.6 NPSPAC 800 MHz - 12.5 kHz channel spacing U.S. 9600 14400 16000 2.5

(1000 Hz) 2.7

(1000 Hz) 2.4

(1000 Hz) 2.9 3.6 3.2 Half-Channel UHF - U.S. & UHF + 800MHz - Canada 9600 14400 16000 2.5

(1000 Hz) 2.0

(1000 Hz) 1.6

(1000 Hz) 2.9 2.9 2.3

* Deviation shown may seem higher than normal, however they fall within the following appropriate FCCs masks lim-

its. 120 20170-202 23 ParagonPD Technical Manual Ping Button 4.4.5.5 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of ParagonPD to communicate with a mobile unit by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the ping address Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) address, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

- For ParagonPD product:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or

- For GeminiPD product:

Ping address is not in the range A GN The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate using the direc-

tional arrows. This area also shows messages describing actions of toolbar buttons as you de-

press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. Warning and Caution messages appear in pop-

up sub-windows. To close these message boxes, press the ESC key. Three boxes on the right of the status bar indi-

cate which of the following keys is latched down:

Indicator Description CAP The Caps Lock key is latched down. NUM The Num Lock key is latched down. SCRL The Scroll Lock key is latched down. Table 9 - Key latch indications

In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. 3- The program sends a test query and contin-

ues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 seconds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. 4.4.6 Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom edge of the WinRIS window. To display or hide the bar, check or uncheck the command in the View menu. 120 20170-202 24 ParagonPD Technical Manual 5. Testing and Trouble-

5.2 Recommended Checks Shooting The checks described below should be done at time of installation, annual intervals or when-

ever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required In-line watt meter (150W & 10 W ranges) Radio service monitor (IFR-120B with op-

tion 03: 30KHz IF filter or equivalent). RG-214 or RG-223 cable with N-Type male connector to connect ParagonPD to the service monitor. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months. A) After an installation 1. LED Indications 2. Save unit config to a file 3. Transmitter Output Power 4. Transmitter Reflected Power 5. RF Link test between ParagonPD and mo-

bile unit(s) B) For annual maintenance & trouble-shooting Same checks as A) plus:

6. Carrier Frequency Error 7. TX Deviation 8. Low Frequency Balance 9. 12 dB SINAD 10. Receiver distortion 11. RSSI check Transmissions for some of the tests above are initiated by pressing the PF1 membrane button located on the front of the BDLC. For details on its use, refer to Table 3 and section 3.2.1.1.2.2 on page 13 above. 120 20170-202 25 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 10 - Checklist A (after installation) CHECKLIST A

(ParagonPD) Recommended Check out after Installation Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

1 2 3 4 5 Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press WinRIS Get button Transmitter Output Power Press TX (Unmod) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON mod)

(Un-

RF Link test

"Ping" a mobile BDLCPD beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.2 as per section 4.4.2 VHF/UHF: 100 watts 800: 70 watts

+10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request. Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna con-

nector. 1Refer to Checklist B

<5% of forward power or as specified by Syst. Eng. 10W in-line wattmeter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Ping Successful as per sections 4.4.5.5

- Mobile is out of range

- Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless unit has been set a lower value). Note that readings less than 100 watts for VHF/UHF or 70 watts for 800 MHz models, may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter or the RF feedline & antenna installation. 120 20170-202 26 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 11 - Checklist B (General) CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD) General Check out (part1 of 2) ParagonPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting a unit may result in significant performance losses. Step ACTION Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press WinRIS Get button Transmitter Output Power Press TX ON (Unmod) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) 1 2 3 4 5 6 TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modu-

lated with a 1 kHz tone. 7 Low Frequency Bal-

ance Initiate a TX Random data test via BDLCPDs PF1

(See Table 3) Expected Results at 25C BDLCPD beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.2 MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

VHF/UHF: 100 watts 800: 70 watts

+10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request. as per section 4.4.2 Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line wattmeter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. Adjust Power on the front panel of the Power Amp

( see Figure 8)

<5% of forward power or as specified by Syst. Eng. 10 W in-line wattmeter Check damaged coax cable, etc. for bad connections,

< 300 Hz xRC4FSK, Full ch. unit:

32.0 kb/s: 4.3 kHz (UHF) 32.0 kb/s: 3.5 kHz (800) 25.6 kb/s: 4.0 kHz (UHF) 25.6 kb/s: 3.7 kHz (800) 19.2 kb/s: 4.5 kHz (UHF) 19.2 kb/s: 4.3 kHz (800) DGFSK, Full ch, unit:

19.2 and 16 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s: 3.0 kHz Half ch. unit:

9.6 kb/s: 2.5 kHz xRC4FSK, Half ch. unit:

16.0 kb/s: 1.6 kHz (UHF + 800 for CDN only) 16.0 kb/s: 2.4 kHz (800 for U.S. only NPSPAC) 14.4 kb/s: 2.0 kHz (UHF + 800 for CDN only) 14.4 kb/s: 2.7 kHz (800 for U.S. only NPSPAC) Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. a) Record deviation level read from step 6 b) Record deviation read from TX Random test c) Difference between a) and b) must be:

< 500 Hz (2 FSK)

< 1.8 kHz (4 FSK) Service monitor set to read frequency error Adjust TCXO

(see inside Exciter module) Figure 22 & Figure 35 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Adjust according to Appendix 1

- ParagonPD Deviation adjust on page 57 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position, all audio filtering disabled

) Refer to Section 6.2.3.4 for Series I and section 6.4.3.4 for Series II 120 20170-202 27 ParagonPD Technical Manual CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD) General Check out (part2 of 2) ParagonPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting unit may result in significant performance losses. Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

Set the service monitor to generate on the selected receive frequency. Verify alternately for both receivers. The carrier should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation level specified below:

8 9 10 12 dB SINAD

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

For Full channel unit, set devia-

tion to 3 kHz. For Half channel unit, set devia-

tion to 1.5 kHz Receiver distortion

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

Set service monitor RF Gen output to 70 dBm

- Deviation level as per SINAD above. RSSI Vary & measure the RF level out-

put as shown in sections 6.2.2.5 and 6.4.2.5. Better than -110 dBm

(including cable loss) 5.5 %

UHF & 800 MHz:

at -110dBm: 1.2 VDC

(+0.2V 0.45 VDC) at 90dBm: 4.0 VDC

(0.20VDC) at 80dBm: 5.0 VDC

(+0.20 0.35VDC) VHF:

at 120dBm: 3VDC

(+0.2V 0.45 VDC) at 105dBm: 4VDC

(0.20VDC) At 90dBm: 5VDC

(+0.2V 0.25 VDC) Refer to section 6.2.2 for Series I and to section 6.4.2 below for Series II Refer to section 6.2.2 for Series I and to section 6.4.2 below for Series II

Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 30) Service monitor

(IFR) set to SINAD IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 30) Service monitor

(IFR) set to SINAD IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 5 (see Figure 30)

- DC Voltmeter measurement Refer to section 6.2.2.5 for Series I and to sections 6.4.2.5 or 6.4.2.6 for Series II 120 20170-202 28 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6. Radio Programming and Adjustments All receiver procedures detailed in this section should be done twice: once for the Main (or RX1) receiver module and a second time for the Auxiliary (or RX2) receiver module. Connect to the relevant module and its corresponding backplane PCB as required. Both Series of ParagonPD radio module assemblies share the same backplane PCBs. Refer to sec-

tion 3.1.2.1 for details. Programming for Series I is done via EPROMs while Series II uses of the RJ11 connector present on the front of the Speaker panel and mirrored on both backplane boards

(see section 6.3 below). 6.1 Series I 800MHz Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the ParagonPDs Tait T800 Series I radio

(half & full channel) used in all ParagonPD 800 MHz versions. This procedure is a supplement to the Tait programming procedure. 6.1.1 Recommended Items T800win programming kit for Series I:

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- EPROM Programmer BP MicroSystemss model CP-1128 (suggested model)

- EPROM Programmer software BP MicroSystemss (Version 3.08 or later)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 27C64 EPROM (150 nanoseconds or faster) 486 PC or better, Ms-Windows 3.1 or later 6.1.2 Introduction Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win soft-

ware for Series I Base station. It will be needed to generate a binary file required in programming the EPROM. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

Press and hold the Alt key while pressing the relevant hotkey (indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command).

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey letter without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As di-

rectory service box. For full description of the programming procedure, refer to the T800 Programming Software Users Manual. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is pro-

grammed outside the radio tuning range: 3 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed outside the radio tuning range: 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 120 20170-202 29 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.1.3 File Creation 1. In WIN 3.x: Start by clicking on File, then on Run, type the path or browse to select the Tait program, click OK to run PGM800Win executable program. In WIN 9x: click on Start, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click OK to run PGM800Win. 2. In the Tait programs Menu bar, click on View. On the drop-down menu, make sure that a check mark is present in front of the T800 EPROM option. If not, click this op-

tion to activate it and click on View again to verify that a check mark is now present. 3. Select File, New and choose the relevant unit model to program. Click on OK. The pro-

gram displays a dual-tabbed virtual file folder. 4. Click the System Information tab; enter the units serial number in the relevant field. In the User Remarks field, you may enter user comments as required (up to 16 charac-

ters). Use as a notepad (customer name, location, technical info etc...). Refer to Figure 18. Click the Channel Information tab; click the relevant frequency field to make it active and type in the required channel number in the frequency field. Refer to Figure 19 Figure 18 - Series I Receiver System Information Warning:

DO NOT enter anything in the CTCSS fields. If there is already something in any of those fields, erase their content(s). The indication should be 00.0 5. Select File, Save As. Enter an appropriate name in the Filename field. Always use the suffix .bin for these binary files. Choose the relevant drive and directory to save under and click on OK. 6. Repeat file creation procedure for the Exciter, the main receiver and for the diversity re-

ceiver modules as required. 120 20170-202 30 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. Select File, Exit to leave the program. Figure 19 - Series I Channel Information 6.1.4 Programming the EPROM Connect a straight 25-pin ribbon parallel cable between the PCs LPT1 port and the EPROM programmer. Apply power to it. At the DOS prompt, type bp.exe to open the EPROM program software. ParagonPD uses three 27C64 EPROMs (150 nanoseconds or faster) in the Exciter and Receivers modules. Repeat the following procedure for each EPROM as needed. Carefully grasp between thumb and index the 27C64 EPROM chip to be tested and gently insert it with a rocking motion in the EPROM Programmer socket until well seated. Navigate the programmers screen using the keyboard directional arrows. The left and right keys move through the available options and the up and down arrows select the function. 1. Move to and select Buffer 2. In the sub-menu, move to and select Load 3. Press ENTER 4. In the opened box, type in the directory path where the file created in paragraph 6.1.3 above is located. In the list of filenames, move to the appropriate file and press ENTER once to complete the selection and press ENTER a second time to load the file. This closes the directory service box. The message Load successful displays until direc-

tional arrows are pressed again. 5. Move to and choose Select 6. Press ENTER 120 20170-202 31 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. A selection box opens, in the Device Selector: field, type M27C64A. Move to and choose the brand of EPROM. Press ENTER to close the selection box. The program is now ready to configure the EPROM and the name of the device is displayed at the bot-

tom of the screen. 8. Move to and select Device 9. In the now opened sub-menu, move to and select Program. 10. Press ENTER. The program loads the binary file into the EPROM (approximately fifteen seconds). The message Function complete displays until directional arrows are pressed again. *

11. Move to and select Buffer 12. In the now opened sub-menu, move to and select Clear 13. Press ENTER. The program displays at the bottom of the screen: All buffers cleared 14. Press ENTER 15. Move to and select Quit 16. Press ENTER 17. Remove configured EPROM from the EPROM Programmer

* If an Error message (and warning beep) appears during the procedure, it normally indicates improper erasure of the EPROM. Replace it with a fresh one and start from the beginning. The removed EPROM will need to be cy-

cled through an EPROM eraser. 6.1.5 EPROM Installation Warning Always use a grounding strap and wear an anti-static bracelet when working with sensi-

tive circuitry or components susceptible to static discharge or transients damage. 1. Remove power to the radio 2. Unscrew #1 Pozidriv screw on the front panel to slide out the module. 3. Unscrew the fourteen #2 Pozidriv screws on the handle side and remove cover. 4. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully slide the blade between the EPROM socket and the chip (IC1) itself. Gently pry the chip away from its base and remove. The removed EPROM will need to be cycled through an EPROM eraser. Refer to Figure 21 on page 39. 5. Install the appropriate EPROM by carefully grasping the chip between thumb and index and gently inserting it with a rocking motion in its socket until well seated. 6. Select the channel configured in the EPROM as detailed in the next section. 6.1.6 Channel Selection via DIP Switches Channel selection is done via DIP switches inside each module. Example: To select channel 5, the DIP switch settings are as shown in Figure 20 below. Notes:

- For channel 1 (one), switch #1 must be OFF and switches #2 through #7 must be ON.

- Always have switch #8 set to OFF. 120 20170-202 32 ParagonPD Technical Manual

- The EPROM and DIP switches locations are identical in both receiver and exciter modules

(refer to Figure 21 and to Figure 22. Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 ON for 27C16 EPROM OFF for 27C64 EPROM

(Always leave OFF) O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 20 - Channel Selection via internal DIP switches 6.2 Series I 800MHz Radio Tuning This section covers some basic tuning and verification for the 800 MHz Series I base station modules. Note: Usually, this section is not done unless called for in section 6.1 Series I - Radio Pro-

gramming or in Table 11 Checklist B. 3 feet long double shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar). 6.2.1 Test Equipment You will need the following test equipment:

- Digital multimeter and probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

- Digital or analog calibrated Oscilloscope (X1, X2 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (with .001ppm TCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x six-inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

1x Torx screwdriver #10 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (provided with ParagonPD to connect the exciter and PA) 120 20170-202 33 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.2 Receiver Module (T885) Note 1: Refer to Figure 21, page 39 for locating tuning controls Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will be flashing showing that it needs to be re-tuned. 6.2.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during each receiver alignment procedures that follow:

1. Remove the receiver (T885) module from the ParagonPD rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail kit between the RX module and the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Set the multimeter to read DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD. 6.2.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 7V (working range is between 3V to 10V). Multiple channels: Select the middle channel via the EPROM PCB DIP switch. Adjust the VCO loop to 7V. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 10V and 3V respectively. 6.2.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1) IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel fre-

quency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1 kHz sine e) Select SINAD meter 2) Monitor the SINAD by connecting an X1 scope probe to the Demod O/P test point (close to PL103 in the first section from the module front panel) or on the relevant backplane board at SK1 pin 6 (see Figure 30 for test point location). 3) Adjust the helical resonators #H1 to #H3 for best SINAD. 4) Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do steps 3) and 4) again. (minimum requirement to reach is 12 dB SINAD for 110 dBm) 5) Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in the next paragraphs below. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20170-202 34 ParagonPD Technical Manual WARNING: Do not attempt to re-tune the IF stages (i.e. L312 to L318). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-

programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the DSP mo-

dem coefficient settings and may significantly reduce the radio performances over data. 6.2.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Generator mode, Output T/R

IFR TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off, except for wideband. Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios.

2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level must be better than -110dBm

(including cable loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. Note:

If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-end. If it is still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 6.2.2.5 RSSI Adjustment 1. Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110dBm modulated by a 1 kHz tone at a deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel). 2. Adjust RV301 (RSSI level) to give 2.0V RSSI output when measured with a multimeter at SK301 pin 2 or on the relevant backplane board at SK1 pin 5 (see Figure 30 for test point lo-

cation). 3. Vary the RF level and check the RSSI output voltage (Figure 28):

1) At 120 dBm: 1.2 VDC (+0.20 0.45VDC) 2) At 90 dBm: 4.0 VDC (+0.20 0.20 VDC) 3) At 80dBm: 5.0 VDC (+0.20 0.35VDC) If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20170-202 35 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.3 Exciter Module (T881) Note 1: Refer to Figure 22 on page 40 for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will be flashing showing that it needs to be re-tuned. 6.2.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station 2. Prepare the multimeter to read DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T881) module from the base station rack frame 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail kit between the exciter module and the empty chassis exciter slot. 6. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R out-

put and the exciter antenna connector. 7. Apply power to the base station 6.2.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 7VDC. Multiple channels: Adjust the VCO loop to 7V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 10V and 3V respectively. Note: Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. Where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 6.2.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter (BW) set to 30KHz 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 120 20170-202 36 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.3.4 Low Frequency Balance Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source: Demod Out Connector). Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the proce-

dure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Adjust RV-105 (REF MOD) close to the microphone connector, for best wave shape; no damping, no overshoot. Record the deviation read. 4. If transmission has not ended by itself, press PF1 again to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 8. 5. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Record deviation again. 6. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300 Hz. If not, re-adjust RV105 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 7. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare 1000 Hz sine wave adjust tone and the deviation produced between:

- Random data The difference should be lower than 300 Hz. For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel. 8. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use

(see Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to Checklist B - page 27. 6.2.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power must be:

800MHz (T881) = 4W 300mW. 3. If 4Watts is not reached, adjust helical #L300 for maximum power output (which should be at least 7W); adjust RV356 down to 4W. 120 20170-202 37 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.4 Power Amplifier Module (T889) 1. Re-install the exciter module into the Paragon rack frame 2. Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier 3. Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load. 6.2.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Out 1. Set RV63 (Power adjustment, access on the front panel) fully clockwise. 2. Key the transmitter from the exciter Carrier button. The power output should exceed 90W. 3. Adjust RV69 (Driver power, access from the left end side) until the output power drops to 90W. 4. Adjust RV63 (Power) to reduce power output to its nominal value (70W) or lower as re-

quired. 5. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 6.2.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level 1. Power up the T889 and adjust RV63 (Power) so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA normally op-

erates at 50W). 2. Adjust RV48 (Forward power Alarm set) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust RV63 (Power) for the normal operating power level. 6.2.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) 1. Power up the T889 and adjust RV63 (Power) for the normal operating power level. 2. Place a known mismatch of the required value (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust RV52 (re-

verse power alarm set) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. Example: A VSWR of 3:1 can be simulated by connecting an undetermined 3 dB pad to the PA output. This will result in a loss of 6 dB. 120 20170-202 38 ParagonPD Technical Manual FRONT PL103 Demod output RSSI Test point:

SK301 pin 2 SK301 Pin 1 L318 RSSI SET RV301 L320 IC301 L321 L319 L317 L316 L315 L314 L313 L312 IC1 12345678 TCXO C6 L1 CHANNEL SELECTION H3 H2 H1 Figure 21 - T885 Receiver tuning control location 120 20170-202 39 ParagonPD Technical Manual FRONT Micro-phone connector Ref Mod RV105 Temp control Hi-Temp adjust

#L300

#L300 Power Adjust RV356 IC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TCXO C6 L1 CHANNEL SELECTION IC202 Tail Timer Tx Timer BACK Figure 22 - T881 Exciter tuning controls location 120 20170-202 40 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3 Series II Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the UHF & VHF model that uses the Para-

gonPD base station radios (half & full channels). 6.3.1 Recommended Items

- T800win programming kit for Series II:

486 PC or better, MS-Windows 3.1 or later

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- T800-01-0002 programming cable (DB-25 to RJ-45 cable)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 6.3.2 Module Programming Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win software for Series II Base station. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

- Press and hold the Alt key while pressing at the same time the relevant hotkey as indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command.

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As di-

rectory service box. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is pro-

grammed outside the radio tuning range:

UHF = 2.5 MHz from previous center frequency. VHF = 1.5 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter and PA alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed out-

side the radio tuning range:

VHF & UHF= 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 1. Connect the PC, via the supplied programming lead, to the speaker panels front-mounted RJ11 connector. 2. Run Tait PGM800Win program and follow instructions found in the T800 Programming Software Users Manual to select the proper module to be programmed. 3. Program required channel's frequencies. Do not program any CTCSS tones on channels. Do not change any other parameters. Refer to Figure 23, Figure 24, Figure 25 and Figure 26 for screen program examples. 4. Save the base station programming info to a file for further reference. 120 20170-202 41 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 23 - Receiver System Information Figure 24 - Receiver Channel Information screen 120 20170-202 42 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 25 - Exciter System Information screen Figure 26 - Exciter Channel Information screen 120 20170-202 43 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches The backplane-mounted DIP switch settings override the default channel programmed by PGM800Win. To set a default channel via the software, all DIP switches must be set to OFF (i.e. 00000000). When a switch is Off, its binary count is active; when a switch is ON its binary count is in-

active. The various DIP switch combinations of ON or OFF make up a binary total, which identifies the channel number. To select a channel, set the appropriate DIP switch or switches to OFF to make the binary count total the channel number you want. Set all other switches to ON. It is recommended to set both SW1 (RX) and SW2 (TX) to the same settings on both back plane boards. Example: To select channel 5, set the DIP switches as shown below:

I X T H C T W S L E N N A H C Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Always ON except when default channel is required O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 27 - Backplane DIP switches example - Channel 5 selected I X R H C T W S L E N N A H C 120 20170-202 44 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4 Series II Radio Tuning This section covers some basic radio tuning and verification for VHF (T83x-xx-nnnn) and UHF

(T85x-xx-nnnn) Series II base station modules. Note: Usually, this section is not done unless called for in section 6.3 Series II - Radio Pro-

gramming or in Table 11 Checklist B. 6.4.1 Test Equipment 1 HP 34330A Shunt 30A (UHF only, used for transmitter current measurement) 3 feet long double shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar).

- Digital multimeter & probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

- Digital or analog calibrated Oscilloscope & scope probes (X1, X2 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (.001ppm TCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x Six inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

1x Torx screwdriver #10 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (comes with the radio to connect the exciter to the PA) 6.4.2 Receiver module (T855 & T835) Note 1: Refer to Figure 32 (T855) and to Figure 34 (T835) for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning, The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 6.4.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during all receiver alignment procedures described be-

low:

1. Remove the receiver (T855 or T835) module from the ParagonPD rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail Kit for Series II to the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Prepare the multimeter to DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD. 120 20170-202 45 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T855 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T835 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels:

1. T855 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle channel. 2. T835 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. 3. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of respectively All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T855 and within 13V and 5V for the T835. 6.4.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1. IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel fre-

quency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1KHz sine e) Select SINAD meter f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to moni-

tor at the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835). 2. Adjust the helical resonators for best SINAD: #FL410 and #FL420 (T855) or L410, L420, L460 and L470 (T835). 3. Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do step 2) & 3) again.

(minimum requirement to reach is 12dB SINAD for -110dBm) 4. Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in paragraph 6.4.2.4. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. WARNING: Do NOT attempt to re-tune the IF stages

(i.e. L310 to L390 for T855, CV318 or L330 to L360 for T835). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-

programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the mo-

dem DSP coefficient settings and may reduce significantly the radio per-

formances over data. 6.4.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

a) Generator mode, Output T/R 120 20170-202 46 ParagonPD Technical Manual b) IFR TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency c) Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) d) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off. e) Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios. f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to IFR SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835) 2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level must be better than -110dBm

(including cable loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2kHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. For T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full chan-

nel) or 0.8kHz (half channel). 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. For T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full channel) or 0.8kHz (half channel). Note: If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-

end. It still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 6.4.2.5 RSSI Adjustment (UHF: T855)

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110dBm modulated by a one kHz tone at a deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel).

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 2.0V RSSI output at SK330 pin 2 or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter (See Figure 30 for test point location).

- Vary the RF level and check the RSSI output voltage ( Figure 28):

1) At 120 dBm: 1.2 VDC (+0.20 0.45VDC) 2) At 90 dBm: 4.0 VDC (+0.20 0.20 VDC) 3) At 80dBm: 5.0 VDC (+0.20 0.35VDC) If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support.

-80

-70 dBm

-120 -110 -100 -90 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 e g a t l o V Figure 28 - T855 and T885, RSSI Curve: volt to dBm 120 20170-202 47 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2.6 Note: This check is only recommended for Paragon/R model running DBA protocol 3.06.009 RSSI Adjustment (VHF: T835) series or later.

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -100dBm with deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) at 1kHz tone.

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 4.5V RSSI output at RSSI test point (near quad. Coil L360) or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter

- Vary the RF level and check the RSSI output voltage :

1) At 120 dBm: 3.0 VDC (+0.20 0.45VDC) 2) At 105 dBm: 4.0 VDC (+0.20 0.20 VDC) 3) At 90dBm: 5.0 VDC (+0.20 0.25VDC) If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. Figure 29 - T835, RSSI Curve: Volt to dBm PL1 F F O SW1 N O F F O SW2 N O O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I H C T W S L E N A H C X T O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I H C T W S L E N A H C X R SK1 1 5 6 RSSI ouput SK1 pin 5 RX-Audio1 SK1 pin 6 Figure 30 T800-50-0001 Backplane and test pins location 120 20170-202 48 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.3 Exciter Module (T857, T837 or T881) Note 1: Refer to Figure 33 (T857) and to Figure 35 (T837) for locating tuning controls and com-

ponents. T881 series II will be included in a later release. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning: The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 6.4.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station 2. Prepare the multimeter to DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T857 or T837) module from the base station rack frame 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R out-

put and the exciter antenna connector. 6. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail Kit to the empty chassis exciter slot. 7. Apply power to the base station 6.4.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T857 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T837 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels:

1. T857 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle channel. 2. T837 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T857 and within 13V and 5V for the T837. Note:

Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. In the case where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 6.4.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 120 20170-202 49 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-Key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 6.4.3.4 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment PGM800Win controls this adjustment. Electronic potentiometer (256 step) is used to allow channel adjustment of two-point modulation (Low freq. balance). 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source Demod out connector, DC cou-

pled). IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the proce-

dure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. You can also run both programs on the same com-

puter if two serial COM ports are available. 4. Adjust IC220 via PGM800Win reference modulation to obtain the best square wave, no damping, no overshoot. (You can use either the mouse or up and down arrow keys). Record the deviation read. 5. If transmission has not ended by itself, press BDLCPD PF1 to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 8. 6. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Record deviation again. 7. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300Hz. If not, re-adjust IC220 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 8. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare 1000 Hz sine wave adjust tone and the deviation produced between:

- Random data The difference should be lower than 300 Hz. For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel. 8. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use

(see Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to the related Checklist (B for ParagonPD - page 27 120 20170-202 50 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power must be:

- VHF (T837) = 800 mW 200mW

- UHF (T857) = 1W 300mW

800 (T881) = 4W 300mW 6.4.4 Power Amplifier Module (T859 or T839)

- Re-install the exciter module into the ParagonPD rack frame

- Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier.

- Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load.

- Forward and reverse power alarm set (control) are identified on the PA cover. 6.4.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Output

- Key the transmitter on the exciter and adjust the PA output for 100W using front panel power control. If power cannot be reached, refer to section 6.4.4.4 for T859 UHF model or to Tait T839 service manual for T839 model. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 6.4.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level 1. Power up the PA and adjust front panel power control so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA nor-

mally operates at 50W). 2. Adjust the forward power alarm set (T859: RV48 or T839: RV101) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust front panel power control (T859: RV63 or T839: RV109) for the normal operat-

ing power level 6.4.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) 1. Power up the PA and adjust the front panel power control for the normal operating power level. 2. Place a known mismatch of the required value (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust the reverse power alarm set (T859: RV52 or T839: RV105) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. Example:

A VSWR of 3:1 can be simulated by connecting an unterminated 3dB pad to the PA output. This will result in a return loss of 6dB. 120 20170-202 51 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.4.4 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure 1. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, set RV69 (driver power level) fully clockwise. 2. For all units, preset the tuning controls as shown in Figure 31 Figure 31 - T859 Tuning Settings 3. Set RV63 (front panel power control) fully clockwise. 4. Key on the exciter (press PTT button). 5. Adjust CV1 for maximum output. 6. Adjust CV8 for maximum output. 7. Adjust CV32 for maximum output. 8. Adjust CV51 and CV57 for maximum output. 9. Adjust CV34 and CV35 for maximum output. 10. Recheck all settings. The power output should exceed 110W. 11. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, adjust RV69 (driver power level) until the output power drops to 110W. 12. For all units, adjust RV63 to reduce the power output to the required level (normally 100W). 6.4.4.5 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency 1. Insert a Shunt current device (HP 34330A Shunt 30A ) between the power supply red wire and its 13.8Vdc output, then connect the shunt to the multimeter (VDC scale) 2. While transmitting, monitor the current. It should remain under 22A. 3. Retune CV32, CV51 and CV57 towards maximum capacitance to obtain minimum sup-

ply current, but do not exceed a maximum drop of 0.5A per control. 4. Check that the supply current is <22A for 100W output power. Note:

These control settings are normally very close to minimum supply current. If the current is reduced too far, maximum power output will drop and 2f rejection may degrade. 120 20170-202 52 ParagonPD Technical Manual IC 310 SK330 pin 2 Figure 32 - T855 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-202 53 ParagonPD Technical Manual TCXO Figure 33 - T857 Exciter Tuning Controls Locations 120 20170-202 54 ParagonPD Technical Manual L410 L420 L1 L460 L47 L330 CV318 L340 RSSI Test Point P207 IC 700 CV1 L350 IC 350 L360 Figure 34 - T835 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-202 55 ParagonPD Technical Manual IC700 TCXO L1 CV1 IC220 Figure 35 - T837 Exciter Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-202 56 ParagonPD Technical Manual Appendix 1 - ParagonPD Deviation adjust 1. Using the WinRIS, press TX ON (Modulated) and record deviation level as read on the IFR. 2. Using Windows Notepad, Edit the .bp2 file named with the corresponding BDLCPD serial number (e.g. abcd.bp2). Save as to another file name and keep it in case something goes wrong while changing a parameter. 3. Locate the line labeled Dev0 Par85= and record the value beside the = sign. This is the corresponding parameter value to the deviation read in step 1. 4. Apply the following formula to determine the new parameter value to be set:

(New Par85 value) = [(initial Par85 value) X (target deviation) / (deviation read)] + 2 5. Change the value in the file, Save as using the BDLCPD serial number file name. 6. Run the WinRIS again and do a Put From. From the opened window, select the file that you just made the change to and then press OK 7. Again, check deviation level while pressing TX ON (Modulated). If the level is now correct, press Stationreset to make the change permanent. Otherwise do step 5 again, changing the value entered in the file by 1 or 2 digit(s) up or down, fine-tuning directly the Par85 (DSP deviation) parameter. Do steps 6 and 7 again to confirm acceptance. This last step may have to be repeated once or twice while varying the entered value up or down. If unable to obtain the correct level after editing up and/or down by no more than 2, contact System Engineering. 120 20170-202 57 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. Specifications GENERAL Frequency VHF 136 -156 MHz 148 -174 MHz UHF 400 - 440 MHz1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 MHz (Series I) Rx 800 - 880 MHz Tx 850 - 870 MHz Rx 870 960 MHz Tx 870 960 MHz 5W only RF/Modem Assembly Size Frequency Stability 19.0 W x 17.5.0 H x 12.5 D + 2.0 connector allowance 2.5 ppm 1.0 ppm 1.5 ppm Rx Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC 1.5A max. (Two receivers) Tx Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC 21A DC max. @ 100W 24A DC max. @ 100W 24A DC max. @ 70W Base Station Power Consumption

@ 115 VAC Channel spacing 6A max. 12.5 or 25 kHz Operating Temperature Range

-30C to +60C (deleted power supply, catalog number ending with a 0)

-10C to +60C (with standard Dual Power Supply assembly, catalog number ending with a 2) RECEIVER Selectivity @ 25 kHz

@ 12.5 kHz Sensitivity @ 12 dB SINAD Spurious Response Intermodulation

- EIA 25 kHz

- EIA 300-096 12.5 kHz Hum and Noise

- EIA

- ETS 300-096 TRANSMITTER Rated Continuous RF Power Range of Adjustment Spurious Emissions

- transmit

- standby Hum and Noise

- narrow

- Wide VSWR Stability Transmitter Sideband Noise

@ +/-25 kHz

@ +/- 1 MHz 95 dB 89 dB 85 dB 80 dB N/A 100W 20 100 W

-50 dB

-55 dB

-95 dBc

-105 dBc 85 dB 85 dB 90 dB 85 dB

-117 dBm 100 dB 55 dB 50 dB 100W 20 100 W

-36 dBm to 1 GHz/-30 dBm to 4 GHz

-57 dBm to 1 GHz/-47 dBm to 4 GHz

-50 dB

-55 dB 5:1 mismatch

-95 dBc

-105 dBc 85 dB 80 dB 50 dB 45 dB 70W 20 70 W

-45 dB

-50 dB

-88 dBc

-100 dBc 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20170-202 58 ParagonPD Technical Manual FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS DGFSK modulation VHF UHF 800 MHz 136 - 156 MHz 148 - 174 MHz 1 400 - 440 MHz 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS SRRC4FSK modulation FCC CASTEL0007 CASTEL0002 CASTEL0021 CASTEL0023 CASTEL0025 CAS8IPT889BW (100 Watts) CAS8IPT881 (5Watts) 400 - 440 MHz 1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz FCC EOTBDD4T85-1 EOTBDD4T85-2 EOTBDD4T85-3 EOTBDD4T889 (100 Watts) EOTBDD4T881 (5Watts) UHF 800 MHz Series I 800 MHz Series II IC (DOC) *

737195375A 737195376A 3993195401A N/A 737194358 IC (DOC) *

3993195401A N/A 737194358 800 - 870 MHz EOTBDD4T881S2 (5Watts) 737194358

* Operating under Class II permissive change 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20170-202 59 ParagonPD Technical Manual

 

 

Paragon-III

(Narrow Band) Data Base Station Technical Manual Version 0.01 Preliminary The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2004 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. July 2004 Part no.: 120 20190-001 1. 2. 1.5.1 1.2.1 2.5.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 1 Features: ................................................................................................................................................. 2 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT........................................................................................................................ 3 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................................................................................................... 4 Factory Repair ........................................................................................................................................ 4 1.6 PACKAGING ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 5 2.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................................ 5 2.2 LOCATION......................................................................................................................................................... 5 2.3 FRONT VIEW:.................................................................................................................................................... 5 2.4 REAR VIEWS:.................................................................................................................................................... 6 2.5 ELECTRICAL...................................................................................................................................................... 8 Paragon-III Assembly Power.................................................................................................................. 8 2.6 ANTENNA ....................................................................................................................................................... 10 2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 10 2.6.2 Cabling and Connection ....................................................................................................................... 10 2.7 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 10 2.8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION............................................................................................................. 10 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 RADIO ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................................................... 11 Receiver module ................................................................................................................................................. 11 3.1.2 Exciter module ...................................................................................................................................... 12 BDLC-III module .................................................................................................................................. 12 3.1.3 Power Amp module ............................................................................................................................... 13 3.1.4 3.1.5 Speaker panel........................................................................................................................................ 13 3.1.6 Dual Power Supply module................................................................................................................... 14 3.1.7 Radio Backplane Assembly ................................................................................................................... 15 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ..................................................................................................... 16 4.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................... 16 4.2 RECOMMENDED CHECKS................................................................................................................................ 16 4.3 ADDITIONAL TEST DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 20 4.3.1 Carrier deviations ................................................................................................................................. 20 4.3.2 RF Data Link Test ................................................................................................................................. 21 RADIO PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................... 22 5.1 SERIES II RADIO PROGRAMMING .................................................................................................................... 22 5.1.1 Recommended Items.............................................................................................................................. 22 5.1.2 Module Programming ........................................................................................................................... 22 5.1.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches ..................................................................................................... 25 5.2 SERIES II RADIO TUNING................................................................................................................................ 26 Test Equipment...................................................................................................................................... 26 5.2.1 Receiver module (T885-xx-0200, T855-xx-0250).................................................................................. 26 5.2.2 Exciter Module (T881-xx-0200,T857-xx-0250)..................................................................................... 29 5.2.3 5.2.4 Power Amplifier Module (T889 (800-870 MHz only), T859)................................................................ 32 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 38 4. 5. 6. 120 20190-001 ii Paragon-III Technical Manual FIGURE 1 - TYPICAL RACK-MOUNT MULTI-MODULES "RADIO ASSEMBLY" .................................................................... 5 FIGURE 2 - TYPICAL RACK-MOUNT DUAL "POWER SUPPLY" .......................................................................................... 5 FIGURE 3- BASE STATION STANDARD ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................... 6 FIGURE 4 - BASE STATION STANDARD ASSEMBLY, WITH 3RD PARTY DC SUPPLY MODULE.............................................. 7 FIGURE 5 - MAXI-FUSE .................................................................................................................................................. 9 FIGURE 6 - RECEIVER MODULE .................................................................................................................................... 11 FIGURE 7 - POWER AMP MODULE................................................................................................................................. 13 FIGURE 8 - SPEAKER MODULE...................................................................................................................................... 13 FIGURE 9 - DUAL POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL........................................................................................... 14 FIGURE 10 - DUAL POWER SUPPLY, REAR CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................. 15 FIGURE 11 - 280 03425-001 RADIO BACKPLANE ......................................................................................................... 15 FIGURE 12 - CARRIER DEVIATIONS FOR TONE OR DATA MODULATION ........................................................................ 20 FIGURE 13 - RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION SAMPLE .............................................................................................. 23 FIGURE 14 - RECEIVER CHANNEL INFORMATION SAMPLE............................................................................................ 23 FIGURE 15 - EXCITER SYSTEM INFOMATION SAMPLE .................................................................................................. 24 FIGURE 16 - EXCITER CHANNEL INFORMATION SAMPLE ............................................................................................ 24 FIGURE 17 - BACKPLANE DIP SWITCHES EXAMPLE - CHANNEL 1 SELECTED ............................................................... 25 FIGURE 18 - T855 AND T885, TYPICAL RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM.......................................................................... 29 FIGURE 19 - T859 TUNING SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................... 33 FIGURE 20 - T885-0200 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION.............................................................................. 34 FIGURE 21 - T881-0200 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION................................................................................ 35 FIGURE 22 - T855 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION ....................................................................................... 36 FIGURE 23 - T857 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION ......................................................................................... 37 TABLE 1 - ON-AIR DATA SPEEDS AND MODULATION TYPES ............................................................................................ 2 TABLE 2 - POWER SUPPLY, LEDS INDICATIONS............................................................................................................. 9 TABLE 3 - CHECKLIST A (AFTER INSTALLATION)......................................................................................................... 17 TABLE 4 - CHECKLIST B (GENERAL)............................................................................................................................ 18 120 20190-001 iii Paragon-III Technical Manual WHAT'S NEW History Version 0.01: Preliminary version (April 2004) 120 20190-001 iv Paragon-III Technical Manual Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Asynchronous AVL BDLC-III E-DBA CDip DCE DTE Gemini-III IP Network Speed Paragon-III Parallel Decode Information that can be sent at random times, and not synchronized to a clock. Transmission characters begin with a start bit and end with a stop bit. Automatic Vehicle Location. Optional feature that involves using GPS (Global Positioning System) signals from the mobile unit by the Host PC. Base Station Data Link Controller (PD = Parallel decode). An async controller-

modem designed for the radio base station in mobile systems. A component of Paragon-III. Dataradios Enhanced Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation. Windows based "Commands & Data over IP" radio-modem Software. This soft-

ware allows basic tests, unit configuration, and troubleshooting. Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. High specs dual DSP mobile radiomodem with Dataradio PD technology (Paral-

lel Decode) This is the bit rate on the RF link between units. Could be different from COM port baud rate. Next generation of Paragon/PD+. Runs up to 128 kb/s Technology featuring dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments. Radio Assembly Radio modules used in Paragon-III and available in two distinct series depending on radios frequency band. Industrystandard interface for serial data transfer. Vehicular Information Solutions. Dataradios name for a series of products spe-

cially designed for mobile data. RS-232 VIS 120 20190-001 v Paragon-III Technical Manual 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides information required for the setting up, operation, testing and trouble-shooting of the DATARADIO Paragon-III radio-modem base station. 1.1 Intended Audience This document is intended for engineering, installation, and maintenance personnel. 1.2 General Description Paragon-III product is a factory-integrated industrial-grade Dataradio base station used in mobile networks and is designed specifically to fit the needs of vehicular applications. It features dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. When used with Dataradios state-of-the-art Gemini-III (G3) mobile IP data solution, the system delivers unequaled high-speed data performance and unmatched effective throughput. All Paragon-III models are supplied in a rack-mount configuration that includes:

A Paragon-III full-duplex Radio-modem assembly that includes a Next generation high-speed Dataradio Base Station Data Link Controller module (BDLC-III) fitted in the radio chassis assembly. Duplexer and backup power units are custom furnished items. Wire line modem(s) are optional items. Laptop PC and its application software are user-supplied items. 120 20190-001 1 Paragon-III Technical Manual 1.2.1 Features:

Parallel Decode (PD) technology featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments. Fully IP based product line, using an optimized IP layer that reduces IP overhead for the RF link Sophisticated dual DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Full duplex operation in the frequency bands of 800 MHz and UHF Power output:

800 MHz model: 20W to 70W, UHF model: 20W to 100W Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

Table 1 - On-air data speeds and modulation types Modulation type SRRC4FSK SRRC8FSK SRRC16FSK Channel spacing

<25kHz (12.5 kHz, NPSPAC) 14.4 kb/s 16 kb/s 21.6 kb/s 24.0 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 32.0kb/s 25 kHz 28.8 kb/s 32 kb/s 43.2 kb/s 48kb/s 57.6 kb/s 64.0 kb/s Uses the Next generation high-efficiency Dataradio Enhanced DBA over-the-air protocol Over-the-air compatible with Gemini-III mobile products (factory settable) Out-of-band signaling enables transmission of GPS reports with no effect on system perform-

ance. Flash programmable firmware Modular design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis Paragon-III units are factory-configured based on each customers network system requirements 120 20190-001 2 Paragon-III Technical Manual 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical prob-

lems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

For Canada and International customers:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:

+1 514 737-0020

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or For U.S. customers:

DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:

Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1 770 392-0002 1 770 392-9199 120 20190-001 3 Paragon-III Technical Manual 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is usually not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of individual radio modules. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair logic, modem boards, and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service information before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the prob-

lem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should a question arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Packaging Each Paragon-III product normally leaves the factory packaged as follows:

A Series II Dataradio base station Radio-modem assembly A dual power supply assembly Standard seven-foot 120VAC power cords Two DC power cables to connect the radio assembly to the dual power supply assembly. Frequently, Paragon-III product components are field-assembled prior to customer delivery. The cabinetry may then be supplied in one of several custom rack-mount configurations that may also include fan, backhaul modems, duplexer/filters/combiners, and ancillary equipment. If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. 120 20190-001 4 Paragon-III Technical Manual 2. Installation 2.1 Overview The cabinet and rack-mount housing the Paragon-IIIs radio assembly and the BDLC-III is generally installed in a sheltered facility. Occasionally located adjacent to the nerve center of the users network, it is often located near tower sites or at remote locations where it operates unattended. Furnishings needed include power, cabling, and installation of antenna, landline or microwave mo-

dem, and host PC or portable computer. Details of these are outside the scope of this manual. This manual covers the radio assembly and the BDLC-III that includes the modem. 2.2 Location Be sure to place the Paragon-III in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna connector and to the back connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling. 2.3 Front View:

Air Flow Receiver BDLC-III Excellence in Radio Communications Receiver Exciter Power Amplifier Speaker Panel Gating Sensitivity Gate Supply Line Level Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute Gating Sensitivity Gate Carrier On Supply Line Sensitivity Line Level Supply Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute SPEAKER SELECT SWITCH RX1 RX2 OFF Supply Low Forward Power High Reverse Power Power Microphone programming port Figure 1 - Typical rack-mount multi-modules "Radio Assembly"

Dual Power Supply Module OL Stby On Power OL Stby On Power Figure 2 - Typical rack-mount dual "Power Supply"

T800 II Slimline 120 20190-001 5 Paragon-III Technical Manual 2.4 Rear Views:

Figure 3- Base Station standard assembly 18 15 For Cable Assembly details, see drawing 730-03439-002 18 18

1 RTB2

RTB1 18 120 20190-001 6 Paragon-III Technical Manual Figure 4 - Base Station standard assembly, with 3rd party DC supply module

RTB1 1 For Cable Assembly details, see drawing 730-03439-002 18 15 As required RTB2

1

Third Party Power Supply 13.8VDC Nominal 120 20190-001 7 Paragon-III Technical Manual 2.5 Electrical Standard 120 VAC electrical power is required. It should be capable of providing at least 10A to power Paragon-III (<6A) and ancillary equipment. 2.5.1 Paragon-III Assembly Power Two distinct power configurations (rear views) are shown in the preceding pages. They are:

Paragon-III Base Station Standard Assy. This configuration is described in paragraph 2.5.1.1 below. Paragon-III Base Station Assy. with 3rd party DC supply (Figure 4). Refer to Dataradio System Engineering for further details. 2.5.1.1 Standard Power Supply Configuration The Radio assembly unit receives two separate 13.8 VDC power inputs from a T800 Slimline dual power supply typically rack-mounted right below the main assembly radio chassis. The T800 is made up of two separate power supply units joined in a single chassis:

A T807 using convection cooling is rated to 15A nominal at 13.8VDC. It supplies all the radio modules other than the Power Amplifier. A T808 using convection and fan cooling is rated to 25A nominal at 13.8VDC. It supplies only the Power Amplifier module (T859, or T889). Normally used at room ambient temperatures, they can operate within their specifications over a range of 10 to +60 C. Note: Internal over-temperature protection shuts down the main transformer above 105 degrees Cel-

sius. Both power supply modules are internally connected to ground via their individual, rear-connected, seven-foot standard 120 VAC power cords. Nevertheless, each requires a separate secure electrical ground connection. Individual grounding tabs are provided next to the power connectors. Similarly, the Radio Assembly chassis requires a secure ground connection. A threaded grounding binding post fitted with a knurled binding-nut is provided on the chassis next to DC input 2. Separate grounding leads with appropriate connectors are supplied (either in the courtesy small-parts kit or with one end fastened to the equipment. For each of the power supply modules, fit one end of the grounding leads push-on connector onto the grounding tab. For the Radio Assembly chassis, install the grounding leads lug over the binding post and firmly hand-tighten the binding-nut. For both T807 and T808 power supply modules 1. Fit the slotted connector (on the other end of each of the grounding connector) under a conveniently located screw on the rack frame or other support surface. Scrape away paint if needed to ensure clean contact. 2. Apply anti-corrosion compound where paint scraping was done. 3. Ensure by testing continuity that a secure electrical and mechanical connection is achieved. If a DC rail (0V) is installed as part of the system, the grounding leads may alternatively be fit-

ted to the rail terminal. Caution:

Improper grounding between power supply case and rack frame may result in harmful voltage po-

tentials and/or miscellaneous power supply switching noise problems in both receivers and trans-

mitter. 120 20190-001 8 Paragon-III Technical Manual 2.5.1.1.1 T808/807 DC Power Supply Connection & Torque Settings Warning:

Securing the DC Power Supply cable into the DC connector to provide a good electrical connection is essential. Over time, the wires tend to compress in the DC connector re-

sulting in an increasingly poorer connection. Consequently, as high current is drawn, the connector heats up increasing the resistance thereby causing still more heat until the connector eventually burns up. Although screws securing DC cables to the Power Supply terminals are tightened to the torque set-

tings given below prior to new system delivery, they must be re-tightened as part of the commis-

sioning process and re-tightening is also part of the regular maintenance schedule. Prior to replacing a Power Supply module into an existing system, inspect the cable and re-terminate the DC wires if the strands have previously been twisted together or show any sign of damage. Cut the wire at the end of the insulation and then strip approximately .4 inch (10mm) of insula-

tion off the cable. DO NOT TWIST THE WIRE STRANDS. Insert the DC cable into the screw terminal and tighten the screw to secure the cable as per the torque settings given below. Torque Settings:

The manufacturer recommends torque setting all power supply terminal screws to:

0.5 to 0.6 Nm (or 4.5 to 5.3 In/lb or to .37 to .44 ft/lb) Note: Dataradio uses a Sturtuvan Richmond 29-pieces adjustable torque screwdriver model CAL36/4K. After tightening, pull on the cable to check the cable is secured tightly into the screw terminal. 2.5.1.1.2 Power Indications Press both red power buttons located on the front of the module to have complete power distri-

bution to the Radio assembly. The power supply front panel LEDs indications are:

Table 2 - Power Supply, LEDs indications LED On Stby OL Color Green Red Steady Red On & OL Flashing green and red respectively Indication Power enabled *

Power disabled *

Current Overload Over voltage

* To remove voltage from the power supply PCB, disconnect the main power cords. For other Paragon-III LEDs descriptions, see section Error! Reference source not found. 2.5.1.2 Backplane Fuses Blade fuses (Maxi-Fuse) are used on the Radio assembly backplane (see Figure 5):

Fuse Type Dimensions Inch (mm) A B C Maxi-Fuse 1.15 (29.21) 1.35 (34.29)

.35 (8.89) Figure 5 - Maxi-Fuse 120 20190-001 9 Paragon-III Technical Manual 2.6 Antenna 2.6.1 Overview Paragon-III commonly uses three antennas (one transmit and two receive) unless a duplexer is used with one of the receive antennas; then only two antennas would be needed. They should be mounted according to any guidelines supplied with the antennas. For antennas placement and spacing, consult System Engineering. 2.6.2 Cabling and Connection 1- Route good quality 50-ohm double-shielded coaxial cable(s) (e.g. RG-214 or Heliax) from the selected antenna position(s) to the Paragon-III Radio assembly. 2- Terminate the RX-1 and RX-2 cable-ends at the Receiver modules rear position with an N-type connector. 3- Similarly, terminate the TX cable-end at the Power Amps module rear position with an N-type connector. Caution:

When terminating RF cables use brand-name crimping tools (such as AMP, Jensen, Crimp-Master, etc) of the correct size for the cable and type of connector used. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. 2.7 Completing the physical Installation. Paragon-III products are factory-configured to users requirements and are shipped ready to run. After new installations:

Re-check that all connections are secure on the radio-BDLC assemblies (antennas, PC, power cords etc.) Check that fuses are inserted. Turn both BDLC-III and radio power ON. You are now ready to check for normal operation (as per paragraph 2.8) and to run the Dataradio CDip program for testing or trouble-shooting. Any change(s) to the settings must be done via files saved on diskette and loaded into the unit using the CDip program. 2.8 Checking out Normal Operation 1- Check that power is applied. 2- Check Radio assembly lights for proper operation as per section 3.1.1 3- Check for proper operation of the BDLC-IIIs LEDs. 4- Using the CDip program and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to confirm main antenna installation 5- Using CDip, check the RF Data Link with a mobile that can be heard (as per section 4.3.1) If user application and mobiles are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 120 20190-001 10 Paragon-III Technical Manual 3. Operating Description 3.1 Radio Assembly The Radio assembly component of each Paragon product is made up of high performance synthesized radio base station designed for single operation. The Radio Assemblys modules are commonly installed in a standard, 19-inch wide rack frame. The complement of modules is identical for Series II UHF, and 800 MHz models:

2 x Receivers 1 x Exciter 1 x BDLC-III (controller-modem) 1 x Power Amplifier 1 x Speaker panel 1 x Dual Power Supply 3.1.1 Receiver module The RX1 and RX2 receivers use identical front panel controls and indicators. These are:

Gating Sensitivity - sets the RF signal level required to open the mute gate and allow audio to pass to the speaker1. Gate LED - indicates the status of the mute circuit. It is lit when a signal above the mute threshold is received1. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is applied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Line Level - Not used Monitor Volume - The audio output delivers up to 1 watt to the speaker. Always set volume knob to minimum when not in use to reduce current consumption. Monitor Mute Switch - opens the mute, allowing continuous monitoring of the audio signal. On = audio muted Receiver Gating Sensitivity Gate Line Level Supply Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute Gating Sensitivity Gate LED Line Level Monitor Volume Monitor Mute On - Off 1 Gating Sensitivity and Gate LED are not functionally used except to allow listening to incoming receptions as a trouble-shooting aid. Depending on the sensitivity adjustment, the Gate LED lights and a relay can be heard on incoming RF signals. Figure 6 - Receiver module 120 20190-001 11 Paragon-III Technical Manual 3.1.2 Exciter module The Exciters front panel controls and indicators are:

Carrier Switch - momentarily keys the transmitter ON while pressed (used for test purposes only). On LED - is lit when transmitting Line Sensitivity not used. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is applied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Microphone Socket not used. Exciter Carrier On Supply Line Sensitivity Microphone Carrier Switch On LED Supply LED Line Sensitivity Microphone Socket 3.1.3 BDLC-III module The BDLC-III's front panel connectors and indicators are:

2x DE-9 RS-232 ports for setup and user data 4x main unit status LED 2x Ethernet ports for setup and user data 2x Ethernet LEDs (status & activity) USB port reserved. 120 20190-001 12 Paragon-III Technical Manual 3.1.4 Power Amp module The Power Amp front panel and indicators are:

Power Amplifier Supply Low Forward Power High Reverse Power Power Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Low Forward Power LED - is lit when for-

ward power is below the level set, normally 80% of nominal forward power. High Reverse Power LED - is lit when high reverse power is detected (e.g. VSWR= 3:1). Power - sets the PA output power:

- UHF models: 20 - 100 Watts

800 model: 20-70 Watts Supply LED Low Forward Power LED High Reverse Power LED Power Adjustment F igure 7 - Power Amp module 3.1.5 Speaker panel The speaker panel is fitted with a four- speaker. Both series of radio assemblies share the same front panel fitted with an RJ11 connector. This connector is used to allow programming the radio from the front of the unit via a programming lead. This feature is exclu-

sive to the Series II modules. If the speaker panel needs to be removed, a mirror programming port connector is provided on the backplane. S peaker Panel SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 OFF programm ing p ort Not Used with 800 MHz Series I model Figure 8 - Speaker module 120 20190-001 13 Paragon-III Technical Manual 3.1.6 Dual Power Supply module The Dual Power Supply module is made up of two separate power supply units coupled in a single chassis. Refer to:

Table 2 on page 9 for tabular listing of power supply LEDs indicators and Figure 9 below. This module has:

Two Power red-colored pushbutton switches - Push in for ON and release out for OFF. Control complete power distribution to the Radio assembly Two ON LEDs - light green when push button(s) is (are) ON; DC power is distributed to radio modules. Flash green in conjunction with the OL LED (flashing red) when an over voltage condition is present. Two Stby- Standby voltage LED, lights red when push button is off; AC power is applied but DC is not distributed to radio modules. To remove presence of voltage, disconnect both power cords. Two OL LEDs - Monitor current overload, light steady red when supply exceeds current limit set; nominally 25Amps (T808 model). Flashes red in conjunction with the ON LED (flashing green) when an over voltage condition is present. Dual Power Supply Module OL Stby On Power OL Stby On Power Figure 9 - Dual Power Supply Module front panel T800 II Slimline 120 20190-001 14 Paragon-III Technical Manual 3.1.6.1 Power Supply Rear Connections The rear connections (convection-cooled model shown; fan-cooled model not illustrated) for each of the power supply are:

Fail Alarm Off: Power supply OK; approx. +Vout (via 1k resistor - typ. 13.8V). ON: Power supply failure; approx. -Vout (via 11k resistors - typ. 0V)

+ Remote Not used for Paragon

- Sense Not used for Paragon

-VE main ground (0V)

+13.8V Mains DC output supply Note: more power supply installation details are covered in section 2.5.1 R e m o e S e n s e O u p u A a r m 1 3 8 V M a x

. 1 5 A F a i l t t t

. l F

igure 10 - Dual power supply, rear connections 3.1.7 Radio Backplane Assembly A single PCB backplane is used. The main components are:

RJ11 connectors (J11, J12) connects to the Speaker panel front RJ11. Used for program-

ming the Radio modules. DB-25F port to ancillary equipement One channel-select DIP switch (SW1) Cooling fan driver TB 3 located on backplane connects to the horizontally-mounted fan on top of the Radio assembly and activated by BDLCs PTT signal (setting JP1 2-3 will power the fan continuously). 30 A Fuse (F2 & F3) two blade fuses (15ADC) in parallel are used for future Power am-

10 A Fuse (F1) one blade fuse to power the other base station components (receivers, ex-

plifier citer and optionally the BDLC). Top fan 13.8VDC input from T808-10-00CA Maxi-Fuse - 10 Amp. 13.8VDC input from T807-10-00CA RS-232 DE25F To BDLC 1 2 3 J2 J1 1 8 J6 J5 1 8 P.A. diags signals

(future use) Molex connector JP1 - Fan Control Maxi-Fuses - 2 x 15 Amp. 13.8 VDC output to T889 or T859 P.A. Figure 11 - 280 03425-001 Radio backplane RJ 45 Connectors #1 120 20190-001 15 Paragon-III Technical Manual monitor. 4. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at time of installation, annual intervals, or whenever de-

terioration in performance is noted. 4.1 Equipment Required In-line watt meter (150W & 10 W ranges) Radio service monitor (IFR-120B with option 03: 30KHz IF filter or equivalent). RG-214 or RG-223 cable with N-Type male connector to connect Paragon-III to the service CDip 1.0 or later1 Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated re-

cently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation problems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months. 4.2 Recommended Checks A) After an installation 1. LED Indications 2. Using CDip, Save unit config to a file 3. Transmitter Output Power 4. Transmitter Reflected Power 5. RF Link test between Paragon-III and mobile unit(s) B) For annual maintenance & trouble-shooting Same checks as A) plus:

6. Carrier Frequency Error 7. TX Deviation 8. Low Frequency Balance 9. 12 dB SINAD 10. Receiver distortion 11. RSSI check 12. Verify power supply connections & terminals torque settings (see paragraph 2.5.1.1.1) 1 To learn how to launch the Windows-based software alignment and system-testing tool CDip, please refer to the readme.txt file on the applications installation diskette. For functional details of the numerous buttons and menu-selectable items available, please refer to the pro-

grams context sensitive help. It is also possible to access the help information via the F1 key. 120 20190-001 16 Paragon-III Technical Manual Table 3 - Checklist A (After installation) CHECKLIST A

(Paragon-III) Recommended Check out after Installation Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

1 2 3 4 5 Normal Power-up Sequence BDLC-III beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. Connect and save unit config Press CDip Get button Transmitter Output Power Press TXON (Unmod) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) RF Link test Use the mobile address function and Send but-

ton to dynamically test the link as per CDip Help content UHF: 20 - 100 watts 800 MHz: 20 - 70 watts

+10%, -10%

Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. 1Check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc.

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Engineering. 10W in-line watt-

meter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Look for Delivery confirmed on the Status bar Refer to 4.3.2 and to WinRIS Help content. Mobile is out of range Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless unit has been set a lower value). Note that readings less than 100 watts for UHF or 70 watts for 800 MHz models, may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter or the RF feedline & antenna installation. 120 20190-001 17 Paragon-III Technical Manual Step ACTION Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press CDip Get button Transmitter Output Power Table 4 - Checklist B (General) CHECKLIST B (Paragon-III) General Check out (part1 of 2) Paragon-III units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting a unit may result in significant performance losses. The proposed adjustments in the "IF NOT?" column below, should be tried ONLY if system data performance degradation is noticed combined with out-of-tolerance items. Expected Results at 25C BDLC-III beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

UHF: 20 - 100 watts 800 MHz: 20 - 70 watts Press TX ON (Unmod)

+10%, -10%

Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod)

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Engi-

neering.

< 300 Hz TX Deviation (KHz) Press TX (modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. Refer to "Figure 12 - Carrier Deviations for Tone or Data modulation" per bit rates Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. Low Frequency Balance Initiate a TX Random data test via CDip a) Record deviation level read from step 6 b) Record deviation read from TX Random test c) Difference between a) and b) should be:

< 1.5 kHz (HC &

NPSPAC)

< 2.0 kHz (FC) as per CDip Help content Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. Adjust Power on the front panel of the Power Amp 10 W in-line wattmeter Check damaged coax cable, etc. for bad connections, Service monitor set to read frequency error Service monitor set to read deviation.

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Adjust TCXO (IC700)

(see inside Exciter module at, Figure 21(800), Figure 23(UHF)) Refer to technical support Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position, all audio filtering disabled ) Refer to Section 5.2.3.4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 120 20190-001 18 Paragon-III Technical Manual CHECKLIST B (Paragon-III) General Check out (part2 of 2) Paragon-III units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting unit may result in significant performance losses. The proposed adjustments in the "IF NOT?" column below, should be tried ONLY if system data performance degradation is noticed combined with out of tolerance items. ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

25C Set the service monitor to generate on the selected receive frequency. Verify alternately for both receivers. The carrier should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation level specified below:

12 dB SINAD

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

- For Full channel unit, set deviation to 3 kHz.

- For Half & NPSPAC channel unit, set devia-

tion to 1.5 kHz Better than -108 dBm including cable loss

(Typically -109 to -110 dBm) Receiver distortion

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

- Set service monitor RF Gen output to 70 dBm

- Deviation level as per SINAD above. 5.5 %

(Typically < 3.5 %)

- Backplane corre-

sponding to the re-

ceiver being verified:

J1 (RX1) or J5 (RX2), Pin 6 (see Figure 11, page 15)

- Service monitor (IFR) set to SINAD

- IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter.

- Backplane corre-

sponding to the re-

ceiver being verified:

J1 (RX1) or J5 (RX2), Pin 6 (see Figure 11)

- Service monitor (IFR) set to DISTORTION.

- IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Refer to section 5.2.2 Refer to section 5.2.2 RSSI Apply to each receiver input the following RF level UHF & 800 Mhz:

-110dBm UHF & 800 MHz:

2.0 VDC (+/- 0.3VDC) Note:

BDLC must be connected to the radio during the measurements

- Backplane corre-

sponding to the re-

ceiver being verified:

J1 (RX1) or J5 (RX2), Pin 5 (see Figure 11)

- DC Voltmeter measurement Refer to section 5.2.2.5 for all models. Refer to factory technical support only if RX data performance degradation is noticed combined with out of tolerance RSSI readings. Step 8 9 10 120 20190-001 19 Paragon-III Technical Manual 4.3 Additional test details Carrier deviations 4.3.1 SRRC16FSK Tone Typical deviation in kHz

(1000Hz test tone) Network Speed

(b/s) 64000 57600 64000 57600 32000 28800 32000 28800 2.8 3.5 4.0 4.2 3.0 2.7 2.0 2.2 Carrier Modulation SRRC8FSK Data Maximum deviation in kHz Network Speed

(b/s) Tone Typical deviation in kHz

(1000Hz test tone) Data Maximum*

deviation in kHz Network Speed

(b/s) Full Channel (800MHz) 48000 43200 48000 43200 2.8 3.5 Full Channel (UHF) 4.0 4.2 3.7 5.0 5.8 6.2 NPSPAC Channel (800MHz - U.S. only) 24000 21600 3.0 2.7 3.9 4.2 Half-Channel (UHF & 800MHz) 24000 21600 2.0 2.2 2.6 3.3 32000 28800 32000 28.800 16000 14400 16000 14400 3.7 5.0 5.9 6.2 3.9 4.2 2.6 3.2 SRRC4FSK Tone Typical deviation in kHz

(1000Hz test tone) Data Maximum*

deviation in kHz 2.8 3.5 4.0 4.2 3.0 2.7 2.0 2.2 3.8 4.8 6.0 6.2 3.9 3.7 2.7 3.2

*Data deviation shown may seem higher than tone deviation, however they fall within the appropriate FCC / ICs masks limits Figure 12 - Carrier Deviations for Tone or Data modulation 120 20190-001 20 Paragon-III Technical Manual 4.3.2 RF Data Link Test A link test between a mobile and a known base station can be done using the CDip "Address" and

"Send" functions. The Address and Device fields, the Send button and the Chat message screen are used to send messages to specific mobile or base or to carry out RF test. Start by entering the address of the mobile (or base station) you wish to send a test message to or test:

1- Specify the address:

Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) address, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

- For Paragon-III products:

address is not in AMN or number format

- For mobile products:

address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 2- Enter the Device number for mobile (or base station). 3- Press the Send button. The Chat window reports Sent to xx mobile (where xx is mobile name). If test is successful:

Status line reports Delivery confirmed. If test unsuccessful:

Chat window reports Waiting, Then the Status line reports Delivery Failed. 120 20190-001 21 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5. Radio Programming and Adjustments All receiver procedures detailed in this section should be done twice: once for the Main (or RX1) receiver module and a second time for the Auxiliary (or RX2) receiver module. Connect to the relevant module and its corresponding backplane PCB as required. 5.1 This procedure describes the steps needed to program the Paragon-III radio base station UHF, and 800 MHz (half & full channels). Series II Radio Programming Recommended Items 486 PC or better, MS-Windows 98 or later 5.1.1

- T800win programming kit for Series II:

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software version 3.0 or later

- T800-01-0002 programming cable (DB-25 to RJ-45 cable)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) Module Programming 5.1.2 Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win soft-

ware for Series II Base station. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

- Press and hold the Alt key while pressing at the same time the relevant hotkey as indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command.

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As directory service box. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is pro-

grammed outside the radio tuning range:

800 = 3.0 MHz from previous center frequency UHF = 2.5 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter and PA alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed out-

side the radio tuning range: 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 1. Connect the PC, via the supplied programming lead, to the speaker panels front-mounted RJ11 connector. 2. Run Tait PGM800Win program and follow instructions found in the T800 Programming Software Users Manual to select the proper module to be programmed. 3. Program required channel's frequencies. Do not program any CTCSS tones on channels. Do not change any other parameters. Refer to Figure 13, Figure 14, Figure for screen program examples. 4. Save the base station programming info to a file for further reference. 120 20190-001 22 Paragon-III Technical Manual Figure 13 - Receiver System Information Sample Figure 14 - Receiver Channel Information Sample 120 20190-001 23 Paragon-III Technical Manual Figure 15 - Exciter System Infomation Sample Figure 16 - Exciter Channel Information Sample 120 20190-001 24 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.1.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches The backplane-mounted DIP switch settings override the default channel programmed by PGM800Win. To set a default channel via the software, all DIP switches must be set to OFF (i.e. 00000000). When a switch is Off, its binary count is active; when a switch is ON its binary count is inactive. The various DIP switch combinations of ON or OFF make up a binary total, which identifies the channel number. To select a channel, set the appropriate DIP switch or switches to OFF to make the binary count total the channel number you want. Set all other switches to ON. Example: To select channel 1, set the DIP switches as shown below:

Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Always ON except when default channel is required O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X R

I X T H C T W S L E N N A H C Figure 17 - Backplane DIP switches example - Channel 1 selected 120 20190-001 25 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2 Series II Radio Tuning This section covers some basic Series II base station modules radio tuning and verification for:

- UHF (T85x-xx-0250) and

800 MHz MHz (T88x-xx-0200). Note: Usually, this section is never done unless called for in section 5.1 Series II - Radio Program-

ming or in Table 4 - Checklist B (General)Checklist B (General). To identify the radio modules, check the part number on the manufacturers label at the back of the Receiver, Exciter, and Power Amplifier modules:

TX T881-1x-0200 (800-870 MHz) T881-1x-0200 (800-870 MHz) T881-3x-0200 (890-960 MHz) T881-3x-0200 (890-960 MHz) T857-1x-0250 (400 - 440 MHz) T857-2x-0250 (440 - 480 MHz) T857-3x-0250 (480 - 520 MHz) PA T889-10 (850-870 MHz) TPL- PA8-2BF-LMS (890-960) T859-10-0000 (400 - 440 MHz) T859-20-0000 (440 - 480 MHz) T859-30-0000 (480 -520 MHz) RX T885-10-0200 (800-870 MHz, 25kHz) T885-15-0200 (800-870 MHz, 12.5kHz

& NPSPAC) T885-30-0200 (890-960 MHz, 25kHz) T885-35-0200 (890-960 MHz, 12.5kHz) T855-10-0250 (400 - 440 MHz, 25kHz) T855-15-0250 (400 - 440 MHz, 12.5kHz) T855-20-0250 (440 - 480 MHz, 25kHz) T855-25-0250 (440 - 480 MHz, 12.5kHz) T855-30-0250 (480 - 530 MHz, 25kHz) T855-35-0250 (480 - 530 MHz, 12.5kHz) 5.2.1 Test Equipment 3-foot length of double-shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar).

- Digital Multimeter & probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

1 HP 34330A Shunt 30A (UHF only, used for transmitter current measurement)

- Digital or Analog calibrated Oscilloscope & scope probes (X1, X10 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (.001ppm OCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x Six-inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

3dB 150watt attenuator 1x Torx screwdriver #T-10 and #T-20 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (comes with the radio to connect the exciter to the PA) 5.2.2 Receiver module (T885-xx-0200, T855-xx-0250) Note 1: Refer to Figure 20 (T885), Figure 22 (T855) Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning, The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 120 20190-001 26 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during all receiver alignment procedures described below:

1. Remove the receiver (T885, T855) module from the Paragon-III rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the Paragon-III Extender Rail Kit for Series II to the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Prepare the Multimeter to DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the Paragon-III. 5.2.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the Multimeter to either side of L504 (T885) or the long lead of L1

(T855) in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T885 (800 MHz) Tune VCO trimmer CV500 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10VDC. 2. T855 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. Multiple channels (adjusting as shown for single channel above):

1. T885 (800 MHz) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 2. T855 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 3. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of respectively All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T885 and T855 or within 13V. 5.2.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1. IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel frequency c) Select and turn-on GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1KHz sine e) Select SINAD meter f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the back-

plane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver I/O Pad P207 (T885), the receiver TP314 (T855). 2. Adjust the helical resonators for best SINAD: #H400, #H401 and #H900 (T885); #FL410 and #FL420

(T855). 3. Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do step 2) & 3) again. The absolute minimum requirement level to reach is -108dBm (typical level is -109 to -110 dBm) 4. Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in paragraph 5.2.2.4. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. WARNING: Do NOT attempt to re-tune the IF stages

(I.e. L300 and L301 for T885, L310 to L390 for T855 or L330 to L360). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the modem DSP ISI coefficient settings and may reduce signifi-

cantly the radio performances over data. 120 20190-001 27 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR COM-120:

a) Generator mode, Output T/R, TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency b) Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) c) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off. d) Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios. e) Use a X1 scope probe connected to the IFR SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the radio backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver I/O Pad P207 (T885), the receiver TP314 (T855). 2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level should be better than -108dBm (including ca-

ble loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2kHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half / NPSPAC channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5 dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. For T885 and T855, use above values. 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half / NPSPAC channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5 dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. For T885 and T855, use above values. Note: If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-end. If still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20190-001 28 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.2.5 RSSI Adjustment

- Caution: mis-adjusting RSSI may reduce the Paragon-III's Parallel Decode (PD) performance.

- BDLC-III must be connected to the radio chassis assembly during this process. 1. T885-xx-0200 (800 MHz) and T855-xx-0250 (UHF) receivers:

Refer to Figure 20 - T885-0200 Receiver Tuning Controls location or

- Figure 22 - T855 Receiver Tuning Controls location

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110 dBm modulated by a 1 kHz tone at a deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half / NPSPAC channel).

- Adjust RV 345 (RSSI level) for T885, RV320 (RSSI level) for T855 to give 2.0V RSSI output at SK330 pin 2 (T855) or on backplane J1 (RX1) or J5 (RX2) pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter (See Figure 11 - 280 03425-001 Radio backplane for test point location). The following RSSI graphics are given as general information only. Refer to factory technical support only if RX data performance degradation is noticed combined with something that does not look like those RSSI curves.

-80

-70 dBm

-120 -110 -100 -90 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 e g a t l o V Figure 18 - T855 and T885, Typical RSSI Curve: volt to dBm 5.2.3 Exciter Module (T881-xx-0200,T857-xx-0250) Note 1: Refer to Figure 21 (T881), Figure 23 (T857) for locating tuning controls and components. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indi-

cating that it needs re-tuning. Warning:

The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 5.2.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station. 2. Prepare the Multimeter to DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T881, T857) module from the base station rack frame. 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the exciter antenna connector. 6. Connect the Paragon-III Extender Rail Kit to the empty chassis exciter slot. 7. Apply power to the base station. 120 20190-001 29 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the Multimeter to either side of L309 (T881) or the long lead of L1 in the VCO (T857) (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T881 (800 MHz) Tune VCO trimmer CV300 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T857 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. Multiple channels (adjusting as shown for single channel above):

1. T881 (800 MHz) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. 2. T857 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T881 and T857 or within 13V. Note:

Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. In the case where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 5.2.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-Key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO (IC700) to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 120 20190-001 30 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.3.4 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment Note:

PGM800Win version 3.00 or later must be used. Electronic potentiometer (256 step) is used to allow channel adjustment of two-point modulation (Low freq. balance). 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source Demod out connector, DC coupled). Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch, refer to Figure ) 3. Transmit a square wave by using CDip (using a second serial port). 4. Press EPOTs button. Adjust IC220 via PGM800Win reference modulation to obtain the best square wave, no damping, no overshoot. (You can use either the mouse or up and down arrow keys). Record the deviation read. 5. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 8. 6. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave via CDip and record deviation again. 7. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300Hz. If not, re-

adjust IC220 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 8. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare the de-

viation produced between 1000 Hz sine wave test tone and Random data test pattern The difference between the test tone and the test pattern should be:

For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel.

< 1.6 kHz (SRC4FSK, SRC8FSK: HC & NPSPAC)

< 2.1 kHz (SRC4FSK, SRC8FSK, SRC16FSK: FC) 9. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone via CDip. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use. Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to Checklist B at step 6, page . 5.2.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power at the coaxial cable end connecting to the power amplifier should be:

- UHF (T857) = 1W 300mW (no adjustment provided)

800 MHz (T881) = 4W 300mW (RV502, Figure 21) 120 20190-001 31 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.4 Power Amplifier Module (T889 (800-870 MHz only), T859)

- Re-install the exciter module into the Paragon-III rack frame.

- Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier.

- Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load.

- Forward and reverse power alarm set (control) are identified on the PA cover. 5.2.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Output

- Key the transmitter on the exciter and adjust the PA output for required output (max 100W for UHF and max 70W for 800) using the front panel power control If power cannot be reached, refer to section 5.2.4.4 for T859 UHF model, or factory technical support for T889 models. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 5.2.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level (Optional setting) 1. Power up the PA and adjust front panel power control so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA normally operates at 50W). 2. Adjust the forward power alarm set (T889: RV101and T859: RV48) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust front panel power control for the normal operating power level 5.2.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional setting) 1. Power up the PA and adjust the front panel power control for the normal operating power level. 2. Connect an unterminated 3dB 150 W pad to the PA output (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust the reverse power alarm set (T889: RV105 and T859: RV52) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. 120 20190-001 32 Paragon-III Technical Manual 5.2.4.4 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure 1. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, set RV69 (driver power level) fully clockwise. 2. For all units, preset the tuning controls as shown in Figure 19 Figure 19 - T859 Tuning settings 3. Set RV63 (front panel power control) fully clockwise. 4. Key on the exciter (press PTT button). 5. Adjust CV1 for maximum output. 6. Adjust CV8 for maximum output. 7. Adjust CV32 for maximum output. 8. Adjust CV51 and CV57 for maximum output. 9. Adjust CV34 and CV35 for maximum output. 10. Recheck all settings. The power output should exceed 110W. 11. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, adjust RV69 (driver power level) until 12. For all units, adjust RV63 (front panel power control) to reduce the power output to the required the output power drops to 110W. level (normally 100W). 5.2.4.5 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency 1. Insert a Shunt current device (HP 34330A Shunt 30A ) between the power supply red wire and its 13.8Vdc output, then connect the shunt to the multimeter (VDC scale) 2. While transmitting, monitor the current. It should remain under 22A. 3. Retune CV32, CV51 and CV57 towards maximum capacitance to obtain minimum supply cur-

rent, but do not exceed a maximum drop of 0.5A per control. 4. Check that the supply current is <22A for 100W output power. Note: These control settings are normally very close to minimum supply current. If the current is re-

duced too far, maximum power output will drop and 2f rejection may degrade. 120 20190-001 33 Paragon-III Technical Manual Figure 20 - T885-0200 Receiver Tuning Controls location 120 20190-001 34 Paragon-III Technical Manual Figure 21 - T881-0200 Exciter Tuning Controls location 120 20190-001 35 Paragon-III Technical Manual IC 310 SK330 pin 2 Figure 22 - T855 Receiver Tuning Controls location 120 20190-001 36 Paragon-III Technical Manual TCXO Figure 23 - T857 Exciter Tuning Controls location 120 20190-001 37 Paragon-III Technical Manual 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency RF/Modem Assembly Size Frequency Stability Supply Voltage UHF 400 - 440 MHz1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 800 - 870 MHz 19.0 W x 17.5.0 H x 12.5 D + 2.0 connector allowance 1.0 ppm (-20 to +60C) 13.8 VDC nominal (negative ground), 10.8 - 16 VDC or 120 VAC Main fuse (F1): Blade fuse (Maxi-Fuse) 10A :

Circuit protection (radio backplane) Power amp. fuse (F2 & F3): Blade fuses (Maxi-Fuse) 2 x 15A (30A total) RX Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC TX Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC Base Station Power Consumption

@ 120 VAC Channel spacing Crowbar diodes for reverse polarity protection 1.5A max. (Two receivers with speaker monitoring) 24A (22A DC typical @

450MHz for 100W) 28A (23A DC typical @ 850MHz for 70W) 6A max. 25 kHz and 12.5 kHz Operating Temperature Range

-30C to +60C (deleted power supply, catalog number with 0 in second to last digit)

-10C to +60C (with standard Dual Power Supply assy., catalog number with 2 in second to last digit) RECEIVER Selectivity @ 25 kHz

@ 12.5 kHz Sensitivity @ 12 dB SINAD Spurious Response Rejection Intermodulation Rejection

- EIA (25 kHz)

- EIA 300-096 (12.5 kHz) Hum and Noise

- EIA (25 kHz)

- ETS 300-096 (12.5 kHz)

* Psophometrically weighted (De-emphasis response) TRANSMITTER Rated Continuous RF Power Range of Adjustment Spurious Emissions: - transmit

- standby VSWR Stability Transmitter Sideband Noise

@ +/-25 kHz

@ +/- 1 MHz 87 dB min, 90 dB (Typical) 83 dB min, 85 dB (Typical) 85 dB min, 88 dB (Typical) 79 dB min, 80 dB (Typical)

-116 dBm*

100 dB (Typical) 85 dB (Typical) 80 dB (Typical) 55 dB*

50 dB*

80 dB (Typical) 75 dB (Typical) 47 dB*

45 dB*

100W 20 100 W 70W 20 70 W

-36 dBm to 1GHz, -30 dBm to 4 GHz (to 3.2GHz for 800 model)

-57 dBm to 1GHz, -47 dBm to 4 GHz ((to 3.2GHz for 800 model)) 5:1 mismatch

-95 dBc

-105 dBc

-88 dBc

-100 dBc 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20190-001 38 Paragon-III Technical Manual Operation Protocol Data rates and Modulation type Rx Sensitivity for 1%

Packet Error Rate with Parallel Decode, at carrier frequency Dataradio Proprietary NextGen with OOB AAVL support Full duplex SRRC4FSK (14400 b/s, 16000 b/s, 28800 b/s, 32000 b/s) SRRC8FSK (21600 b/s, 24000 b/s, 43200 b/s, 48000 b/s) SRRC16FSK ( 28800 b/s, 32000b/s, 57600 b/s 64000b/s ) UHF

(Full channel) UHF

(Half channel) 800 MHz

(full channel) 800 MHz

(NPSPAC) TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS FCC IC (DOC) *

UHF 800 MHz Series II 400 - 440 MHz 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz EOTBDD4T85-1 EOTBDD4T85-2 EOTBDD4T85-3 EOTBDD4T881S2 (4Watts) EOTBDD4T889 (70 Watts) 773A-BDD4T85 N/A 773A-BDD4T88

* Operating under Class II permissive change, approval pending for technical reassessment EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate Baud rate Pulse shaping UHF 800MHz 4FSK 8FSK 16FSK 32000 48000 64000 28800 43200 57600 16000 24000 32000 16000 14400 8000 SRRC SRRC SRRC 16K5F1D (C) 16K2F1D (C) 8K50F1D (D) 14400 21600 28800 7200 SRRC 8K67F1D (D) 13K6F1D (G) 13K4F1D (G) 10K0F1D (H) TBD (D) 10K7F1D (H) TBD (D) 120 20190-001 39 Paragon-III Technical Manual

 

 

ParagonPD Data Base Station Technical Manual Version 2.01 Preliminary, for Internal Use Only The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2001 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. May 2001 Part no.: 120 20170-201 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................................................1 Features:..................................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .......................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 Factory Repair.........................................................................................................................................2 1.5.2 Model Designation...................................................................................................................................3 1.6 RADIO SERIES I OR II.........................................................................................................................................3 1.7 PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................4 2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................4 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................................4 2.2 LOCATION .........................................................................................................................................................4 2.3 ELECTRICAL ......................................................................................................................................................4 Radio Assembly Power ............................................................................................................................7 BDLCPD assembly Power.........................................................................................................................8 2.4 ANTENNA ..........................................................................................................................................................8 2.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................8 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection ..........................................................................................................................8 2.5 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ....................................................................................................8 2.6 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION................................................................................................................9 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................9 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.1.5.1 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2 3.1.1.3 3.1.1.4 3.1.1.5 3.1 RADIO ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................................................................9 Front panels.............................................................................................................................................9 Receiver module ............................................................................................................................................. 9 Exciter module.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Power Amp module ...................................................................................................................................... 10 Speaker panel................................................................................................................................................ 10 Dual Power Supply module .......................................................................................................................... 11 Rear Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 11 Radio Assembly, rear panel ...................................................................................................................11 Backplane PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 11 3.2 BDLCPD ..........................................................................................................................................................12 BDLCPD Front panel..............................................................................................................................12 Front Switches .............................................................................................................................................. 12 Reset......................................................................................................................................................... 12 PF 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 12 LEDs and Indications.................................................................................................................................... 14 Radio Network Indicators ........................................................................................................................ 14 3.2.1.2.1 RS-232 Port Indicators............................................................................................................................. 14 3.2.1.2.2 3.2.1.2.3 Check and Power ..................................................................................................................................... 15 3.2.1.2.4 Alarm Indicators....................................................................................................................................... 15 BDLCPD Rear panel ...............................................................................................................................16 Signal Levels................................................................................................................................................. 16 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.1.1.1 3.2.1.1.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.1 3.2.2 3.2.1 4. WINRIS PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................18 4.1 OPERATION .....................................................................................................................................................18 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START WINRIS...................................................................................................................18 4.3 WINDOW .........................................................................................................................................................19 120 20170-201 ii ParagonPD Technical Manual 4.4.4 4.4.3.1 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4 FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................................................20 4.4.1 Station Reset button...........................................................................................................................20 4.4.2 Configuration to a file ...........................................................................................................................20 Get button.................................................................................................................................................. 21 Get As button............................................................................................................................................. 21 4.4.3 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................21 Put From button......................................................................................................................................... 21 Special Functions...................................................................................................................................21 Banner Field.................................................................................................................................................. 22 Comments ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 22 Test Functions........................................................................................................................................22 DSR signal is High indicator ........................................................................................................................ 22 CTS signal is High indicator......................................................................................................................... 23 Channel Selection ......................................................................................................................................... 23 TXON Tests.................................................................................................................................................. 23 4.4.5.4.1 Unmodulated Carrier................................................................................................................................ 23 4.4.5.4.2 Modulated Carrier .................................................................................................................................... 23 Ping Button ................................................................................................................................................... 24 Status Bar ..............................................................................................................................................24 4.4.5.1 4.4.5.2 4.4.5.3 4.4.5.4 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 4.4.5.5 4.4.6 4.4.5 5. TESTING AND TROUBLE-SHOOTING ......................................................................................................25 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED....................................................................................................................................25 5.2 RECOMMENDED CHECKS.................................................................................................................................25 6. RADIO PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................29 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.1 SERIES I 800MHZ RADIO PROGRAMMING.......................................................................................................29 Recommended Items ..............................................................................................................................29 6.1.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................29 6.1.2 File Creation..........................................................................................................................................30 6.1.3 Programming the EPROM.....................................................................................................................31 6.1.4 EPROM Installation ..............................................................................................................................32 6.1.5 6.1.6 Channel Selection via DIP Switches......................................................................................................32 6.2 SERIES I 800MHZ RADIO TUNING...................................................................................................................33 Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................................33 Receiver Module (T885) ........................................................................................................................34 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 34 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 34 Front-End Alignment .................................................................................................................................... 34 SINAD and Linearity Check ......................................................................................................................... 35 RSSI Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Exciter Module (T881)...........................................................................................................................36 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 36 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 36 TX Frequency Error Adjustment................................................................................................................... 36 Low Frequency Balance Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37 Exciter Power Output.................................................................................................................................... 37 Power Amplifier Module (T889)............................................................................................................38 Power Amplifier Power Out.......................................................................................................................... 38 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 38 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 38 6.3 SERIES II RADIO PROGRAMMING.....................................................................................................................41 6.3.1 Recommended Items ..............................................................................................................................41 6.3.2 Module Programming............................................................................................................................41 6.3.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches......................................................................................................44 6.4 SERIES II RADIO TUNING.................................................................................................................................45 Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................................45 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.3.3 6.2.3.4 6.2.3.5 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.4.1 120 20170-201 iii ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2 Receiver module (T855 & T835)............................................................................................................45 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 45 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 46 Front-End Alignment .................................................................................................................................... 46 SINAD and Linearity Check ......................................................................................................................... 46 RSSI Adjustment (UHF: T855) .................................................................................................................... 47 RSSI Adjustment (VHF: T835) .................................................................................................................... 48 Exciter Module (T857, T837 or T881)...................................................................................................49 Initial Setup................................................................................................................................................... 49 Synthesizer Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 49 TX Frequency Error Adjustment................................................................................................................... 49 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 50 Exciter Power Output.................................................................................................................................... 51 Power Amplifier Module (T859 or T839) ..............................................................................................51 Power Amplifier Power Output .................................................................................................................... 51 Forward Power Alarm Level......................................................................................................................... 51 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 51 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure .............................................................................................. 52 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency ........................................................................................................... 52 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.2.6 6.4.3.1 6.4.3.2 6.4.3.3 6.4.3.4 6.4.3.5 6.4.4.1 6.4.4.2 6.4.4.3 6.4.4.4 6.4.4.5 6.4.3 6.4.4 7. SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................................................58 APPENDIX 1 - PARAGON PD DEVIATION ADJUST.........................................................................................................57 FIGURE 1 TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLIES, FRONT VIEW...................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BDLCPD, FRONT VIEW..................................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 TYPICAL RADIO AND POWER SUPPLIES ASSEMBLY, REAR VIEW ....................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - BDLCPD, REAR VIEW....................................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 5 - BDLCPDS REAR CONNECTION, SWITCH AND FUSE .......................................................................................8 FIGURE 6 - RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL.................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 7 - EXCITER MODULE, FRONT PANEL................................................................................................................10 FIGURE 8 - POWER AMP MODULE, FRONT PANEL..........................................................................................................10 FIGURE 9 - SPEAKER PANEL..........................................................................................................................................11 FIGURE 10 - DUAL POWER SUPPLY REAR CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................11 FIGURE 11 - BDLCPD MEMBRANE SWITCHES ...............................................................................................................12 FIGURE 12 - RF INDICATORS ........................................................................................................................................14 FIGURE 13 - RS-232 PORT LED INDICATORS ...............................................................................................................15 FIGURE 14 - ALARMS LED INDICATORS ....................................................................................................................15 FIGURE 15 - BDLCPD Y CABLE AND PINOUT ................................................................................................................17 FIGURE 16 - WINRIS MAIN SCREEN..............................................................................................................................19 FIGURE 17 - SELECT PORT DIALOG WINDOW.............................................................................................................20 FIGURE 18 - SERIES I RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ..............................................................................................30 FIGURE 19 - SERIES I CHANNEL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................31 FIGURE 20 - CHANNEL SELECTION VIA INTERNAL DIP SWITCHES.................................................................................33 FIGURE 21 - T885 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROL LOCATION ..........................................................................................39 FIGURE 22 - T881 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION...........................................................................................40 FIGURE 23 - RECEIVER SYSTEM INFORMATION ............................................................................................................42 FIGURE 24 - RECEIVER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN.............................................................................................42 FIGURE 25 - EXCITER SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN .................................................................................................43 FIGURE 26 - EXCITER CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN...............................................................................................43 FIGURE 27 - BACKPLANE DIP SWITCHES EXAMPLE - CHANNEL 5 SELECTED................................................................44 FIGURE 28 - T855 AND T885, RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM.........................................................................................47 FIGURE 29 - T835, RSSI CURVE: VOLT TO DBM .........................................................................................................48 FIGURE 30 T800-50-0001 BACKPLANE AND TEST PINS LOCATION.............................................................................48 FIGURE 31 - T859 TUNING SETTINGS ...........................................................................................................................52 120 20170-201 iv ParagonPD Technical Manual FIGURE 32 - T855 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .......................................................................................53 FIGURE 33 - T857 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATIONS .......................................................................................54 FIGURE 34 - T835 RECEIVER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .......................................................................................55 FIGURE 35 - T837 EXCITER TUNING CONTROLS LOCATION .........................................................................................56 TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY LEDS INDICATIONS ..............................................................................................................7 TABLE 2- TX MODE SELECTION LEDS INDICATIONS ....................................................................................................13 TABLE 3 - TEST TRANSMISSIONS..................................................................................................................................13 TABLE 4 - RS-232 LED FUNCTION SELECTION SEQUENCE..........................................................................................14 TABLE 5 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS...............................................................................................................................16 TABLE 6 - DTE PORT 9-PIN FUNTIONS .........................................................................................................................16 TABLE 7 - DTE PORT 25-PIN FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................................................16 TABLE 8 CARRIER DEVIATIONS FOR TONE OR DATA MODULATION...........................................................................23 TABLE 9 - KEY LATCH INDICATIONS .............................................................................................................................24 TABLE 10 - CHECKLIST A (AFTER INSTALLATION)........................................................................................................26 TABLE 11 - CHECKLIST B (GENERAL) ..........................................................................................................................27 120 20170-201 v ParagonPD Technical Manual WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0 History Preliminary Version 2.01: May 2001 First release of SRRC4FSK HC modulation model for the 800MHz model, with on-air speeds of 16.0 and 14.4 Kbps that accommodate 12.5 kHz channel spacing. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Section 1.5.2 Model Designation

- Table 3 Test transmissions

- Table 10 Checklist B (General)

- Section 7 Specifications Clarification of fuse type used, section 2.3.1 Version 2.0: May 2001 First release covering, in addition to the DGFSK model, the SRRC4FSK modulated model with speeds of up to 25.6 Kbps. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Section 1.5.2 Model Designation

- Table 3 Test transmissions This version introduces the following changes:

- Section 1.6 Radio Series I or II:

- Revised description

- Section 2.3 Electrical:

- Clarification of amperage requirement

- Figure 4 BDLCPD, rear view. Re-tracing of top fan wiring to cor-

respond to factory routing.

- Section 3.1.1 Receiver:

- Endnote added to clarify troubleshooting characteristic.

- Section 3.1.1.5 Dual Power Supply, clarification of OL (over-

load) LED function.

- Figure 10 Dual Power Supply Rear Connection corrected to corre-

spond to the voltage printed on the connector label.

- Section 4 WinRIS program detailed.

- Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation. Now in-

corporates in a single table the details previously available as Table 8 and Table 10.

- Table 10 Checklist B, (General), steps 6 and 7 revised to merge values for the two models.

- Table 11 Checklist B, (Paragon/PD) steps 6,7 and 10 revised

- Figure 20 Channel Selection via internal DIP switches, clari-

fies the use of switch 8. 120 20170-201 vi ParagonPD Technical Manual

- Section 6.2.3.5 and 6.4.3.5 Exciter Power Output correction of output power to 4 Watts.

- Figure 21 T885 Receiver tuning control location, clarification of RSSI test point location.

- Section 7 Specifications:

- Rx and Tx Current Consumption values revised.

- Base Station Power Consumption specification added. Supersedes Paragon/PD Addendum 124 20170-001a, dated February 2001. Supersedes Technical Support Bulletin TSB ATL007, dated 17 April, 2001 and titled New Deviation Settings for 800MHz GeminiPD and Para-

gonPD with 4 level FSK Modulation. Version 1.0: May 2000 First released version, DGFSK modulated model, and speeds up to 19200 b/s. 120 20170-201 vii ParagonPD Technical Manual Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Asynchronous AVL BDLCPD DBA DCE DTE GeminiPD Network Speed ParagonPD Parallel Decode Refarming Information that can be sent at random times, and not synchronized to a clock. Transmission characters begin with a start bit and end with a stop bit. Automatic Vehicle Location. Optional feature that involves using GPS (Global Positioning System) signals from the mobile unit by the Host PC. Base Station Data Link Controller (PD = Parallel decode). An async radiomo-

dem designed to control the base station in mobile systems. A component of ParagonPD. Dataradios Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation protocol designed for short-

inquiry/long response applications such as dispatch systems. Latest enhance-

ments include support for occasional long messages inbound, and for Out-of-

Band data for AVL reports with no extra overhead. Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. High specs mobile radiomodem. (PD = Parallel Decode) This is the bit rate on the RF link between units. Could be different from COM port baud rate. Factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station using Parallel Decode tech-

nology. Used in VIS mobile networks. Technology featuring dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments. FCCs strategy for using the radio spectrum more efficiently to meet future communications requirements. Radio Assembly Radio modules used in ParagonPD and available in two distinct series depending RS-232 VIS WinRIS on radios frequency band. Industrystandard interface for serial data transfer. Vehicular Information Solutions. Dataradios name for a series of products spe-

cially designed for mobile data. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests, unit con-

figuration and troubleshooting. 120 20170-201 viii ParagonPD Technical Manual 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the setting up, operation, testing and trouble-

shooting of the DATARADIO ParagonPD radio-modem base station. 1.1 Intended Audience This document is intended for engineering, in-

stallation, and maintenance personnel. is a 1.2 General Description ParagonPD product factory-integrated industrial-grade data base station used in mobile networks and is designed specifically to fit the needs of vehicular applications. It features dual receivers for added data decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environ-

ments. When used with Dataradios state-of-the-art GeminiPD mobile data solution, the system delivers unequaled high-speed data performance and unmatched effective throughput. All ParagonPD models are supplied in a rack-

mount configuration that includes:

A ParagonPD Radio assembly A contemporary, high-speed Dataradio Base Station Data Link Controller

(BDLCPD). ParagonPD units do not include the optional wire line modem(s). Duplexer and backup power units are custom furnished items. The laptop PC and its application software are user-supplied items. 1.2.1 Features:

Dual receivers Parallel Decode technology SRRC4FSK modulation capable of 25600 and 19200 b/s in 25 kHz or 16000 and 14400 b/s in 12.5 kHz channel spacing Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance and fewer retries Available in VHF, UHF and 800 MHz radio bands Power output of 20W to 70W for ParagonPDs 800 MHz and of 20W to 100W for VHF and UHF Supports high-efficiency Dataradio DBA over-the-air protocol Over-the-air compatible with MobilPac/R DGFSK and SRRC4FSK modulated Gem-

iniPD mobile products *

Modular design in a rugged die-cast alumi-

num chassis Full-duplex operation ParagonPD units are factory-configured based on each customers network system requirements Flash programmable firmware upgradabil-

ity.

* Networks must use common modulation scheme, bit and baud rates 120 20170-201 1 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

departments DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by con-

tacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is usually not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of individual radio modules. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair logic, modem boards and ra-

dio modules. Contact Technical Support for service informa-

tion before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authoriza-

tion) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should a question arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be re-

paired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the war-

ranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Support. 120 20170-201 2 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.5.2 Model Designation To correctly identify your ParagonPD unit, check its catalog number label located on the rear of the BDLCPD adjacent to the power connector. The first four digits designate the model:

- BDDD = ParagonPD (DGFSK)

- BDD4 = ParagonPD (SRRC4FSK) The next three digits designate the Band used:

83X = VHF, 100W 85X = UHF, 100W 88X = 800 MHz, 70W 1 = 136 156 MHz 2 = 148 174 MHz The next digit designates the RF band of opera-

tion:

For the 83X band:

For the 85X band:

For the 88X band:

1 = 400 440 MHz 2 = 440 480 MHz 3 = 480 520 MHz 1 = 800 880 MHz (RX 850 870 MHz (TX) 2 = 870 960 MHz (RX)

(TX, 5W only) The next digit designates the RF Bandwidth used:

For the 83X band:

0 = 25 kHz full channel, 2.5 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 2.5 ppm*

6 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 2.0 ppm* (U.S. model only) 0 = 25 kHz full channel, 1 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 1 ppm*

For the 85X band:

For the 88X band:

0 = 25 kHz full channel, 1.5 ppm*

5 = 12.5 kHz half channel, 1.5 ppm*

* denotes Frequency Stability The next digit designates the transmitter power:

005 = 5 watt transmitter 070 = 70 watt transmitter (850-870 MHz only) 100 = 100 watt transmitter

The next and last digit designates the Power Source:

0 = Power supply deleted on order 2 = heavy-duty 120 VAC dual supplies 1.6 Radio Series I or II System-engineered installations use one of two complements of ParagonPD radio modules. To identify the radio series model, check the part number on the manufacturers label at the back of the Receiver and Exciter:

- T8nn-nn identifies a Series I model.

- T8nn-nn-nnnn identifies a Series II model. where n denotes a number. Examples:

- T881-10 is a Series I Exciter (850870 MHz)

- T881-10-0000 is a Series II Exciter (850870 MHz) They are assembled on a common chassis:

Series I models:

- Frequency programming 800 MHz frequency range radios is done via EPROM. (This model does not use the pro-

gramming port of Series II models). Series I models will not be available after the Series II models receive FCCs and ICs approvals. Series II models:

- VHF and UHF frequency range radios. The 800MHz Series II models are pending FCC

& IC approvals.

- Frequency programming is done using soft-

ware via a programming port located on the speaker front panel. 120 20170-201 3 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1.7 Packaging 2. Installation Each ParagonPD product normally leaves the factory packaged as follows:

A Series I or II Dataradio base station Ra-

dio assembly A dual power supply assembly A Dataradio BDLCPD model A Radio Interface Cable to link the Radio assembly to the BDLCPD:

18-inch long Y cable; DB-25 female to dual DB-25 female (p/n 730 03374-

102) for connection between backplane PCBs and BDLCPD. One standard seven-foot 120VAC power cord Two DC power cables to connect the radio assembly to the dual power supply assem-

bly. Courtesy small parts kit Frequently, ParagonPD product components are field-assembled prior to customer delivery. The cabinetry may then be supplied in one of several custom rack-mount configurations that may also include fan, backhaul modems, duplexer/filters/combiners, and ancillary equipment. If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immedi-

ately. 2.1 Overview The cabinet and rack-mount housing the Para-

gonPDs Radio assembly and the BDLCPD is generally installed in a sheltered facility. Occa-

sionally located adjacent to the nerve center of the users network, it is often located near tower sites or at remote locations where it operates unattended. Furnishings needed include power, cabling and installation of antenna, landline or microwave modem and host PC or portable computer. De-

tails of these are outside the scope of this man-

ual. This manual covers the radio assembly and the BDLCPD that includes the modem. 2.2 Location Be sure to place the ParagonPD in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in trouble-

shooting) Access to the antenna connector and to the back connectors is possible without remov-

ing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling. 2.3 Electrical Standard 120 VAC electrical power is required. It should be capable of providing at least 10A to power ParagonPD (<6A) and ancillary equip-

ment. 120 20170-201 4 ParagonPD Technical Manual Air Flow Receiv er E xc ellence in R adio C ommunic at ions Receiv er Exciter Pow er Amp lifi er S peaker Panel Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Line Le vel Supply Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute Supply L ow Forw ard P ower Hi gh Re ver se Power Pow er Gating Sensitivi ty Gate Car ri er O n Line Le vel Supply Supply Line Sensitivi ty Microphone Monitor Volume O ff O n Monitor Mute SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 OFF p rogra mmin g po rt Dual Power Supply Module OL Stby On Power OL Stby On Power Figure 1 Typical radio and power supply assemblies, front view T800 II Slimline CM FR FT RD TD 1 3 2 RS-232 CK LM LF RM UF ALARMS PF1 RES ET S-3 CS T X RX RF Figure 2 - BDLCPD, front view 120 20170-201 5 ParagonPD Technical Manual REAR VIEW Air Flow FAN _ +

CN 2 SK5 PL1 PL1 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 2 _ +

SK5 T800-50-0001 No 1 GND DC INPUT 2 SE U F F U S E FUSE E S U F FU S E FUSE FUSE 2 FUSE 1 DC INPUT 1 13.8 VDC 2 AMPS MAX

T808-10-00CA GND T807-10-00CA GND Figure 3 Typical radio and power supplies assembly, rear view Use only with a 250 V fu se Emp loyer uniquement av ec un fu sible de 250 V D EV. 3 R S-232 D EV. 2 R S-232 D EV. 1 R S-232 D EV. 6 DIG. I/O EX T. R AD IO/TE ST DEV. 5 RS-232 DEV. 4 RS-232 Figure 4 - BDLCPD, rear view 120 20170-201 6 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.3.1 Radio Assembly Power Referring to Figure 3, the Radio assembly unit receives two separate 13.8 VDC power inputs from a T800 Slimline dual power supply typi-

cally rack-mounted right below the main assem-

bly radio chassis. The T800 is made up of two separate power supply units joined in a single chassis:

A T807 using convection cooling is rated up to 15A at 13.8VDC. It supplies all the radio modules other than the Power Amplifier. A T808 using convection and fan cooling is rated up to 25A at 13.8VDC. It supplies only the Power Amplifier module. Normally used at room ambient temperatures, they can operate within specifications over a range of 10 to +60 C. Note: Internal over-temperature protection shuts down the main transformer above 105 degrees Celsius. Both power supply modules are internally con-

nected to ground via their individual, rear-

connected, seven-foot standard 120 VAC power cords. Nevertheless, each requires a separate secure electrical ground connection. Individual grounding tabs are provided next to the power connectors. Similarly, the Radio Assembly chassis requires a secure ground connection. A threaded grounding binding post fitted with a knurled binding-nut is provided on the chassis next to DC input 2. Separate grounding leads with appropriate con-

nectors are supplied (either in the courtesy small-parts kit or with one end fastened to the equipment. A- For each of the power supply modules:

1. Fit one end of the grounding leads push-on connector onto the grounding tab. B- For the Radio Assembly chassis:

1. Install the grounding leads lug over the binding post and firmly hand-

tighten the binding-nut. For both A and B 2. Fit the slotted connector (on the other end of each of the grounding connector) under a conveniently located screw on the rack frame or other support surface. Scrape away paint if needed to ensure clean contact. 3. Apply anti-corrosion compound where paint scraping was done. 4. Ensure by testing continuity that a se-

cure electrical and mechanical connec-

tion is achieved. If a DC rail (0V) is installed as part of the sys-

tem, the grounding leads may alternatively be fitted to the rail terminal. Caution:

Improper grounding between power supply case and rack frame may result in harmful voltage potentials and/or miscellaneous power supply switching noise problems in both receivers and transmitter. Press both red power buttons located on the front of the module to have complete power distribution to the Radio assembly. The power supply front panel LEDs indications are:

Table 1 - Power Supply LEDs Indications LED On Stby OL Color Green Red Steady Red Indication Power enabled *

Power disabled *

Current Overload Flashing green and red respectively On & OL

* To remove voltage from the power supply PCB, discon-

nect the main power cords. Over voltage For LEDs descriptions, see section 3.2.1.2 The Radio assembly is fused at the rear of the chassis:

Fuse 1 is a 32-volt MDL 10A (Cartridge 6x32mm, slow-blow) Fuse 2 is a 32-volt MDL 30A (Cartridge 6x32mm, slow blow) 120 20170-201 7 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.3.2 BDLCPD assembly Power The BDLCPD assembly uses a standard 120 VAC power cord. Plug this cord to the rear power outlet shown in Figure 6. To check or install a fuse:

1. Open the slide-out fuse drawer located be-

low the power connector. 2. Use a fine bladed screwdriver or a knife blade and gently pry open. 3. Hold the fuse support in one hand and with the other, lift the center plastic retainer until it releases the fuse sliding base. 4. Replace or install a 250V, 2A fuse. 5. To complete the procedure, push the sliding fuse base until it snaps under the retainer. 6. Re-insert the fuse drawer in its housing and push until it is fully seated and closed. When ready to apply power, use the ON-OFF toggle power switch adjacent to the power con-

nector. ON-OFF Switch 120VAC Connector Fuse Slide-out Drawer Use only with a 250 V fuse Employer uniquement av ec un fusible de 250 V Figure 5 - BDLCPDs rear connection, switch and fuse 2.4 Antenna 2.4.1 Overview ParagonPD commonly uses three antennas (one transmit and two receive) unless a duplexer is used with one of the receive antennas; then only two antennas would be needed. They should be mounted according to any guidelines supplied with the antennas. For antennas placement and spacing, consult System Engineering. 2.4.2 Cabling and Connection 1- Route good quality 50-ohm double-shielded coaxial cable(s) (e.g. RG-214 or Heliax) from the selected antenna position(s) to the ParagonPD Radio assembly. 2- Terminate the RX-1 and RX-2 cable ends at the Receiver modules rear position with an N-type connector. 3- Similarly, terminate the TX cable end at the Power Amps module rear position with an N-type connector. Caution:

When terminating RF cables use brand-name crimping tools

(such as AMP, Jensen, Crimp-

Master, etc) of the correct size for the cable and type of connector used. Common pliers are NOT ac-

ceptable. 2.5 Completing the physical Installation. ParagonPD products are factory-configured to users requirements and are shipped ready to run. After new installations:

Re-check that all connections are secure on radio and BDLCPD assemblies (antennas, PC, power cords etc.) Check that fuses are inserted. Turn both BDLCPD and radio power ON. You are now ready to check for normal opera-

tion and to run the Windows Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trou-

ble-shooting. Any change(s) to the settings must be done via files saved on diskette and loaded into the unit using the WinRIS program. 120 20170-201 8 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2.6 Checking out Normal Operation 1- Check that power is applied. 2- Check Radio assembly lights for proper op-

eration as per section 3.1.1 3- Check for proper operation of the BDLCPDs LEDs as per section 3.2.1.2. 4- Using the WinRIS program (described in section 4), and an in-line wattmeter, check the forward & reflected power to confirm antenna installations. 5- Using the WinRIS, check the RF link with a mobile station that can be heard, by using the WinRIS Ping feature. See section 4.4.5.5 If user application and a mobile station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 3. Operating Description 3.1 Radio Assembly The Radio assembly component of each Paragon product is made up of high performance synthe-

sized radio base station designed for single op-

eration. Referring to Figure 1 on page 5, the Ra-

dio Assemblys modules are commonly installed in a standard, 19-inch wide rack frame. 3.1.1 Front panels The complement of modules is identical for:

Series I, (800 MHz model) and Series II, (VHF and UHF models)*

* 800 MHz models will be available as Series II at a future date) 2 Receivers Exciter Power Amplifier Speaker panel Dual Power Supply Receiver module 3.1.1.1 The RX1 and RX2 receivers use identical front panel controls and indicators. These are:

Receiver Gating Sensitivity Gate Line Level Supply Monitor Volume Off On Monitor Mute Gating Sensitivity Gate LED Line Level Monitor Volume Monitor Mute On - Off Figure 6 - Receiver module front panel Gating Sensitivity - sets the RF signal level required to open the mute gate and allow audio to pass to the speaker1. Gate LED - indicates the status of the mute circuit. It is lit when a signal above the mute threshold is received1. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Line Level - Not used Monitor Volume - The audio output delivers up to one watt to the speaker. Always set 1 Gating Sensitivity and Gate LED are not functionally used except to allow listening to in-

coming receptions as a trouble-shooting aid. Depending on the sensitivity adjustment, the Gate LED lights and a relay can be heard on in-

coming RF signals. 120 20170-201 9 ParagonPD Technical Manual volume knob to minimum when not in use to reduce current consumption. Monitor Mute Switch - opens the mute, al-

lowing continuous monitoring of the audio signal. On = audio muted Exciter module 3.1.1.2 The Exciters front panel controls and indicators are:

Exciter Carrier On Supply Line Sensitivity Microphone Carrier Switch On LED Supply LED Line Sensitivity Microphone Socket Figure 7 - Exciter module, front panel Carrier Switch - momentarily keys the transmitter ON while pressed (used for test purposes only). On LED - is lit when transmitting Line Sensitivity not used. Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Fast Flashes when linked with PGM800Win. Slow Flashes indicates VCO

(synthesizer) out of lock. Unequal Flashes indicates internal communication error. Microphone Socket not used. 3.1.1.3 The Power Amp front panel and indicators are:

Power Amp module P o w e r A m plifier Supply LED S up ply Low Forward Power High Rev erse Power Po w e r Low Forward Power LED High Reverse Power LED Power Adjustment Figure 8 - Power Amp module, front panel Supply LED - is lit when DC power is ap-

plied. Low Forward Power LED - is lit when for-

ward power is below the level set, normally 80% of nominal forward power. High Reverse Power LED - is lit when high reverse power is detected (e.g. VSWR=

3:1). Power - sets the PA output power:

- VHF & UHF: 20 100 Watts

800: 20-70 Watts Speaker panel 3.1.1.4 Referring to Figure 9, the speaker panel is fitted with a 4 speaker. Both series of radio assemblies share the same front panel fitted with an RJ11 connector. This connector is used to allow programming the ra-

dio from the front of the unit via a programming lead. This feature is exclusive to the Series II modules. 120 20170-201 10 ParagonPD Technical Manual If the speaker panel needs to be removed, a mir-

ror programming port connector is provided on both backplanes. Programming for Series I 800MHz units is done via EPROM and is detailed in section 6.1. The RJ11 front port is covered (not used). S peaker Panel SP EAK ER SELE CT SWI TCH R X1 R X2 O FF programm ing p ort Not Used with 800 MHz Series I model Figure 9 - Speaker panel 3.1.1.5 Dual Power Supply module The Dual Power Supply module is made up of two separate power supply units coupled in a single chassis. Refer to Table 1 on page 7 for tabular listing of power supply LEDs indicators. Refer to Figure 1 for the front panel LED lay-

out. This module has:

Two Power red-colored pushbutton switches - Push in for ON and release out for OFF. Control complete power distribu-

tion to the Radio assembly Two ON LEDs - light green when push button(s) is (are) ON; DC power is distrib-

uted to radio modules. Flash green in con-

junction with the OL LED (flashing red) when an over voltage condition is present. Two Stby- Standby voltage LED, lights red when push button is off; AC power is applied but DC is not distributed to radio modules. To remove presence of voltage, disconnect both power cords. Two OL LEDs - Monitor current over-

load, light steady red when supply exceeds current limit set; nominally 25Amps (T808 model). Flashes red in conjunction with the ON LED (flashing green) when an over voltage condition is present. Rear Connections 3.1.1.5.1 Referring to Figure 10, (convection-cooled model shown; fan-cooled model not illustrated), the rear connections for each of the power sup-

ply are:

Fail Alarm Off: Power supply OK; approx. +Vout

(via 1k resistor - typ. 13.8V). ON: Power supply failure; approx. -

Vout (via 11k resistors - typ. 0V)

+ Remote Not used for Paragon

- Sense Not used for Paragon

-VE main ground (0V)

+13.8V Mains DC output supply 1 5 A M a x

. 1 3

. 8 V O u t p u t F a i l l A a r m R e m o t e S e n s e

Figure 10 - Dual Power Supply rear connections Note: more power supply installation details are covered in section 2.3.1 3.1.2 Radio Assembly, rear panel Backplane PCB 3.1.2.1 Referring to Figure 3, two main backplanes are used. Their main components are:

RJ11 connector Mirrors the one on the front of the Speaker panel (series connected 120 20170-201 11 ParagonPD Technical Manual to both backplanes). Used for programming the Radio Assembly whenever the speaker panel has been removed. This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Series I models programming is done externally via EPROMs. DB-25M plug at PL1 (one side of the Y cable on each PCB) used to supply the re-

ceive signal to the BDLCPDs single EXT.RADIO/TEST DB-25F plug. Two channel-select DIP switches (SW1 and SW2) This feature is exclusive to the Series II model. Cooling fan driver CN2 located on back-

plane connects to the horizontally-mounted fan on top of the Radio assembly and acti-

vated by BDLCs PTT signal. Coaxial relay driver not used. 3.2 BDLCPD The rack-mounted BDLCPD is housed in a steel case. It has no user serviceable parts. Units configuration flash memory

(EEPROM). is stored in 3.2.1 BDLCPD Front panel Referring to Figure 2, the front panel of the BDLCPD has two cutouts across its length. A- The left cutout groups the units type label and ten LED indicators:

The S3 label designates the BDLCPD as a three Serial-port model

(Ports 4 and 5 are reserved for future use) The RF group of 3 LEDs The RS-232 group of 5 LEDs A single CK LED The ALARMS group of 4 LEDs B- The right cutout groups two tactile (mem-

brane) switches (PF1 and RESET). Front Switches 3.2.1.1 Referring to Figure 11, the BDLCPD uses two membrane-type switches labeled:

RESET PF 1 These switches indicate contact by emitting a short BEEP tone when pressed. PF1 RESET Figure 11 - BDLCPD membrane switches Reset 3.2.1.1.1 Pressing Reset produces the same result as pow-

ering OFF and ON again. It restarts the micro-

processor, the peripherals and invokes the on-

board diagnostics. BDLCPDs radio modules internal flash-memories are read and their val-

ues are loaded in system SRAM CPU flash-

memory. Normally, pressing Reset results in one short BEEP tone followed by all LEDs coming ON for about four seconds. Then, the LEDs flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds indi-

cating diagnostics are in progress. At the end of this period, all LEDs should be OFF except CK that should flash about six to eight times per second. Expect an additional two seconds delay for CK to start flashing and the UF indicator to come ON if the radio assembly is not connected or not powered (see section 3.2.1.2.4 for Alarm de-

tails). PF 1 3.2.1.1.2 PF 1 is a multi-function switch:

It clears LED error indications It initiates test transmissions It sets the function of the RS-232 LEDs 120 20170-201 12 ParagonPD Technical Manual Clearing Errors 3.2.1.1.2.1 Major and minor error LED indications remain lit on the front panel until:

The unit is RESET The unit is powered OFF and ON again PF 1 is pressed The PF 1 switch can be pressed at any time to clear an error display without affecting normal operations. Test Transmissions 3.2.1.1.2.2 To select a pattern and begin transmission, start by pressing and holding PF1. It beeps once, all five RS232 LEDs light; listen for a second beep followed by a third beep. After two seconds, the unit beeps and goes in TX Select mode with only the three rightmost RS-232 LEDs now used as selection indicators. Only release PF1 after the third beep. Following release:

Start of selection must be made within two seconds. If not, the unit will default to pat-

tern one and start test transmitting. PF1 may be pressed more than once. The number of times it is pressed determines the type of pattern that will be transmitted ac-

cording to Table 3. Each pressing of PF1 extends the two-

second timer. The three rightmost RS-232 LEDs display are used to indicate TX mode selection as shown in Table 2. Table 2- TX mode selection LEDs indications TX pattern selected Binary TX mode LED indications FT LED RD LED TD LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Off Off Off On On On On Off On On Off Off On On On Off On Off On Off On Once the type of transmission is selected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. Automatically, the BDLCPD turns its transmitter ON, sends the selected test pattern for 55 seconds and turns its transmitter OFF. The TX LED in the RF group of indicators lights in red while test transmitting. Pressing PF1 while the 55 seconds test is in progress stops the test. At the end of test transmission, BDLCPD opera-

tion returns to normal and the RX LED lights in green (monitoring normal transmitter activity). Table 3 - Test Transmissions

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

# times PF1 is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DGFSK ParagonPD 9600 b/s 2400 Hz Dotting 4800 Hz 16000 b/s 19200 b/s 4000 Hz Dotting 8000 Hz 4800 Hz Dotting 9600 Hz 14400 b/s 1800 Hz Dotting*

100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustment tone SRRC4FSK ParagonPD 16000 b/s 2000 Hz Dotting*

19200 b/s 2400 Hz Dotting*

Do not use 100 Hz Square wave Random data Unmod 1000 Hz sine beacon mode 1000 Hz sine wave Adjustment tone 25600 b/s 3200 Hz Dotting*

* Dotting with reduced amplitude Notes:

For DGFSK models, a dotting pattern consists of an alternating series of bits. For the SRRC4FSK models, only the lowest-level symbols modulation is used. The square wave is used to check transmitter low frequency balance. The 1000 Hz sine can be used for transmitter distor-

tion measurements. Pattern 6 produces a transmission of approximately 55 seconds followed by about 55 seconds of silence. Initial transmission in a sequence may be shorter than 55 seconds. TX LED stays steadily red for dura-

tion of the test. Press PF1 to terminate beacon mode. 120 20170-201 13 ParagonPD Technical Manual 3.2.1.1.2.3 RS-232 LED Function Selection The PF 1 button is used to select the RS-232 display mode as follows:

If pressed ONCE (do not hold pressed):

- Clears Alarm indications

- CK LED stops flashing for 2 seconds

- During this time, one or all of the RS-232 numbered LEDs (see Figure 13) will light. If one LED lights, it denotes the port to which the subsequent display applies. If all numbered LEDs light, it denotes that the normal 3-port display mode is active. The selected display remains active un-

til manually changed or until RESET is pressed or until power up. Table 4 - RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence RS-232 LED Function Selection Sequence ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) ALL 1 2 3 4 (reserved) 5 (reserved) TX LED in RF group lights with any and all transmission TX LED in RF group only lights with an ACK or DATA transmission If, during the 2 seconds period that CK is not flashing, PF 1 is pressed a second time, the LED functions will advance one step from top to bottom through the available options in the order shown in Table 4. PF 1 may be pressed repeatedly during the 2 second period (extended with each press) to advance to the desired numbered LED function option. Once the desired RS-232 LED function is se-

lected, stop pressing PF1, allow the two-seconds timer to run down. The BDLCPD returns to nor-

mal operation using the newly selected display. 3.2.1.2 LEDs and Indications LEDs are used to indicate the operation status of the BDLCPD. Although capable of displaying three colors, only the green and red colors are used for the BDLCPD. They are grouped by their function:

RF Group, displays radio channel status in green RS-232 Group, displays serial port status in green except the TX LED that also uses red ALARM Group, displays fault status in red Radio Network Indicators 3.2.1.2.1 The Radio Network LEDs are useful when trou-

bleshooting as an indication of network activity. It can help isolate transmission problems. C S R X T X R F Figure 12 - RF indicators CS RX TX Carrier Sense - Steady light indicates that an incoming radio data signal is being detected by the DSP modem. CS signal is not user-adjustable. Receive Data Flashing light indicates unit is internally receiving data from the radio network. Transmitter ON blinks green indicates

(depending on display mode selected):

That a data packet or ACK (packet acknowledgment) is being trans-

mitted. That an idle packet, data packet or ACK is being sent. Test transmis-

sion display is done in red. RS-232 Port Indicators 3.2.1.2.2 The RS-232 LEDs normally indicate port activ-

ity on the port selected. See section 3.2.1.1.2.3 above for instructions for selecting display mode. 120 20170-201 14 ParagonPD Technical Manual C M 1 F R F T R D 3 2 R S -232 T D Figure 13 - RS-232 Port LED indicators FR CM Command Mode - LED lights and re-

mains lit while the selected port is ac-

cessing the Command Processor. It lights ON and OFF while being config-

ured. Flow Control on Receive - the BDLCPD has received a flow control signal from the device connected to it. When it lights, BDLCPD has stopped sending data to the DTE. When LED goes out, the port terminal is again ready to re-

ceive data. Flow Control on Transmit - the BDLCPD has sent a flow control signal to the DTE asking it to stop sending data. The LED remains lit as long as the terminal is being held off. FT RD TD Receive Data - when lit, it shows that the Receive Data pin 3 on the RS-232 interface connector is active. Since all BDLCPD are configured as DCE, it means that the DTE is receiving data from the BDLCPD. Transmit Data - shows the status of Transmit Data pin 2 of the RS-232 in-

terface. When lit, the DTE is sending data to the BDLCPD. 3.2.1.2.3 CK Check and Power Check:

Normally flashing rapidly (about 6 cps), indicates microprocessors are working correctly and power is applied. Not flashing indicates unit is not func-

tioning. Blinking slowly (1 cps), indicates the parameters contents of the flash memory have been corrupted. The unit automati-

cally loads its set of factory default pa-

rameters and starts beeping at 20 sec-

onds intervals. May also initialization has occurred indicate DSP-modem re-

Alarm Indicators 3.2.1.2.4 All alarm conditions will cause the BDLCPD to light one or more of the LED indicators. LEDs remain ON when lit until cleared by either pressing PF 1 (without affecting operation of the unit) or RESET (cycling unit OFF and ON). LM RM LF UF ALARMS Figure 14 - ALARMS LED indicators LM Local Minor Alarm - when lit, indicates the presence of any of the following mi-

nor faults:

- Parity, framing or overrun error at any RS-232 port.

- Out of buffers. No memory available to accept data from a local terminal de-

vice. Usually denotes a flow control problem.

- Flash memory error. At power-up or reset, the unit detected a change in non-

volatile memory. RM Remote Minor Alarm - when lit, indi-

cates any of the Local Minor Alarm listed above have taken place at the re-

mote end of the link (i.e. the mobile the local base station is currently communi-

cating with). It will also light when a protocol error has been detected on the network. In a network using the Host Link Ac-

tive (MSC) feature, the RM LED, flashing in-sync with the CK LED, indi-

down. cates link that the is 120 20170-201 15 ParagonPD Technical Manual UF LF Link Failure - when lit, indi-

cates that the base station fails to re-

ceive an ACK for a packet sent and for all subsequent retries. Some data has possibly been lost. LF is not functional if all active ports are set to NAR mode. Link fails are inevitable during normal operation (mobiles temporarily out of range, in a tunnel, parked in a dead spot, etc.). A lit LF LED is not normally cause for concern. Unit Failure - when lit, the unit requires attention:

- The BDLCPD is not operable;

It may indicate detection of a system software error trap.

- The BDLCPD is operable;

Indicates that on power-up, invalid data was detected in the serial EEPROM chip (located in the radio modules). It may also indicate that connection to the radio modules is incorrect or that radio power is not applied. The LM, RM and UF alarms also sound a beep when a fault occurs. The LF alarm is silent. 3.2.2 BDLCPD Rear panel Referring to Figure 4, the rear panel of the BDLCPD has the following set of chassis con-

nectors:

Four DE-9F connectors:

DEV2 - usually connected to Datara-

dios WinRIS program (DMP/Setup 19200). Can also be used with special users application such as telephone modem. Note: connection to a tele-

phone requires the use of a DCE Cross-

over cable. DEV3 - Dedicated (9600) DEV4 and DEV5 - not used One DB-25F connector

- DEV1 - Connects to users application. a) DMP 19200 for single-site installa-

tions b) MSCP 19200 for multi-site installa-

tions One DA-15M connector:

- DEV6 Digital I/O - not used One DB-25M connector:

- EXT RADIO/TEST - connects to the Radio assembly (see Figure 15) Signal Levels 3.2.2.1 In the description of data signals in Table 7, the following conventions are used:

Table 5 - RS-232 Signal levels Term ON OFF Alternates Signal level Asserted, spacing

+3 to +15 V Dropped, marking

-3 to -15 V 3.2.2.2 Pin Functions Table 6 - DTE Port 9-pin funtions DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function (RS-232 signal levels) DCD from ParagonPD, normally asserted RXD data from ParagonPD TXD data to ParagonPD DTR to ParagonPD, handshaking Ground DSR from ParagonPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to ParagonPD, handshaking CTS from ParagonPD, handshaking Reserved Table 7 - DTE Port 25-pin functions DB-25F pin #

1 and 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 20 Function (RS-232 signal levels) PD PD PD Ground TXD data to BDLC RXD data from BDLC RTS to BDLC CTS from BDLC DSR from BDLC DCD from BDLC RI - from BDLC PD DTR to BDLC PD PD PD

, must be asserted PD

, handshaking

, always +8V

, always asserted

, always 8V

, handshaking We recommend the use of shielded 9-wire or 25-wire cables with all pins connected. Dataradio recommends the use of secure (i.e. password protected and/or dial-back) modems in any installation where dialup access is provided. 120 20170-201 16 ParagonPD Technical Manual YEL LOW G RAY GREEN B LUE O RANGE B LACK WHITE SHIELD B RO WN VIOLE T RED B LACK SHIELD BDLC D212 DB-25 FEM ALE (P8) TXA 1 8 EXT IO _OUT1 1 0 EXTIO_IN1 2 2 RXA ( 1) RSSI (1 ) P TT G RO UND (1) EXT IO _OUT3 EXTIO_IN3 SHIELD RXA ( 2) RSSI (2 ) 3 1 6 6 4 7 2 4 1 7 1 1 4 EXT IO _OUT2 9 EXTIO_IN2 2 3 G RO UND (2) 2 SHIELD 1 5 TO BDLC 730-03374-102 BACKPLANE 1 / RX 1 & EXC ITER DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 1 1 TXA (fr om SK 3 pin 8) 1) 1 RX 1 E EPROM (from S K1 pin 1 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 5 TX KEY (fro m SK3 pi n 1 3) 1 3 G RO UND 5

) TX EE PROM (fr om SK 3 p in 1) BACKPLANE 2 / RX 2 DB-25 FEM ALE (PL1) 2 4 RX AUDIO 1 (from S K1 pin 6) 9 RX RSSI (from S K1 pin 5) 1 RX 2 EEPROM (fr om SK 1 pin 1) 1 3 GROUND L E F T ( R X 1 -Ex) RIGHT (RX2) 18.00"

Figure 15 - BDLCPD Y cable and pinout Important note:

The aggregate total baud rate for all active ports on a BDLCPD must not exceed 30,000 for Para-

gonPD. Sustained simultaneous operation on devices 1 and 3, using the factory settings for these ports, may result in lost characters. Using the factory settings, device 3 is intended only for use during configuration and should not be used simultaneously with data traffic on device 1. For special user application done while the BDLCPD is active, use either device 2, or set device 3 to 2400 bauds. 120 20170-201 17 ParagonPD Technical Manual 4. WinRIS program The Windows Radio Installation Software

(WinRIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot ParagonPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field configuring of units

(Requires intervention with technical sup-

port). To run the program, you will need:

- A PC or portable computer running a 32-bit MS-Windows application:

Win ME Win2000 Win NT Win 9x

(For Win 95, if COMCTL32.DLL has been updated to the most recent version and copied to the \windows\system\ directory). Note:

WinRIS does not operate under:

- Win CE (embedded in PocketPC)

16-bit Windows 3.x

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard command 4.1 Operation This support program can be run in MS-

Windows mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone re-

sults in unexpected transmissions. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. 4.2 To connect and start WinRIS GeminiPDs and ParagonPDs share a common WinRIS program available on diskette, Datara-

dio p/n 980 03392-00n. Refer to the WinRIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set the MS-Windows environment, and how to connect, install and run this program. In summary, before starting the WinRIS when running MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) lead-

ing to:

WinRIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop short-

cut icon for WinRIS:

Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut icon, Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 120 20170-201 18 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 16 - WinRIS main screen 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Placing the cursor over a Toolbar or Button generates to ScreenTip. Referring a Figure 16, starting from top and moving down to the bottom, the screen display is made up of:

A Menu bar, containing the menu names listed below. They give access to command options. Unavailable commands are shown in light gray color. Shortcut keys are listed whenever available. File menu lists the:

- Put From command (Ctrl+O)

- Get command (Ctrl+S)

- Get As command and below a command separator, the:

- Exit command

! Test menu lists the:

- Modulated command

- UnModulated command

! View menu lists the:

- Toolbar checked command

- Status bar checked command

! Help menu lists the:

- Help Topics command and below a command separator, the:

- About WinRIS command A Toolbar row, located immediately below the menu bar containing buttons (each 120 20170-201 19 ParagonPD Technical Manual bearing an icon) for commonly used tasks as follows:

! Put From button

! Get button Get As button and to the right of a bar separator, the:

! About button and the

! Context-sensitive Help button An Indicator and Button bar, located im-

mediately below the Toolbar row, it con-

tains two circular indicators

! DSR signal is High indicator

! CTS signal is High indicator and three buttons for commonly used tasks as follows. Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check ParagonPDs transmit functions Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Station Reset button The Station Reset button is the only button available when first starting the program and is used to initiate the connection process. Press Station Reset. Enter Port and Baud rate information in the Select Port sub-window.

! Station Reset button

! Modulated TXON button

! Unmodulated TXON button A Product field, displays product type be-

ing used after a connection to the product has been established. Illustration used indi-

cates a GeminiPD product connection. A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel for GeminiPD products. The Channels selection and the Show All Channel Frequencies button functions are disabled for ParagonPD as it uses a single channel. A Test section, with a Ping button and the relevant address field. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or warning windows. The RSSI Bar Graph on the right side of the window is exclusive to GeminiPD and is dis-

abled when connected to ParagonPD. 4.4 Functions The WinRIS program is used to:

Figure 17 - Select Port dialog window Press OK to validate the selection (or Can-

cel to exit back to the main screen). When connection is established, all test buttons and fields valid for the product identified are activated. The Station Reset button is also pressed as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after do-

ing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 4.4.2 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

120 20170-201 20 ParagonPD Technical Manual Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engi-

neering. Get button 4.4.2.1 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get command or press the Get button on the Toolbar to:

Establish linking Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The WinRIS status bar will then report All pa-

rameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file [unit' s/n].BP2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.2.2 After communication is established using the Connect button, press the Get As button to:

Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.bp2 (already selected). Save the connected BDLCPDs operating characteris-

tics (configuration setting) to a file, direc-

tory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

in [file-

cessfully retrieved and saved name]. 4.4.3 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engi-

neering. Put From button 4.4.3.1 1- On the menu bar, select File, then the Put From command or press the Put From button on the Toolbar. 2- In the Open window, locate the drive, di-

rectory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. is The status bar reports: [filename]

downloading to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect!

into unit and up 6- Press the Station Reset button. See section 4.4.1 for details. 4.4.4 Special Functions The following WinRIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the connected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button 120 20170-201 21 ParagonPD Technical Manual Banner Field 4.4.4.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. ParagonPD's firmwares reside in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the WinRIS used. You will find the version number by se-

lecting the Help menu option, then About WinRIS command or pressing the About button on the Toolbar. The Banner field is blank prior to doing a

"Get", "Get As" or "Put From". Comments 4.4.4.2 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) location, etc).

(customer name, 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.4.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.4.5 Test Functions The following WinRIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

DSR signal is High indicator CTS signal is High indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button While a button is in-use for test transmissions, all others are inoperative. DSR signal is High indicator 4.4.5.1 The Data Set Ready (DSR) indicator light, located on the button bar (leftmost), is an RS-

232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indi-

cates proper connection and that the value is 120 20170-201 22 ParagonPD Technical Manual High. The DMP protocol used requires that DSR be normally asserted. CTS signal is High indicator 4.4.5.2 The Clear-to-Send (CTS) indicator light, lo-

cated on the button bar (second indicator from the left), is an RS-232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indicates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used re-

quires that CTS be normally asserted. Channel Selection 4.4.5.3 ParagonPD uses its default radio channel. No channel selection being available, all channels are grayed-out and the Show All Channel Fre-

quencies button is disabled. TXON Tests 4.4.5.4 TXON test functions are selected by choosing Test from the file menu, then Modulated or UnModulated command or by pressing the relevant button on the Toolbar. Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.5.4.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated 20-seconds test signal on the channel selected or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. Measure the forward (nominal 40W for UHF model and 35W for 800MHz model) and re-

flected power levels by powering TX ON (<5%

of forward power or as specified by System Eng.). Modulated Carrier 4.4.5.4.2 Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed as shown in Table 8. This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to begin transmitting a 20-seconds modulated test signal on the channel or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation Carrier Modulation Tone Data Network Speed

(b/s) Typical deviation in kHz TX test tone in ( ) Absolute Maximum deviation *

in kHz 25kHz Channel Spacing (800MHz) 25600 19200 3.7

(1000 Hz) 4.3

(1000 Hz) 5.7 6.2 12.5kHz Channel Spacing (800MHz) K S F 4 C R R S K S F G D 16000 14400 25600 19200 16000 14400 19200 16000 9600 9600 2.4

(1000 Hz) 2.8

(1000 Hz) Full Channel (UHF) 4.0

(1000 Hz) 4.5

(1000 Hz) Half Channel (UHF) 1.6

(1000 Hz) 2.0

(1000 Hz) Full Channel 4.0

(1000 Hz) 4.0

(1000 Hz) 3.0

(1000 Hz) Half Channel 2.5

(1000 Hz) 3.5 4.0 6.0 6.5 2.4 2.9 4.7 4.7 3.6 2.9

* Deviation shown may seem higher than normal, however they fall within the following appropriate FCCs masks lim-

its: C,G,D or H. 120 20170-201 23 ParagonPD Technical Manual Ping Button 4.4.5.5 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of ParagonPD to communicate with a mobile unit by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the ping address Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) address, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

- For ParagonPD product:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or

- For GeminiPD product:

Ping address is not in the range A GN The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate using the direc-

tional arrows. This area also shows messages describing actions of toolbar buttons as you de-

press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. Warning and Caution messages appear in pop-

up sub-windows. To close these message boxes, press the ESC key. Three boxes on the right of the status bar indi-

cate which of the following keys is latched down:

Indicator Description CAP The Caps Lock key is latched down. NUM The Num Lock key is latched down. SCRL The Scroll Lock key is latched down. Table 9 - Key latch indications

In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. 3- The program sends a test query and contin-

ues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 seconds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. 4.4.6 Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom edge of the WinRIS window. To display or hide the bar, check or uncheck the command in the View menu. 120 20170-201 24 ParagonPD Technical Manual 5. Testing and Trouble-

5.2 Recommended Checks Shooting The checks described below should be done at time of installation, annual intervals or when-

ever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required In-line watt meter (150W & 10 W ranges) Radio service monitor (IFR-120B with op-

tion 03: 30KHz IF filter or equivalent). RG-214 or RG-223 cable with N-Type male connector to connect ParagonPD to the service monitor. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months. A) After an installation 1. LED Indications 2. Save unit config to a file 3. Transmitter Output Power 4. Transmitter Reflected Power 5. RF Link test between ParagonPD and mo-

bile unit(s) B) For annual maintenance & trouble-shooting Same checks as A) plus:

6. Carrier Frequency Error 7. TX Deviation 8. Low Frequency Balance 9. 12 dB SINAD 10. Receiver distortion 11. RSSI check Transmissions for some of the tests above are initiated by pressing the PF1 membrane button located on the front of the BDLC. For details on its use, refer to Table 3 and section 3.2.1.1.2.2 on page 13 above. 120 20170-201 25 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 10 - Checklist A (after installation) CHECKLIST A

(ParagonPD) Recommended Check out after Installation Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

1 2 3 4 5 Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press WinRIS Get button Transmitter Output Power Press TX (Unmod) Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON mod)

(Un-

RF Link test

"Ping" a mobile BDLCPD beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.2 as per section 4.4.2 VHF/UHF: 100 watts 800: 70 watts

+10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request. Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line watt-

meter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna con-

nector. 1Refer to Checklist B

<5% of forward power or as specified by Syst. Eng. 10W in-line wattmeter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Ping Successful as per sections 4.4.5.5

- Mobile is out of range

- Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless unit has been set a lower value). Note that readings less than 100 watts for VHF/UHF or 70 watts for 800 MHz models, may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter or the RF feedline & antenna installation. 120 20170-201 26 ParagonPD Technical Manual Table 11 - Checklist B (General) CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD) General Check out (part1 of 2) ParagonPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting a unit may result in significant performance losses. Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

BDLCPD beeps once, all LEDs come ON for about four seconds, the green LEDs then flash in a ripple pattern for close to two seconds. All LEDs go OFF except the CK that should flash 6 to 8 times per second. For functions, see section 3.2.1.2 Transmitter Output Power Press TX ON (Un-

mod) VHF/UHF: 100 watts 800: 70 watts

+10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request. as per section 4.4.2 Service monitor set to read power or 150W in-line wattmeter installed as close as possible to the unit antenna connector. Adjust Power on the front panel of the Power Amp

( see Figure 8)

<5% of forward power or as specified by Syst. Eng. 10 W in-line wattmeter Check damaged coax cable, etc. for bad connections,

< 300 Hz SRRC4FSK modulation, 25kHz Ch. spacing (800):

25.6 kb/s: 3.7 kHz 19.2 kb/s 4.3 kHz 12.5kHz Ch. spacing (800):

16.0 kb/s 2.4 kHz 14.4 kb/s 2.8 kHz Full Channel (UHF):

25.6 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 19.2 kb/s: 4.5 kHz Half Channel (UHF):

16.0 kb/s 1.6 kHz 14.4 kb/s 2.0 kHz DGFSK modulation, Full Channel 19.2 and 16 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s: 3.0 kHz Half Channel 9.6 kb/s: 2.5 kHz Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. a) Record deviation level read from step 6 b) Record deviation read from TX Random test c) Difference between a) and b) must be:

< 500 Hz (2 FSK)

< 1.8 kHz (4 FSK) Service monitor set to read frequency error Adjust TCXO

(see inside Exciter module) Figure 22 & Figure 35 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Adjust according to Appendix 1

- ParagonPD Deviation adjust on page 57 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position, all audio filtering disabled

) Refer to Section 6.2.3.4 for Series I and section 6.4.3.4 for Series II 120 20170-201 27 ParagonPD Technical Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 Normal Power-up Sequence Connect and save unit config Press WinRIS Get button Transmitter Reflected Power Press TXON mod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod)

(Un-

TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. will 7 Low Frequency Balance Initiate a TX Random data test via BDLCPDs PF1

(See Table 3) CHECKLIST B (ParagonPD) General Check out (part2 of 2) ParagonPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try readjusting units unless it is really required. Misadjusting unit may result in significant performance losses. Step ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

Set the service monitor to generate on the selected receive frequency. Verify alternately for both receivers. The carrier should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation level specified below:

8 9 10 12 dB SINAD

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

For Full channel unit, set devia-

tion to 3 kHz. For Half channel unit, set devia-

tion to 1.5 kHz Receiver distortion

(Dataradio wide band measurement method: no audio filtering)

Set service monitor RF Gen output to 70 dBm

- Deviation level as per SINAD above. RSSI Vary & measure the RF level out-

put as shown in sections 6.2.2.5 and 6.4.2.5. Better than -110 dBm

(including cable loss) 5.5 %

UHF & 800 MHz:

at -110dBm: 1.2 VDC

(+0.2V 0.45 VDC) at 90dBm: 4.0 VDC

(0.20VDC) at 80dBm: 5.0 VDC

(+0.20 0.35VDC) VHF:

at 120dBm: 3VDC

(+0.2V 0.45 VDC) at 105dBm: 4VDC

(0.20VDC) At 90dBm: 5VDC

(+0.2V 0.25 VDC) Refer to section 6.2.2 for Series I and to section 6.4.2 below for Series II Refer to section 6.2.2 for Series I and to section 6.4.2 below for Series II

Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 30) Service monitor

(IFR) set to SINAD IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 6 (see Figure 30) Service monitor

(IFR) set to SINAD IFR IF filter set to MID position or 30 kHz wide filter. Backplane cor-

responding to the receiver being verified:

SK1, Pin 5 (see Figure 30)

- DC Voltmeter measurement Refer to section 6.2.2.5 for Series I and to sections 6.4.2.5 or 6.4.2.6 for Series II 120 20170-201 28 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6. Radio Programming and Adjustments All receiver procedures detailed in this section should be done twice: once for the Main (or RX1) receiver module and a second time for the Auxiliary (or RX2) receiver module. Connect to the relevant module and its corresponding backplane PCB as required. Both Series of ParagonPD radio module assemblies share the same backplane PCBs. Refer to sec-

tion 3.1.2.1 for details. Programming for Series I is done via EPROMs while Series II uses of the RJ11 connector present on the front of the Speaker panel and mirrored on both backplane boards

(see section 6.3 below). 6.1 Series I 800MHz Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the ParagonPDs Tait T800 Series I radio

(half & full channel) used in all ParagonPD 800 MHz versions. This procedure is a supplement to the Tait programming procedure. 6.1.1 Recommended Items T800win programming kit for Series I:

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- EPROM Programmer BP MicroSystemss model CP-1128 (suggested model)

- EPROM Programmer software BP MicroSystemss (Version 3.08 or later)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 27C64 EPROM (150 nanoseconds or faster) 486 PC or better, Ms-Windows 3.1 or later 6.1.2 Introduction Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win soft-

ware for Series I Base station. It will be needed to generate a binary file required in programming the EPROM. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

Press and hold the Alt key while pressing the relevant hotkey (indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command).

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey letter without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As di-

rectory service box. For full description of the programming procedure, refer to the T800 Programming Software Users Manual. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is pro-

grammed outside the radio tuning range: 3 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed outside the radio tuning range: 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 120 20170-201 29 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.1.3 File Creation 1. In WIN 3.x: Start by clicking on File, then on Run, type the path or browse to select the Tait program, click OK to run PGM800Win executable program. In WIN 9x: click on Start, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click OK to run PGM800Win. 2. In the Tait programs Menu bar, click on View. On the drop-down menu, make sure that a check mark is present in front of the T800 EPROM option. If not, click this op-

tion to activate it and click on View again to verify that a check mark is now present. 3. Select File, New and choose the relevant unit model to program. Click on OK. The pro-

gram displays a dual-tabbed virtual file folder. 4. Click the System Information tab; enter the units serial number in the relevant field. In the User Remarks field, you may enter user comments as required (up to 16 charac-

ters). Use as a notepad (customer name, location, technical info etc...). Refer to Figure 18. Click the Channel Information tab; click the relevant frequency field to make it active and type in the required channel number in the frequency field. Refer to Figure 19 Figure 18 - Series I Receiver System Information Warning:

DO NOT enter anything in the CTCSS fields. If there is already something in any of those fields, erase their content(s). The indication should be 00.0 5. Select File, Save As. Enter an appropriate name in the Filename field. Always use the suffix .bin for these binary files. Choose the relevant drive and directory to save under and click on OK. 6. Repeat file creation procedure for the Exciter, the main receiver and for the diversity re-

ceiver modules as required. 120 20170-201 30 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. Select File, Exit to leave the program. Figure 19 - Series I Channel Information 6.1.4 Programming the EPROM Connect a straight 25-pin ribbon parallel cable between the PCs LPT1 port and the EPROM programmer. Apply power to it. At the DOS prompt, type bp.exe to open the EPROM program software. ParagonPD uses three 27C64 EPROMs (150 nanoseconds or faster) in the Exciter and Receivers modules. Repeat the following procedure for each EPROM as needed. Carefully grasp between thumb and index the 27C64 EPROM chip to be tested and gently insert it with a rocking motion in the EPROM Programmer socket until well seated. Navigate the programmers screen using the keyboard directional arrows. The left and right keys move through the available options and the up and down arrows select the function. 1. Move to and select Buffer 2. In the sub-menu, move to and select Load 3. Press ENTER 4. In the opened box, type in the directory path where the file created in paragraph 6.1.3 above is located. In the list of filenames, move to the appropriate file and press ENTER once to complete the selection and press ENTER a second time to load the file. This closes the directory service box. The message Load successful displays until direc-

tional arrows are pressed again. 5. Move to and choose Select 6. Press ENTER 120 20170-201 31 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. A selection box opens, in the Device Selector: field, type M27C64A. Move to and choose the brand of EPROM. Press ENTER to close the selection box. The program is now ready to configure the EPROM and the name of the device is displayed at the bot-

tom of the screen. 8. Move to and select Device 9. In the now opened sub-menu, move to and select Program. 10. Press ENTER. The program loads the binary file into the EPROM (approximately fifteen seconds). The message Function complete displays until directional arrows are pressed again. *

11. Move to and select Buffer 12. In the now opened sub-menu, move to and select Clear 13. Press ENTER. The program displays at the bottom of the screen: All buffers cleared 14. Press ENTER 15. Move to and select Quit 16. Press ENTER 17. Remove configured EPROM from the EPROM Programmer

* If an Error message (and warning beep) appears during the procedure, it normally indicates improper erasure of the EPROM. Replace it with a fresh one and start from the beginning. The removed EPROM will need to be cy-

cled through an EPROM eraser. 6.1.5 EPROM Installation Warning Always use a grounding strap and wear an anti-static bracelet when working with sensi-

tive circuitry or components susceptible to static discharge or transients damage. 1. Remove power to the radio 2. Unscrew #1 Pozidriv screw on the front panel to slide out the module. 3. Unscrew the fourteen #2 Pozidriv screws on the handle side and remove cover. 4. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully slide the blade between the EPROM socket and the chip (IC1) itself. Gently pry the chip away from its base and remove. The removed EPROM will need to be cycled through an EPROM eraser. Refer to Figure 21 on page 39. 5. Install the appropriate EPROM by carefully grasping the chip between thumb and index and gently inserting it with a rocking motion in its socket until well seated. 6. Select the channel configured in the EPROM as detailed in the next section. 6.1.6 Channel Selection via DIP Switches Channel selection is done via DIP switches inside each module. Example: To select channel 5, the DIP switch settings are as shown in Figure 20 below. Notes:

- For channel 1 (one), switch #1 must be OFF and switches #2 through #7 must be ON.

- Always have switch #8 set to OFF. 120 20170-201 32 ParagonPD Technical Manual

- The EPROM and DIP switches locations are identical in both receiver and exciter modules

(refer to Figure 21 and to Figure 22. Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 ON for 27C16 EPROM OFF for 27C64 EPROM

(Always leave OFF) O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 20 - Channel Selection via internal DIP switches 6.2 Series I 800MHz Radio Tuning This section covers some basic tuning and verification for the 800 MHz Series I base station modules. Note: Usually, this section is not done unless called for in section 6.1 Series I - Radio Pro-

gramming or in Table 11 Checklist B. 3 feet long double shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar). 6.2.1 Test Equipment You will need the following test equipment:

- Digital multimeter and probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

- Digital or analog calibrated Oscilloscope (X1, X2 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (with .001ppm TCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x six-inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

1x Torx screwdriver #10 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (provided with ParagonPD to connect the exciter and PA) 120 20170-201 33 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.2 Receiver Module (T885) Note 1: Refer to Figure 21, page 39 for locating tuning controls Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will be flashing showing that it needs to be re-tuned. 6.2.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during each receiver alignment procedures that follow:

1. Remove the receiver (T885) module from the ParagonPD rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail kit between the RX module and the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Set the multimeter to read DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD. 6.2.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 7V (working range is between 3V to 10V). Multiple channels: Select the middle channel via the EPROM PCB DIP switch. Adjust the VCO loop to 7V. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 10V and 3V respectively. 6.2.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1) IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel fre-

quency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1 kHz sine e) Select SINAD meter 2) Monitor the SINAD by connecting an X1 scope probe to the Demod O/P test point (close to PL103 in the first section from the module front panel) or on the relevant backplane board at SK1 pin 6 (see Figure 30 for test point location). 3) Adjust the helical resonators #H1 to #H3 for best SINAD. 4) Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do steps 3) and 4) again. (minimum requirement to reach is 12 dB SINAD for 110 dBm) 5) Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in the next paragraphs below. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20170-201 34 ParagonPD Technical Manual WARNING: Do not attempt to re-tune the IF stages (i.e. L312 to L318). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-

programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the DSP mo-

dem coefficient settings and may significantly reduce the radio performances over data. 6.2.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Generator mode, Output T/R

IFR TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off, except for wideband. Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios.

2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level must be better than -110dBm

(including cable loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1.5dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. Note:

If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-end. If it is still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 6.2.2.5 RSSI Adjustment 1. Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110dBm modulated by a 1 kHz tone at a deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel). 2. Adjust RV301 (RSSI level) to give 2.0V RSSI output when measured with a multimeter at SK301 pin 2 or on the relevant backplane board at SK1 pin 5 (see Figure 30 for test point lo-

cation). 3. Vary the RF level and check the RSSI output voltage (Figure 28):

1) At 120 dBm: 1.2 VDC (+0.20 0.45VDC) 2) At 90 dBm: 4.0 VDC (+0.20 0.20 VDC) 3) At 80dBm: 5.0 VDC (+0.20 0.35VDC) If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. 120 20170-201 35 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.3 Exciter Module (T881) Note 1: Refer to Figure 22 on page 40 for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will be flashing showing that it needs to be re-tuned. 6.2.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station 2. Prepare the multimeter to read DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T881) module from the base station rack frame 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail kit between the exciter module and the empty chassis exciter slot. 6. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R out-

put and the exciter antenna connector. 7. Apply power to the base station 6.2.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 7VDC. Multiple channels: Adjust the VCO loop to 7V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 10V and 3V respectively. Note: Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. Where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 6.2.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter (BW) set to 30KHz 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 120 20170-201 36 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.3.4 Low Frequency Balance Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source: Demod Out Connector). Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the proce-

dure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Adjust RV-105 (REF MOD) close to the microphone connector, for best wave shape; no damping, no overshoot. Record the deviation read. 4. If transmission has not ended by itself, press PF1 again to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 8. 5. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Record deviation again. 6. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300 Hz. If not, re-adjust RV105 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 7. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare 1000 Hz sine wave adjust tone and the deviation produced between:

- Random data The difference should be lower than 300 Hz. For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel. 8. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use

(see Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to Checklist B - page 27. 6.2.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power must be:

800MHz (T881) = 4W 300mW. 3. If 4Watts is not reached, adjust helical #L300 for maximum power output (which should be at least 7W); adjust RV356 down to 4W. 120 20170-201 37 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.2.4 Power Amplifier Module (T889) 1. Re-install the exciter module into the Paragon rack frame 2. Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier 3. Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load. 6.2.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Out 1. Set RV63 (Power adjustment, access on the front panel) fully clockwise. 2. Key the transmitter from the exciter Carrier button. The power output should exceed 90W. 3. Adjust RV69 (Driver power, access from the left end side) until the output power drops to 90W. 4. Adjust RV63 (Power) to reduce power output to its nominal value (70W) or lower as re-

quired. 5. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 6.2.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level 1. Power up the T889 and adjust RV63 (Power) so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA normally op-

erates at 50W). 2. Adjust RV48 (Forward power Alarm set) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust RV63 (Power) for the normal operating power level. 6.2.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) 1. Power up the T889 and adjust RV63 (Power) for the normal operating power level. 2. Place a known mismatch of the required value (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust RV52 (re-

verse power alarm set) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. Example: A VSWR of 3:1 can be simulated by connecting an undetermined 3 dB pad to the PA output. This will result in a loss of 6 dB. 120 20170-201 38 ParagonPD Technical Manual FRONT PL103 Demod output RSSI Test point:

SK301 pin 2 SK301 Pin 1 L318 RSSI SET RV301 L320 IC301 L321 L319 L317 L316 L315 L314 L313 L312 IC1 12345678 TCXO C6 L1 CHANNEL SELECTION H3 H2 H1 Figure 21 - T885 Receiver tuning control location 120 20170-201 39 ParagonPD Technical Manual FRONT Micro-phone connector Ref Mod RV105 Temp control Hi-Temp adjust

#L300

#L300 Power Adjust RV356 IC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TCXO C6 L1 CHANNEL SELECTION IC202 Tail Timer Tx Timer BACK Figure 22 - T881 Exciter tuning controls location 120 20170-201 40 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3 Series II Radio Programming This procedure describes the steps needed to program the UHF & VHF model that uses the Para-

gonPD base station radios (half & full channels). 6.3.1 Recommended Items

- T800win programming kit for Series II:

486 PC or better, MS-Windows 3.1 or later

- PGM800Win programming software user's manual

- PGM800Win Windows based programming software

- T800-01-0002 programming cable (DB-25 to RJ-45 cable)

- Standard 25-pin parallel cable (terminated Male/Female) 6.3.2 Module Programming Before starting programming, have a PC running MS-Windows and the Tait PGM800Win software for Series II Base station. This program supports the use of a mouse but may be used without one if required. Keyboard access follows the conventional MS-Windows method as briefly described below:

- Press and hold the Alt key while pressing at the same time the relevant hotkey as indicated by an underlined letter on the menu command.

- On a drop-down menu, press only the hotkey without pressing the Alt key.

- Use the Tab key to cycle available fields and the Enter key to validate entries. E.g. Pressing Alt+F opens the File drop-down menu and pressing A opens the Save As di-

rectory service box. Receiver VCO and front-end alignment will be required when new receiver frequency is pro-

grammed outside the radio tuning range:

UHF = 2.5 MHz from previous center frequency. VHF = 1.5 MHz from previous center frequency. Exciter and PA alignment will be required when new transmitter frequency is programmed out-

side the radio tuning range:

VHF & UHF= 4 MHz from previous center frequency. 1. Connect the PC, via the supplied programming lead, to the speaker panels front-mounted RJ11 connector. 2. Run Tait PGM800Win program and follow instructions found in the T800 Programming Software Users Manual to select the proper module to be programmed. 3. Program required channel's frequencies. Do not program any CTCSS tones on channels. Do not change any other parameters. Refer to Figure 23, Figure 24, Figure 25 and Figure 26 for screen program examples. 4. Save the base station programming info to a file for further reference. 120 20170-201 41 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 23 - Receiver System Information Figure 24 - Receiver Channel Information screen 120 20170-201 42 ParagonPD Technical Manual Figure 25 - Exciter System Information screen Figure 26 - Exciter Channel Information screen 120 20170-201 43 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.3.3 Channel Selection via DIP Switches The backplane-mounted DIP switch settings override the default channel programmed by PGM800Win. To set a default channel via the software, all DIP switches must be set to OFF (i.e. 00000000). When a switch is Off, its binary count is active; when a switch is ON its binary count is in-

active. The various DIP switch combinations of ON or OFF make up a binary total, which identifies the channel number. To select a channel, set the appropriate DIP switch or switches to OFF to make the binary count total the channel number you want. Set all other switches to ON. It is recommended to set both SW1 (RX) and SW2 (TX) to the same settings on both back plane boards. Example: To select channel 5, set the DIP switches as shown below:

I X T H C T W S L E N N A H C Binary Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Always ON except when default channel is required O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 27 - Backplane DIP switches example - Channel 5 selected I X R H C T W S L E N N A H C 120 20170-201 44 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4 Series II Radio Tuning This section covers some basic radio tuning and verification for VHF (T83x-xx-nnnn) and UHF

(T85x-xx-nnnn) Series II base station modules. Note: Usually, this section is not done unless called for in section 6.3 Series II - Radio Pro-

gramming or in Table 11 Checklist B. 6.4.1 Test Equipment 1 HP 34330A Shunt 30A (UHF only, used for transmitter current measurement) 3 feet long double shielded N-M to BNC-M cable (RG-214 or RG-223) 2x 'BNC' to 'N' type adapters (e.g. Amphenol, Greenpar).

- Digital multimeter & probes (e.g. Fluke 77)

- Digital or analog calibrated Oscilloscope & scope probes (X1, X2 selectable)

- Calibrated COM-120B (.001ppm TCXO and 30kHz IF options)

- Bird RF power meter with 150W / 50 ohm dummy load (optional)

- Pozidriv screwdriver #1 & #2

1x Six inch adjustable wrench

- RF tuning/trimming tools.

- Extender Rail Kit for Series II chassis (T800-13-0000)

1x Torx screwdriver #10 1x 6" coax cable N-M to BNC-M (comes with the radio to connect the exciter to the PA) 6.4.2 Receiver module (T855 & T835) Note 1: Refer to Figure 32 (T855) and to Figure 34 (T835) for locating tuning controls. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning, The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 6.4.2.1 Initial Setup This initial setup will be used during all receiver alignment procedures described be-

low:

1. Remove the receiver (T855 or T835) module from the ParagonPD rack frame 2. Remove the receiver top cover (nearest the handle). 3. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail Kit for Series II to the empty chassis receiver slot. 4. Prepare the multimeter to DC Volts. 5. Apply power to the ParagonPD. 120 20170-201 45 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T855 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T835 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels:

1. T855 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle channel. 2. T835 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. 3. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of respectively All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T855 and within 13V and 5V for the T835. 6.4.2.3 Front-End Alignment 1. IFR COM120B settings:

a) Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R output and the receiver antenna connector. b) Select the generator mode (GEN button) and set to the main receiver channel fre-

quency c) Select and turnon GEN2 d) Set the FM Deviation to 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) using 1KHz sine e) Select SINAD meter f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to moni-

tor at the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835). 2. Adjust the helical resonators for best SINAD: #FL410 and #FL420 (T855) or L410, L420, L460 and L470 (T835). 3. Continually decrease the RF level to reach 12dB SINAD, then re-do step 2) & 3) again.

(minimum requirement to reach is 12dB SINAD for -110dBm) 4. Perform the SINAD linearity tests described in paragraph 6.4.2.4. If it fails to pass the requirement, contact your Dataradio technical support. WARNING: Do NOT attempt to re-tune the IF stages

(i.e. L310 to L390 for T855, CV318 or L330 to L360 for T835). These adjustments do not need to be re-adjusted after frequency re-

programming. Touching these coils will have a direct impact on the mo-

dem DSP coefficient settings and may reduce significantly the radio per-

formances over data. 6.4.2.4 SINAD and Linearity Check 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

a) Generator mode, Output T/R 120 20170-201 46 ParagonPD Technical Manual b) IFR TX frequency to match the main radio RX frequency c) Filter set to wide band (no audio filter) d) Select Gen2 (Modulating tone fixed to 1KHz). All other Gen must be off. e) Set deviation to 3.0KHz for full channel or 1.5KHz for half channel radios. f) Use a X1 scope probe connected to IFR SINAD input and monitor the Discriminator O/P on the backplane at SK1 pin 6 (RX-audio1). Alternately, it is also possible to monitor at the receiver TP314 (T855) or at the receiver IC350 pin 7 (T835) 2. Lower the RF level to get a 12dB SINAD reading. Level must be better than -110dBm

(including cable loss). 3. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2kHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) above the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1dB from the on frequency SINAD reading. For T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full chan-

nel) or 0.8kHz (half channel). 4. Offset the IFR TX frequency 2KHz (full channel) or 1kHz (half channel) below the main radio RX frequency, record the SINAD reading. It should remain within 1dB from the on-frequency SINAD reading. For T855, use above values, for T835 use 1.5kHz (full channel) or 0.8kHz (half channel). Note: If one of the above requirements is not met, try to re-tune the front-

end. It still failed, contact your Dataradio technical support. 6.4.2.5 RSSI Adjustment (UHF: T855)

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -110dBm modulated by a one kHz tone at a deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel).

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 2.0V RSSI output at SK330 pin 2 or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter (See Figure 30 for test point location).

- Vary the RF level and check the RSSI output voltage ( Figure 28):

1) At 120 dBm: 1.2 VDC (+0.20 0.45VDC) 2) At 90 dBm: 4.0 VDC (+0.20 0.20 VDC) 3) At 80dBm: 5.0 VDC (+0.20 0.35VDC) If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support.

-80

-70 dBm

-120 -110 -100 -90 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 e g a t l o V Figure 28 - T855 and T885, RSSI Curve: volt to dBm 120 20170-201 47 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.2.6 Note: This check is only recommended for Paragon/R model running DBA protocol 3.06.009 RSSI Adjustment (VHF: T835) series or later.

- Apply an on-channel signal from the RF generator at a level of -100dBm with deviation of 3kHz (full channel) or 1.5kHz (half channel) at 1kHz tone.

- Adjust RV320 (RSSI level) to give 4.5V RSSI output at RSSI test point (near quad. Coil L360) or on backplane SK1 pin 5 when measured with a voltmeter

- Vary the RF level and check the RSSI output voltage :

1) At 120 dBm: 3.0 VDC (+0.20 0.45VDC) 2) At 105 dBm: 4.0 VDC (+0.20 0.20 VDC) 3) At 90dBm: 5.0 VDC (+0.20 0.25VDC) If the requirement cannot be reached, contact your Dataradio technical support. Figure 29 - T835, RSSI Curve: Volt to dBm PL1 F F O SW1 N O F F O SW2 N O O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I H C T W S L E N A H C X T O F F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I H C T W S L E N A H C X R SK1 1 5 6 RSSI ouput SK1 pin 5 RX-Audio1 SK1 pin 6 Figure 30 T800-50-0001 Backplane and test pins location 120 20170-201 48 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.3 Exciter Module (T857, T837 or T881) Note 1: Refer to Figure 33 (T857) and to Figure 35 (T837) for locating tuning controls and com-

ponents. T881 series II will be included in a later release. Note 2: When the synthesizer is unlocked, the front panel green LED called "Supply" will flash indicating that it needs re-tuning. Warning: The LED will also flash when the unit is in setup mode while connected to the PGM800win program. 6.4.3.1 Initial Setup 1. Shut down power to the base station 2. Prepare the multimeter to DC Volts. 3. Remove the exciter (T857 or T837) module from the base station rack frame 4. Remove the exciter top cover (nearest the handle). 5. Connect a 3 feet long double shielded cable (N-M to BNC-M) between the IFR T/R out-

put and the exciter antenna connector. 6. Connect the ParagonPD Extender Rail Kit to the empty chassis exciter slot. 7. Apply power to the base station 6.4.3.2 Synthesizer Alignment Single channel: Connect the multimeter to the long lead of L1 in the VCO (this measures the synthesizer loop voltage). 1. T857 (UHF) Tune VCO trimmer C6 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 10V DC. 2. T837 (VHF). Tune VCO trimmer CV1 for a synthesizer loop voltage of 9VDC. Multiple channels:

1. T857 (UHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 10V using the middle channel. 2. T837 (VHF) Adjust the VCO loop to 9V using the middle frequency channel. All channels should lie within the upper and lower limits of 16V and 3V respectively for the T857 and within 13V and 5V for the T837. Note:

Normally, the fast TX key option is installed and the synthesizer is always ener-

gized. In the case where that option was not fitted, key the transmitter by pressing the front panel Carrier button to make the above adjustment possible. 6.4.3.3 TX Frequency Error Adjustment 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

- Receiver mode

- Zoom the RF Error window: select 10Khz range IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz 120 20170-201 49 ParagonPD Technical Manual 2. Key the transmitter by pressing the front panel TX-Key button and measure the carrier output frequency. It should be within 300 Hz. If it is not, adjust the TCXO to trim to meet the requirement, preferably within 100Hz. 6.4.3.4 Low-Frequency Balance Adjustment PGM800Win controls this adjustment. Electronic potentiometer (256 step) is used to allow channel adjustment of two-point modulation (Low freq. balance). 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

Receiver mode and Oscilloscope display (Source Demod out connector, DC cou-

pled). IFR RX frequency to match the radio transmit frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz Zoom the Deviation window: select 10kHz Range and DC coupling. 2. Select the active or, the lowest (in the case of multi-channel base) frequency channel (via dip switch) 3. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the proce-

dure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. You can also run both programs on the same com-

puter if two serial COM ports are available. 4. Adjust IC220 via PGM800Win reference modulation to obtain the best square wave, no damping, no overshoot. (You can use either the mouse or up and down arrow keys). Record the deviation read. 5. If transmission has not ended by itself, press BDLCPD PF1 to stop it. For single-channel unit, proceed to step 8. 6. For multi-channel unit, select the highest frequency channel. Transmit a square wave by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Record deviation again. 7. The difference in deviation between the two channels should be less than 300Hz. If not, re-adjust IC220 to "average" the square wave shape on both channels until the spec is met. 8. To confirm the adjustment, select the active, or the lowest frequency channel. Compare 1000 Hz sine wave adjust tone and the deviation produced between:

- Random data The difference should be lower than 300 Hz. For multi-channel unit, repeat this step on the highest frequency channel. 8. Select the active channel. Transmit a TX ON (Modulated) adjustment tone by pressing the BDLCPDs PF1 button and following the procedure outlined in section 3.2.1.1.2.2. Make sure that deviation level read on the IFR correspond to model and bit rate in use

(see Table 8 Carrier deviations for Tone or Data Modulation). Re-adjust deviation as necessary referring to the related Checklist (B for ParagonPD - page 27 120 20170-201 50 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.3.5 Exciter Power Output 1. Apply the following settings to the IFR:

IFR RX frequency to match the main radio TX frequency IF Filter set to 30KHz

- Receiver mode, Output T/R

- Select auto range in the Power reading window

- Connect the coaxial cable from the IFR T/R to the Exciter output connector 2. Key the Exciter by pressing the module PTT button. The output power must be:

- VHF (T837) = 800 mW 200mW

- UHF (T857) = 1W 300mW

800 (T881) = 4W 300mW 6.4.4 Power Amplifier Module (T859 or T839)

- Re-install the exciter module into the ParagonPD rack frame

- Connect the Exciter module to the Power Amplifier.

- Connect the Power Amplifier output to the IFR T/R connector or to a stand-alone BIRD style power meter, terminated with a 150W dummy load.

- Forward and reverse power alarm set (control) are identified on the PA cover. 6.4.4.1 Power Amplifier Power Output

- Key the transmitter on the exciter and adjust the PA output for 100W using front panel power control. If power cannot be reached, refer to section 6.4.4.4 for T859 UHF model or to Tait T839 service manual for T839 model. Cable loss should be included in the reading. 6.4.4.2 Forward Power Alarm Level 1. Power up the PA and adjust front panel power control so that the output power is at the alarm level required, usually 20% lower than nominal value (e.g. 40W if the PA nor-

mally operates at 50W). 2. Adjust the forward power alarm set (T859: RV48 or T839: RV101) so that the forward power alarm LED lights. 3. Adjust front panel power control (T859: RV63 or T839: RV109) for the normal operat-

ing power level 6.4.4.3 Reverse Power Alarm Level (Optional) 1. Power up the PA and adjust the front panel power control for the normal operating power level. 2. Place a known mismatch of the required value (e.g. 3:1 VSWR) and adjust the reverse power alarm set (T859: RV52 or T839: RV105) so that the reverse power alarm LED lights. Example:

A VSWR of 3:1 can be simulated by connecting an unterminated 3dB pad to the PA output. This will result in a return loss of 6dB. 120 20170-201 51 ParagonPD Technical Manual 6.4.4.4 Tait T859 (UHF) Standard Tuning Procedure 1. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, set RV69 (driver power level) fully clockwise. 2. For all units, preset the tuning controls as shown in Figure 31 Figure 31 - T859 Tuning Settings 3. Set RV63 (front panel power control) fully clockwise. 4. Key on the exciter (press PTT button). 5. Adjust CV1 for maximum output. 6. Adjust CV8 for maximum output. 7. Adjust CV32 for maximum output. 8. Adjust CV51 and CV57 for maximum output. 9. Adjust CV34 and CV35 for maximum output. 10. Recheck all settings. The power output should exceed 110W. 11. For sets with serial numbers following 217262, adjust RV69 (driver power level) until the output power drops to 110W. 12. For all units, adjust RV63 to reduce the power output to the required level (normally 100W). 6.4.4.5 Tait T859 Tuning for Best Efficiency 1. Insert a Shunt current device (HP 34330A Shunt 30A ) between the power supply red wire and its 13.8Vdc output, then connect the shunt to the multimeter (VDC scale) 2. While transmitting, monitor the current. It should remain under 22A. 3. Retune CV32, CV51 and CV57 towards maximum capacitance to obtain minimum sup-

ply current, but do not exceed a maximum drop of 0.5A per control. 4. Check that the supply current is <22A for 100W output power. Note:

These control settings are normally very close to minimum supply current. If the current is reduced too far, maximum power output will drop and 2f rejection may degrade. 120 20170-201 52 ParagonPD Technical Manual IC 310 SK330 pin 2 Figure 32 - T855 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-201 53 ParagonPD Technical Manual TCXO Figure 33 - T857 Exciter Tuning Controls Locations 120 20170-201 54 ParagonPD Technical Manual L410 L420 L1 L460 L47 L330 CV318 L340 RSSI Test Point P207 IC 700 CV1 L350 IC 350 L360 Figure 34 - T835 Receiver Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-201 55 ParagonPD Technical Manual IC700 TCXO L1 CV1 IC220 Figure 35 - T837 Exciter Tuning Controls Location 120 20170-201 56 ParagonPD Technical Manual Appendix 1 - ParagonPD Deviation adjust 1. Using the WinRIS, press TX ON (Modulated) and record deviation level as read on the IFR. 2. Using Windows Notepad, Edit the .bp2 file named with the corresponding BDLCPD serial number (e.g. abcd.bp2). Save as to another file name and keep it in case something goes wrong while changing a parameter. 3. Locate the line labeled Dev0 Par85= and record the value beside the = sign. This is the corresponding parameter value to the deviation read in step 1. 4. Apply the following formula to determine the new parameter value to be set:

(New Par85 value) = [(initial Par85 value) X (target deviation) / (deviation read)] + 2 5. Change the value in the file, Save as using the BDLCPD serial number file name. 6. Run the WinRIS again and do a Put From. From the opened window, select the file that you just made the change to and then press OK 7. Again, check deviation level while pressing TX ON (Modulated). If the level is now correct, press Stationreset to make the change permanent. Otherwise do step 5 again, changing the value entered in the file by 1 or 2 digit(s) up or down, fine-tuning directly the Par85 (DSP deviation) parameter. Do steps 6 and 7 again to confirm acceptance. This last step may have to be repeated once or twice while varying the entered value up or down. If unable to obtain the correct level after editing up and/or down by no more than 2, contact System Engineering. 120 20170-201 57 ParagonPD Technical Manual 7. Specifications GENERAL Frequency VHF 136 -156 MHz 148 -174 MHz UHF 400 - 440 MHz1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 MHz (Series I) Rx 800 - 880 MHz Tx 850 - 870 MHz Rx 870 960 MHz Tx 870 960 MHz 5W only RF/Modem Assembly Size Frequency Stability 19.0 W x 17.5.0 H x 12.5 D + 2.0 connector allowance 2.5 ppm 1.0 ppm 1.5 ppm Rx Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC 1.5A max. (Two receivers) Tx Current Consumption @ 13.8 VDC 21A DC max. @ 100W 24A DC max. @ 100W 24A DC max. @ 70W Base Station Power Consumption

@ 115 VAC Channel spacing 6A max. 12.5 or 25 kHz Operating Temperature Range

-30C to +60C (deleted power supply, catalog number ending with a 0)

-10C to +60C (with standard Dual Power Supply assembly, catalog number ending with a 2) RECEIVER Selectivity @ 25 kHz

@ 12.5 kHz Sensitivity @ 12 dB SINAD Spurious Response Intermodulation

- EIA 25 kHz

- EIA 300-096 12.5 kHz Hum and Noise

- EIA

- ETS 300-096 TRANSMITTER Rated Continuous RF Power Range of Adjustment Spurious Emissions

- transmit

- standby Hum and Noise

- narrow

- Wide VSWR Stability Transmitter Sideband Noise

@ +/-25 kHz

@ +/- 1 MHz 95 dB 89 dB 85 dB 80 dB N/A 100W 20 100 W

-50 dB

-55 dB

-95 dBc

-105 dBc 85 dB 85 dB 90 dB 85 dB

-117 dBm 100 dB 55 dB 50 dB 100W 20 100 W

-36 dBm to 1 GHz/-30 dBm to 4 GHz

-57 dBm to 1 GHz/-47 dBm to 4 GHz

-50 dB

-55 dB 5:1 mismatch

-95 dBc

-105 dBc 85 dB 80 dB 50 dB 45 dB 70W 20 70 W

-45 dB

-50 dB

-88 dBc

-100 dBc 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20170-201 58 ParagonPD Technical Manual FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS DGFSK modulation VHF UHF 800 MHz 136 - 156 MHz 148 - 174 MHz 1 400 - 440 MHz 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS SRRC4FSK modulation FCC CASTEL0007 CASTEL0002 CASTEL0021 CASTEL0023 CASTEL0025 CAS8IPT889BW (100 Watts) CAS8IPT881 (5Watts) 400 - 440 MHz 1 440 - 480 MHz 480 - 520 MHz 800 - 870 MHz FCC EOTBDD4T85-1 EOTBDD4T85-2 EOTBDD4T85-3 EOTBDD4T889 (100 Watts) EOTBDD4T881 (5Watts) 800 - 870 MHz Pending UHF 800 MHz Series I 800 MHz Series II

* Operating under Class II permissive change IC (DOC) *

737195375A 737195376A 3993195401A N/A 737194358 IC (DOC) *

3993195401A N/A 737194358 737194358 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20170-201 59 ParagonPD Technical Manual